JP2022023297A - Heating cooker - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker with increased convenience for a user, which includes a plurality of heating sources such as induction heating sources.SOLUTION: A heating cooker of the present invention includes a microwave heating source and an oven heating source that use a heating chamber, an induction heating source that executes cooking in a place other than the heating chamber, and an integrated control device. The integrated control device can execute a coordinate cooking mode operation for coordinating three heating sources. The heating cooker includes a central operation part and an individual operation part for setting a coordinate cooking mode. The central operation part can determine start and cancellation of the coordinate cooking mode. The individual operation part can determine start and end of a cooking process by the induction heating source. When cooking by the coordinate cooking mode is started, an input at the central operation part is restricted and an unnecessary input is prevented during a period in which the cooking process is progressed. When the cooking process is progressed and advanced to a stage of cooking in the heating chamber, an input at the individual operation part is restricted. When an abnormality is detected in the process of the coordinate cooking mode, a heating operation is stopped, but a cooling fan continues a heat radiation operation to prevent overheating.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

The present disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated such as a pot placed on a top plate.

There are roughly three types of cooking cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" that is installed in kitchen furniture such as kitchen counters. The second is a "stationary type" that is used by placing it in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas table (also referred to as a "gas combustion type table"). The third is a small and portable "tabletop type" that is placed and used at an arbitrary position on a table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" cookers equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular as those that can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture, and the design is more flexible than the "stationary" or "desktop" ones. The degree is extremely low, and the difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in type heating cooker, a grill storage (also called "oven room" or "heating room") that is heated by an induction heating source inside the main body so that the range of cooking can be expanded is unified below. Is provided with a "heating chamber"), and the heating chamber is configured to introduce microwaves from a microwave heating source (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). A cooker having a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles is called a combined cooking cooker.

Further, in order to complete one object to be cooked, it has been proposed to move a cooking utensil such as a pot containing the object to be cooked between a plurality of heating places to cook. By changing the heating place, the heating space (environment) changes, so that there is an advantage that it can be used for various types of cooked foods (see, for example, Patent Documents 3 to 5).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-031202 (Page 1, FIG. 5) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-207400 (Page 5, FIG. 9) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-129259 (Page 1, FIG. 6) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-96484 (Page 1, FIG. 14) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-87506 (Page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in Patent Documents 3 to 5 above, when using a plurality of heating sources at distant positions in the process of finishing one cooking, even if the user's operation command is erroneous, it is not intended. It is necessary to take measures to prevent the heating source from operating or stopping. If this measure is not sufficient, it may cause confusion for users and may lead to cooking failure. That is, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as cooperation of a plurality of heating sources and timely notification and display of the cooperation status of the heating sources to the user.

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient cooking cooker that can be widely used for various kinds of cooking by improving the operability of the user.

The cooker for the first disclosure is
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means with multiple heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
With input means,
The control unit
A single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, and
A combined cooking mode in which the cooking process is automatically advanced using the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means.
The cooking process using the first heating means and the cooperative cooking mode having the cooking process using the second heating means are switched and executed by a command from the input means.
In the single cooking mode, the control pattern of the first heating means is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the combined cooking mode, the heating operation is started by determining the control pattern of the second heating means.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking operation is started by determining the object to be cooked by the input means.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the second disclosure is
With a heating room
Display means and
A first heating means for heating the object to be cooked, which houses the object to be cooked, outside the heating chamber.
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber,
Input means and
A control unit that receives a command from the input means and controls the first heating means and the second heating means is provided.
The control unit cooperates with a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. Has a function to execute cooking mode,
When the main power is turned on, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen on the display means, and during the period of displaying the standby initial screen, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen.
(1) When the first command is received from the input means, at least one identification information of the object to be cooked that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
(2) When a second command is received from the input means, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the third disclosure is
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
The input operation unit that receives the user's command signal and
A control unit for controlling the heating operation of the first heating means and the second heating means is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are used in combination.
The control unit permits operation step A for determining whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is permitted for a specific object to be cooked selected by the input operation unit, and cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. In this case, when the operation step B for performing the first specific notification including the information about the cooking object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode and the cooking start command from the input operation unit are received after the first specific notification. , The operation step C for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and the operation step C are executed.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the fourth disclosure is
With a heating room
Display means and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber, and
An input means for giving a command to the first heating means and the second heating means, and
A control unit for controlling the first heating means and the second heating means in response to a command from the input means is provided.
The control unit cooperates with a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. Has a function to execute cooking mode,
When the main power is turned on, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means on the display means, and displays the standby initial screen. During the displayed period,
(1) Upon receiving the first command to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the standby initial screen is switched to the first specific screen to display a cooking menu capable of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.
(2) When the first heating means receives a second command to specify a control pattern, the display means displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen, and the control menu of the single cooking mode is displayed. To display,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the fifth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by using the first heating means, and after the preheating step, the control unit uses the first heating means and the object to be cooked to cook the food. It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode having a cooking step 1 for heating an object and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means after the cooking step 1.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the sixth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by using the first heating means, and a cooking step of heating the object to be cooked by the second heating means in parallel with the preheating step. It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode having 1 and a cooking step 2 using the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step and the first heating means after the cooking step 1. rice field,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the seventh disclosure is
A combined cooking mode with multiple control menus that allows two or more heating sources to operate in a predetermined sequence.
A cooperative cooking mode with multiple cooperative cooking menus that heats and cooks the objects to be cooked in each place inside the heating chamber and above the top plate in a predetermined order.
A display means for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu, and
The compound cooking mode and the input means capable of selecting the cooperative cooking mode are provided.
When the start key of the input means is operated with at least two of the control menus displayed on the display means at the same time, the control displayed at a predetermined display position A of the display means. One of the menus is selected as the "control menu to be executed" and shifts to the cooking process of the combined cooking mode.
When the start key is operated while at least two of the linked cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, one of the linked cooking menus displayed at the predetermined display position B is displayed. It is selected as the "cooking menu to be executed" and shifts to the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode.
Each time the input means is operated, the control menu is sequentially displayed at the display position A of the display means, and each time the operation is performed, the control menu is displayed at the display position A in the reverse direction. The input keys to be placed next to each other,
The input means has an input key for sequentially displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time it is operated, and an input for displaying the linked cooking menu backward at the display position B each time it is operated. Place the keys and next to each other,
The input key for displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu in the display position A and the display position B by forward and reverse feeding is shared in the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode. Yes,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the eighth disclosure is
The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating source having a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
In the cooperative cooking mode in which one cooking object is heated twice or more by using the first heating means and the second heating means, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of cooked object is selected. The first selection, which selects one cooking menu,
In the combined cooking mode in which a plurality of the heating sources are automatically combined to heat one object to be cooked simultaneously or at different times, one control menu is selected from a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of objects to be cooked. The second selection part to select and
A control unit for controlling the first heating means and the second heating means in response to the selection of the first selection unit and the second selection unit is provided.
With,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the ninth disclosure is
With a heating room
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
A display means for notifying cooking information and
A selection means for selecting a linked cooking menu for the linked cooking mode prepared for each type of cooked object and a control menu shared by multiple types of cooked objects.
A control unit that controls the display means, the first heating means, and the second heating means in response to a command from the selection means.
A function setting unit that limits the functions of the control unit is provided.
The control unit uses one or both of the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means in combination to execute a combined cooking mode having the control menu, and the first heating means. A function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking process to be used and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined, and a function of controlling the display means according to information set in the function setting unit. Have and
The control unit is preset in the function setting unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected or when the door of the heating chamber is opened after the main power is supplied and the display means is activated. When the permission condition is satisfied, the first specific screen for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The cooker for the tenth disclosure is
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber using the second heating means, and a cooking step of heating the cooked object using the second heating means after the preheating step. 1 and a cooking step 2 in which the cooked object heated in the cooking step 1 is further heated by heating the cooked object using the first heating means after the cooking step 1. Equipped with a function to execute the cooperative preheating cooking mode that it had,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of widely supporting various kinds of cooking by linking a plurality of heating means.

It is a conceptual diagram which showed the communication system between one house and the outside which showed Embodiment 1. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the home electric appliance and the home gateway of one house shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the whole of the kitchen furniture in which the built-in type composite cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 is installed. It is a perspective view which shows the state of the kitchen furniture before incorporating the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the intermediate stage of the work of incorporating the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. 5 into the kitchen furniture. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical sectional view showing a dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 when viewed from diagonally forward. It is a top view of the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the cooking device of FIG. 5 along the line ZZ of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the WW line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the YY line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the VV line of FIG. It is a vertical sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut by the X-ray line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking device of FIG. 5 is installed in kitchen furniture. It is a simplified plan view for demonstrating the input operation part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device of FIG. 5. It is an enlarged plan view which shows the central operation part and the integrated display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the right operation part and the right side display part of the heating cooker of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the left operation part and the left side display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which simplified the main structure shown in FIG. 24. It is a vertical sectional view in the case of cutting along the SS line of FIG. 24. The schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 is enlarged and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. It is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the 1st cooling fan, and the inverter circuit board. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main cooling air passage of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the detail of the inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the main (range grill) control menu and the display area in the integrated display part of the cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. It is a list of explanations of the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the single cooking mode of induction heating. It is the flowchart 1 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. It is the flowchart 3 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the type of cooking. It is explanatory drawing which shows the control operation at the time of performing the fried food cooking (automatic) which is one kind of induction heating cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation portion of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view 1 of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during combined cooking of the cooking device of FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each input operation and process in the case of carrying out the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode and the single cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between an input key and a cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display up to the transition between the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. It is a flowchart 1 which shows the notification operation of the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. It is a flowchart 2 which shows the notification operation of the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the cooking process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode which is one kind of the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the cooking process of the cooperative preheating cooking mode which is one kind of the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition and the determination result before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition and the determination result before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart 3 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart 5 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the combined cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 1 is a plan view showing a control operation of an input operation unit and a display unit (integrated display unit / left side display unit) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view and an explanatory view showing an operation of a central operation unit and a display operation of an integrated display unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in the integrated display part when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the linked cooking mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display content of the integrated display part at the time of cooking "hamburger steak" in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger steak” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking the “hamburger steak” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking “karaage” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the linked cooking mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator and the cooking device during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. In the example shown in FIG. 104, FIG. 2 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between a refrigerator, a home gateway, and a cooking device. In the example shown in FIG. 104, it is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the integrated display part, and the input operation part at the time of cooking "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display operation of the integrated display part in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker in the example shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 104. It is a flowchart which showed the operation of the integrated control device which shows the example of the use of the inventory information of a refrigerator. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 112. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 112. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 112. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the door is closed in the (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the cooking device of FIG. 116. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of an upper unit in a state where the top plate is removed in the cooking device of FIG. 116. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of an upper unit in a state where the top plate and the IH coil are removed in the cooking cooker of FIG. 116. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of an upper unit in a state where the top plate, the IH coil, and the cover are removed in the cooking cooker of FIG. 116. It is a reference perspective view which showed the flow of the cooling air in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 116. FIG. 16 is a bottom view (bottom surface) view of the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 116. It is a block diagram explaining the whole control function of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 116. FIG. 16 is an enlarged plan view showing an input operation unit and an integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 116. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 116. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the display content of the integrated display part and the input operation part in the case of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 116. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of a cooking device, and the type of cooking, for disclosing the third embodiment. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 2 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 3 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 4 is a time chart 4 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 5 is a time chart 5 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 3 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the (built-in type) composite cooking device according to the fourth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information exchange between the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. 133 and an external information management apparatus, etc. in chronological order. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 133 and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left side display unit. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left side display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 5 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking cooker according to the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the main control function part of the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. 137. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking cooker of FIG. 137 from the time when the main power is turned on to the selection of the cooking mode or the control menu. It is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 6. It is a block diagram which shows the main control function part of the cooking apparatus 1 shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking cooker shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. FIG. 3 is a flowchart 3 showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device disclosed in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main control-related portion of the cooking device of FIG. 145. It is a time chart which shows the operation example of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 145. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the whole control operation before the start of cooking of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 145. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the whole control operation after the start of cooking in the heating cooker of FIG. 145. It is a block diagram which shows the main internal function of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of display operation of a mobile information terminal. It shows the operation management system of the cooking apparatus and the home electric appliance which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 7. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of display operation of a personal digital assistant in the modified example shown in FIG. 161. FIG. 2 is an explanatory view of display operation of a personal digital assistant in the modified example shown in FIG. 161. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation part from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition of the cooking cooker disclosed in Embodiment 8 in chronological order.

(Definition)
The "home appliance" 400 means an electric device designed mainly for home use. Home appliances 400 include an induction cooker 1, a refrigerator 401, a television receiver 402, an air conditioner 403, an air purifier 404, a ventilation device 405, an electric rice cooker (including an electric jar rice cooker) 406, which will be described later. A microwave oven 408, a lighting appliance 409, and an air purifier 410 are included. In the following description, the "refrigerator" includes both a freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer) and a freezer having only a freezing function, unless otherwise specified.

The "device identification information" of the home electric appliance 400 is unique information for identifying the home electric appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as a MAC address, a manufacturer name of a home electric appliance 400, a model name (model name), a model number, and a serial number.

The "home gateway" 411 is an information processing device for relaying information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participating in a coordinated operation. Further, in addition to this, the operation of giving an operation command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as "data") from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function in order to manage the total power consumption of one household for all or a part of the home electric appliance 400. In this case, it may be called a "power control device", an "integrated management device", or the like.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current status such as operation, stop, and standby state of the home electric appliance 400 from the home electric appliance 400 by a wired or wireless signal.
When using wireless communication, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home electric appliance 400 by using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 may function as an "integrated management device" or a "power command device" for one home appliance (for example, an induction heating cooker 1) 400, another home appliance (for example). For example, for a lighting appliance 409), if the power consumption is not limited, it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or a "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other household appliances 400 does not exceed the specified upper limit of the total power consumption. This is a case where there is no function of regulating the power consumption of the luminaire 409 itself. Therefore, the home gateway 411 does not fall under any of the integrated management device and the power command device when viewed from the lighting fixture 409.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 115 disclose the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the built-in type composite (induction) cooking device 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is simply referred to as a "cooker".
In each figure, the reference numeral RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, and LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front and BK indicates the rear.

In the first embodiment, the "first heating means" HM1 is heated on a top plate 15 such as an induction heating source 9 or a gas combustor (burner) described later, in which the food to be cooked is housed. A means for heating an object N. The object to be heated N is, for example, a metal pan or frying pan.

In the following description, the term "heated object N placed on the top plate" refers to the case where the heated object N such as a pot is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 described later and heated, and the gas combustor. It means that both are included when the object to be heated N is placed on a support member such as a trivet arranged above the top plate 15 and heated, such as (burner).

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a plurality of heating sources for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113 described later. The heating source may be a microwave heating source 189, an oven heating source 188, or a gas combustor (burner) (not shown), which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating cooker" means a device having a heating unit for heating the object to be heated N. When there are a plurality of heating units, there may be a heating source that is heated by using a method different from the induction heating method, for example, another method such as a radiant electric heat source.

In the first embodiment, the "composite type cooking device" is provided with a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles, such as the relationship between the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like. Those that can be cooked in one heating chamber 113 by these two types of heating sources. The heating chamber 113 may be heated by both an oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Further, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113.

In the first embodiment, the "heating means (referred to as" oven heating source "in the following description)" of the heating chamber 113 is a heating source for heating the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and the inside of the heating chamber 113. Any of the heating sources installed in the space may be used.
Further, regardless of the form in which a heat generating member that becomes high in temperature by an induction heating method is arranged and the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is heated from the outside or the air inside the heating chamber 113 is heated by the heat generating member. good.

For example, in Japanese Patent Document No. 2017-74305, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305, there is a second heating body (a second heating body that heats a cooking dish arranged in a heating chamber (grill storage) on which an object to be cooked is placed from below. An induction heating coil) and a third heating element (induction heating coil) for heating an object to be cooked from the side have been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electric insulator is provided below the heating chamber, and an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electric insulator, and the IH heat is described. A configuration has been proposed in which a cooking plate placed on a coil is induced and heated. The cooking plate is made of an induction heating material. For example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material having a carbon content of 90% or more, a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, and the like are used.

Further, as a typical example in which a heat generating member that becomes high temperature by an induction heating method is arranged, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 supplies a high frequency current to an IH coil to generate a high frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. A high-frequency magnetic flux is linked with a heater arranged in the heater to allow an induced current to flow in the heater, and the Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself is used to heat and cook the object to be cooked in the heater. Is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, an electrically closed circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is chained to this heater. It has been proposed to mix and heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat in the heating chamber. The heater referred to here electrically forms a closed circuit, and a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high nickel alloy is bent into a predetermined shape, and both ends are joined to each other by welding or brazing. It was formed in an endless shape.

As a typical example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of these bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese patent document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also a structure in which about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm are wound.

Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-32551, which is another patent document, proposes an induction heating cooker in which an annular conductor formed in a ring shape with a flat plate-shaped conductive material is used as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source 9.

In the first embodiment, "cooperative cooking" means two or more cooking objects (including foods, meats, vegetables, etc.) having different heating locations and capable of independently setting heating operation conditions. Cooking that uses a heating source.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where a plurality of heating sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after microwave heating is finished and preheating is performed, the object to be cooked is moved to another place, and at the place after the movement, the cooking is completed by heating with the IH coil 17L described later. The case is a kind of "cooperative cooking" here.

Further, the food to be cooked is heated by a gas combustor (burner) inside the heating chamber 113, and then the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 15 to be moved to the gas combustor (burner) and the induction heating source 9. A form of "cooperative cooking" is also a form of heating with a burner to increase the degree of perfection of cooking.

Cooperative cooking is proposed in the form of a built-in cooking cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and operation management system for home appliances)
First, the operation management system of the home electric appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA shows one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors, and the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), which is one of the living spaces, has a refrigerator 401 and an induction heater. Home appliances 400 such as a heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, and kitchen furniture 2 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the living space also includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. There may be other rooms in the living space.

All living spaces are supplied with, for example, 200 V of electric power from the commercial power supply EP of the electric power company outside the house. The electric power is drawn into the house HA via the electricity meter 414.

Reference numeral 415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP having a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. The power line 415 includes a television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and a home gateway. The 411, the wireless router 419, and the environment detection unit 413 are connected to each other.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooker 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power line 415 via a predetermined power cord. The number of lighting fixtures 409 is not limited to one, but the other lighting fixtures are not shown.

Subsequently, FIG. 1 will be described.
416 is a wide area communication network (sometimes referred to as "communication network" or "Internet").
The wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a wireless router 419.

The 417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information communication terminal device 418. For example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information providing organization or an electric power company in a specific area may be used, or a server prepared by a manufacturer of the cooking cooker 1 may be used. This external server may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that use a cloud server: "IAaS", "PaaS", and "SAaS".

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from the external server 417. This content also includes recipe information (text, images) for various cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the above-mentioned environment detection unit 413 may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor that detects the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Further, the external server 417 functions as an information providing means for the home electric appliance 400. That is, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer), a distributor, a repair company, or an information service provider of the home electric appliance 400 alone or jointly by two or more organizations. , Various services related to the home electric appliance 400 are provided to the user via the wide area communication circuit network 416.

Further, the external server 417 may be generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as "Web server"). A web server conforms to HTTP (a protocol used for exchanging data such as HTTP documents and images between a web server and a web browser), such as various information communication terminal devices 418, home gateway 410, and the like. It refers to a service program that provides display information of HTTP and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of the information processing device (client) side software of the "information receiving side", and the server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location thereof. The remote control described above is realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from the information communication terminal device 418 described in detail later, for example, a device called a smartphone. Can be done.

The information communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by a user to make a call or communicate data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site, send / receive mail, and send a remote control signal via the wide area communication circuit network 416, but it may be a device that cannot make a call, and such a portable device. Communication devices are collectively called information communication terminal devices 418. A small portable personal computer is also a kind of information communication terminal device 418.

The information communication terminal device 418 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication in a state of being close to (or may be in contact with) several centimeters from the input / output unit of each home electric appliance 400. I have. This short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home electric appliance 400 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401.
On the other hand, control data (also referred to as a "control command") can be sent from the information communication terminal device 418 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and the home appliance 400 can be controlled according to the control command.

In the first embodiment, direct remote control from the information communication terminal device 418 to the home appliance 400 side is disabled. Since some home appliances 400 generate high heat such as a cooking device 1, remote control from outside the house 413 via the Internet, which is used by many people, is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home electric appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment refers to an information processing device for relaying information between two or more home electric appliances 400 and causing them to operate in cooperation with each other. Further, in addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a range hood 422, which will be described later, and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 are installed in the kitchen KT in the house HA.

Reference numeral 413A is a sensor unit of the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sensor unit 413A includes an environmental sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a motion sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). And have. The environment detection unit 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen KT) in which the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) existing in the air.

"Use of environmental information" includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retaining function of the electric rice cooker 406 is continuously operated at the end of the rice cooking process. In addition, the refrigerating target temperature and the freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or the "cooling mode". Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) When fine dust floating in the air is scattered, the air purifier 404 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen scattered is large, the operation of the air purifier 404 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, the lighting fixture 409 is turned on.

"Resident" means a person who resides in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include parents and children, siblings, sisters, etc. who are related to each other. When using the home electric appliance 400, it is called a "user" regardless of whether or not it is a resident.

"Home" means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may include an apartment house having a plurality of rooms and a plurality of families. That is, even in such an apartment house, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power cutoff device (one breaker BK, a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is considered to be the home here.

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" means information on some signal related to power consumption received by the home appliance 400 from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information related to a transmission command such as a power reduction request signal AS1 and a power reduction command signal AS2, which will be described later. The information includes information indicating the reception time (year / month and time in seconds) of the signal and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information such as "Reception time: June 9, 2020, 17:00, the instantaneous maximum power consumption is reduced by 2%" for the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the cooking device 1.

For example, in the heating cooker 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in time series in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC described later, and disappears even if the main power switch 98 is turned on or off. do not have. It is considered that turning the main power switch 98 on and off is considered as one cooking, and the memory is retained for at least several times. The amount exceeding that is automatically deleted in sequence.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of hardware to which the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment and the operation management system of home electric appliances are applied. As one living space, the kitchen KT will be described below as an example.

The kitchen KT to which the first embodiment is applied is provided with an air purifier 404 installed on a ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezer chambers 401A having different freezing temperatures, and a refrigerating chamber 401B. Refrigerator 401, microwave oven 408, built-in (induction) cooker 1 placed in kitchen furniture 2, range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 placed directly above the cooker 1, home -Gateways 411 are installed respectively. The electric rice cooker 406, the air conditioner 403, and the lighting fixture 409 described with reference to FIG. 1 are not shown.

The plurality of freezing chambers 401A in the refrigerator 401 have, for example, -18 ° C ± 2 ° C, -10 ° C, -2 ° C, etc., which are suitable freezing temperatures for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh foods (meat, fish, etc.). The freezing room (temperature range) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range also affect the aging of fresh foodstuffs (for example, beef) when they are stored for a long period of time. It can be changed.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outside is connected to the exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 is a hood in which the entire lower surface is opened as a suction port 425A, and an electric fan 426 for exhaust is installed inside the hood. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but the detailed configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is transmitted to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. Therefore, in order to transmit various operation information such as the start and stop of the exhaust operation and the intensity of the operation (large or small of the exhaust capacity) with the home gateway 411 inside the range hood 422, the transmission unit ( It is provided with a receiving unit (not shown) and a receiving unit (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. The communication unit 427 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotationally driven, air is sucked from the suction port 425A of the range hood 422, odors and smoke during cooking are also sucked, and the air is exhausted to the outside of the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 is a method of receiving an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the side of the cooking cooker 1 and starting the exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, the arrow FF1 indicates an air flow rising from the cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from the duct 424. FF3 indicates an air flow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420. FF4 shows the air flow blown out from the air purifier 404.

A heat sensing sensor (heat electromotive force element) may be arranged in the range hood 422 toward the cooking device 1. According to this configuration, the range hood 422 itself senses the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1, and itself controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed so as to be embedded in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped main body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

Reference numeral 431 is an air guide plate, which covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. Reference numeral 432 is a suction port formed at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422) by the air guide plate 431. Reference numeral 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite to the suction port 432.

The blower fan 429 sucks dirty air in the kitchen from the suction port 432, passes it through the filter 430, and discharges the purified air from the outlet 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed and the air in the room is purified.

Reference numeral 434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404, and is arranged so as to face the inlet portion of the suction port 432. This detects an odor from the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. If the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the suction port 432 side and is in front of the filter 430, there is no big difference in the effect regardless of where it is placed.

The detection result of the odor sensor 434 is that the odor intensity is determined by the odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is the home gateway 411. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 413 at any time. Therefore, inside the air purifier 404, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity with the home gateway 411. , A receiver (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 421 can detect the odor when the air purifier 404 is in operation and the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen KT reaches the air purifier 404 from the place where the odor is generated. Is.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured to include one or a plurality (multiple layers) of filters 430 having fine air passages in order to capture dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking with cooking oil (for example, “fried food”, “tempura”) is filtered by the cooking device 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430, and the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430. Combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtration performance of the filter 430 deteriorates. That is, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 is reduced, which leads to a situation in which the air purification capacity of the air purifier 404 is reduced. Therefore, an idea of avoiding the operation of the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oil smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-). No. 95126).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is drawn so as to be installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a place different from that in FIG. Further, not only one refrigerator 401 but a plurality of refrigerators 401 may be used.

Reference numeral 412 is a main body case constituting the outer shell of the home gateway 411. The main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height so that the resident can confirm the input operation and the display.

The 445 is an alarm device fixed to a vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, and will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply port 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking device 1 and the range hood 422.
In FIG. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking device 1. In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on the hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422 even if it is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 constantly executes the temperature monitoring operation even when the exhaust operation is not performed.

For example, the temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire region of the top plate 15, which will be described later, into at least 64 regions (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as “detection region”), and determines the temperature of each region. To detect.

The detection region includes an induction heating unit 17H of the cooking device 1 described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature in the detection region at predetermined time intervals not only during the operation of the range hood 421 but also during the period when the operation is stopped.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration may be adopted in which transmission is directly performed to the cooking cooker 1. Further, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmission unit 48 of the cooking cooker 1, the range hood 421 starts operation. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the cooking device 1 when the range hood 421 starts operation.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking device 1. Then, acquisition of temperature information is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire region of the top plate 15 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40 ° C.). When the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature, the interval between temperature measurement operations becomes slower. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the time when the operation of the cooking cooker 1 is started, the temperature monitoring operation is restarted.

The cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. Reference numeral 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking apparatus 1, and 114 is a door that rotatably covers the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

The heating cooker 1 places an object N to be heated such as a magnetic metal pot or a frying pan on a top plate 15 covering the upper surface thereof, and induces heating by an IH coil 17. 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two upper and lower spaces.

The CK is an installation space above the bottom wall surface 16S, and accommodates the IH coil 17.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home electric appliance 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Of the home appliances 400, the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408 receive electric energy control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408, but this point has been described earlier and will not be described in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a home electric appliance 400 that receives electric energy control.

The electric energy control unit 448 constantly acquires information on the amount of electric power used from the target home appliances (for example, the heating cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408) so as not to exceed the preset total electric energy amount. It has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400, and is already known as HEMS (household electric power management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, the power consumption control unit 448 becomes a target home electric appliance (for example, with the heating cooker 1) according to a predetermined priority. , Microwave oven 408, air conditioner 403) to reduce the power consumption.

In FIG. 4, in the home gateway 411, there is an environment detection unit 413 having a built-in human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of the human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown), a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity of the kitchen, and the like in a predetermined format. Reference numeral 453 is an environmental sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, and the like of the kitchen KT.

The human detection sensor 452 detects the presence of a person in the kitchen KT, particularly in the front area of the cooker 1 and the front area of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. The human detection sensor 452 is installed one or more inside the kitchen KT.

For example, when the distance between the front of the cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the person detection sensor is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT toward the space between the front of the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401. 452 is installed.

Further, when the distance between the front of the cooking cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is a little, one person detection sensor 452 faces the space near the front of the cooking cooker 1 and the ceiling surface of the kitchen KT. Install at 420 etc. Then, another human detection sensor 453 may be installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like of the kitchen KT toward the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

One person detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect that the user is in front of the cooking cooker 1.
As described above, the place where the human sensing sensors 452 and 453 are installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking cooker 1 and the sensing ability of the human sensing sensor.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 413, but is a home detection device for detecting the presence of a person inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen KT or the like (not shown). It may function as one of the sensors. In that case, information such as an unlocking sensor that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used in the home detection device. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy in the determination process of being at home and being away from home.

The input unit 449 can operate various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of the functions, it is possible to specify a home electric appliance 400 for setting an upper limit value of power consumption, and then set an upper limit value of power consumption, a usable time zone, and the like. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking device 1, for example, 4800W, 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function of inputting by voice in addition to a function of operating and inputting a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen, and the voice emitted by the resident is input by a microphone unit (shown in the figure). You can enter various desired functions by issuing to (1).

The 445 is an alarm device that gives an alarm to a resident by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives the measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and the monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the electric energy control unit 448, the electric power is not limited or cut off due to a change in the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) 446, a central control unit 447, and a storage device 450.
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication individually with a home electric appliance 400 such as a cooking device 1 and a refrigerator 401.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 has relatively such information as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the history information of the daily power control of the home electric appliance 400, and the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. It is a device that records a large amount of data. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, HDDs, or the like.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer that is the core of information processing, a ROM, and a RAM, and stores a computer program that regulates various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication circuit network (Internet) that performs wireless communication via a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wireless router 419.

In FIG. 4, only one communication unit 446 is described in the home gateway 411, but the communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) for the home electric appliance 400 and the communication unit for the wireless router 419 are individually described. It may be provided in. Further, an NFC communication unit may be separately provided so that information can be directly exchanged with the NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418 by wireless communication.

Reference numeral 451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least January (up to 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the scheduled date and the scheduled start time (or time zone) of the event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident can be registered by the input unit 449.

When the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451 and the stored date and time arrives, the schedule management unit 451 issues a notification. The form of the notification is to display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or to notify by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Further, a method of issuing a notification to the information / communication terminal device 418 possessed by the resident may be used.

When the home electric appliance 400 such as the heating cooker 1 is activated, a notification may be given based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooking cooker)
Next, in FIGS. 5 to 115, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment will be described.
In FIG. 5, the cooking cooker 1 is a built-in type cooking cooker incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2. 2A is an installation port formed in the kitchen furniture 2. As will be described later, the heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, the cooking cooker 1 has two induction heating portions on the left and right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates a range in which the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating portion (corresponding to the “first heating portion”) provided in the range on the right side from the center line CL1 and can be induced and heated directly above this.
17HL is a left heating portion (corresponding to the “second heating portion”) provided in the range on the left side from the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. As described above, the cooking device 1 is a cooking device in which two "heating ports" (heating portions) are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

In addition, another induction heating unit may be provided between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL so as to straddle the left and right center lines CL1, and a three-port heating cooker may be used. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference code when referring to the "induction heating unit".

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate a desirable position on which the object to be heated (see FIG. 3) such as a metal pot or plate (baked plate) is placed. , Is provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15. The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed by printing on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user (user) of the cooking cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating portions 17H on the left and right. The voice guide of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, also allows the user to recognize that there are two induction heating portions on the left and right.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. The position marks 17LS and 17RS do not have to be circular, and for example, only the center point of a desirable position on which the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or a character. ..

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating reference positions that can be induced and heated by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R. ..

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as an IH coil, the reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when it is called "IH coil" 17, it may be either the IH coil 17L on the left side or the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described later, unless otherwise specified.

(Basics of heating source and control menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment includes three types of heating means having different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 is a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (second heating source). 3 heating source) is included.

The above-mentioned three heating sources can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating source can be used for cooking independently. The operation pattern of this form is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) The induction heating source 9 and at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination, and one cooking can be performed using two or more different places. .. The operation pattern of this form is the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) One cooking can be performed by using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 in combination. This operation pattern is the "composite cooking mode" KM2. The "operation pattern" here means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in a series, at the same time, or with a time lag. Including any of.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation unit. Specifically, it is a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, the induction heating operation can be started, the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.) can be set, and the induction heating operation can be stopped.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have a dedicated input operation unit. The central operation unit 40M is shared.

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode KM1 using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. .. The rule is that cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is prioritized. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select a linked cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating unit 17HR has already performed an independent heating operation for another cooking. Since the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating source is partially restricted in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(7) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority or inferiority relationship between the single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. There is no. Therefore, for example, if an attempt is made to set the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input is left halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, nothing is input for 30 seconds), it is automatically performed. The input up to is canceled. Further, if, for example, an input for the independent cooking mode KM1 is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9 in the middle of the left state, the cooking can proceed to the induction heating.

(8) The linked cooking mode KM3 includes a "first linked cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1) and oven heating in the first cooking step (cooking step 1). It has a "second cooperative cooking mode" in which at least one of the source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is used.

(9) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating step. The case where the second heating means HM2 is used in the preheating step is also one form of the "cooperative preheating cooking mode", but in the first embodiment, this form will not be described in detail.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the cooking cooker 1 is supported by being placed on the upper surface 2P of the mouth edge portion of the installation port 2A. As shown in FIG. 6, in the first embodiment, the kitchen furniture 2 is provided with a water tank 2 CP capable of temporarily storing water discharged from the water supply port 2D of the water supply. Reference numeral 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. The front opening 2B is for exposing the front constituent portions (door 114 and front cover 112, which will be described later) to the front when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, it is mostly pre-formed with standard dimensions because standardization is being promoted by the industry. be. This will be explained in detail later.

The usual method of incorporating the cooker 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in FIG. 7, the cooker 1 is placed in the installation port 2A while the front side (front side) of the cooker 1 is tilted downward, and then the rear side of the cooker 1 is placed. Is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, the cooking cooker 1 is placed on the peripheral edge of the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed on the rear peripheral edge of the lower unit 100, which will be described later, and the fixing bracket is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. And the installation is completed. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, the detailed structure will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 is combined and integrated in a state where the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are stacked one above the other, and such an integrated form is used. Is shipped from the manufacturer. Therefore, in the assembling work of FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screw. If the fixing bracket (not shown) is removed, the entire cooking cooker 1 can be taken out from the kitchen furniture 2. As a result, inspections and repairs can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2 thereafter. In addition, when it is called a "main body" within the range of only the upper unit 100, it is distinguished by adding a reference numeral 10.

In the first embodiment, the "main body case" HC is a general term for the upper case 16 constituting the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

As shown in FIG. 6, the installation port 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Further, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, 3 and 4 are surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.
When the cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the front surfaces of the surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooker 1. In other words, when the cooking device 1 is incorporated, the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooking device 1 can give the user a design feeling as if they are a unified flat surface.

In FIG. 7, FIG. 8 is a wall that divides the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms at the top and bottom, and the lower part of the wall is often used as a storage for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the wall 8 is not shown in FIG. Further, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so as to be removable.

According to the configuration described above, when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 exhibits a substantially one flat surface. When the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface (front surface) is designed so that it can be recognized as a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. The kitchen furniture is manufactured and sold by the kitchen furniture and the housing equipment manufacturer, while the cooker 1 is manufactured by the home appliance manufacturer. In many cases, they are sold.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, reference numeral 7 is a frame line printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical unevenness on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. It should be noted that a thin decorative plate made of a glossy metal, a tape, or the like may be attached to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a high-class feeling. On the contrary, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Further, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, it may be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and may not move at all.

If the front color and surface morphology (pattern, glossiness, unevenness, etc.) of the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified, the unified design feeling of the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, when the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified with a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified with the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 of FIG. 1 and the cooking utensil 1. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In Japan, the standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Material Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagazumikyo) in addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2 and the like.

According to the "Standards for long-term use materials" regarding the "IH cooking heater (built-in)" established by the "Nagazumikyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) to which the IH cooking heater is attached should be as follows. It is stipulated.
(1) The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. The dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-back direction) dimension D3 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-back direction) dimension D2 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Further, according to the above-mentioned "Standards for Long-term Use Members", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the lower end of the top plate to the lower end of the front panel shall be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooker 1 of the present disclosure is designed so as to satisfy the above-mentioned various constraint conditions.
In FIG. 8, A1 is a dimension in the front-rear direction of the top plate 15 described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is a dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a symmetrical shape, and several protrusion-shaped mounting legs 112P are formed on the back surface side to be mounted (see FIG. 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertically long fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slightly slid downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. I try to do it. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixing tool (not shown). By this fixing, the front cover 112 does not move upward, so that it is in a state of being attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber formed entirely in the shape of a box from a thin metal plate described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200. A large opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed on the front surface of the heating chamber 113 so that a cooking utensil such as a frying pan (heated object N) or a cooked object can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 arranged on the left and right so that the front surface thereof is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115 (see FIG. 12). (Not shown), it is rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at the lower end thereof as a fulcrum (center of rotation).

After the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooking device 1 by a specialist such as a store or an installer. The door 114 is attached at the stage of shipping the cooker 1 at the factory so that a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household cannot remove the door 114 after the fact. This is to prevent microwaves from leaking from the inside of the heating chamber 113 due to the poor sealing degree of the door 114 after mounting.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height dimension of the cooking device 1. That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is a height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is a dimension from the upper end to the lower end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is a dimension of the top plate 15 in the height direction, and is 11 mm. By making such a dimensional relationship, when the cooking cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is secured below each of the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112. It is supposed to be done.

Next, FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. In FIG. 10, 2G is a step portion formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, faces each other in close proximity. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation port 2A. The maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 to 24.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when the cooker 1 is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the cooking device 1 along the ZZ line of FIG. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the WW line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the YY line of FIG. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when the cooking device 1 is cut along the VV line of FIG. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when it is cut by X-rays of FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 20 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking device 1. FIG. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking device 1. FIG. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking device 1. FIG. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking device 1.

(Upper unit 100)
In the first embodiment, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking cooker 1. Therefore, the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, the power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power supply 99 via the plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 constituting the outer shell of the main body 10 and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 fixed to the upper part of the upper case (FIG. 12) and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass mounted on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire surface except the rear portion. .. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 which are outer shells, respectively.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate. Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, in the upper case 16, the peripheral portion of one thin metal plate is vertically bent as described later, and the bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, the rear wall 16B, the front vertical wall 16F, (left and right). The side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body portion" in which three surfaces of a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F are formed. On the other hand, separately from this, two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are individually formed. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the end portion of the above-mentioned "body portion" by screws, spot welding or the like, and finally, the entire upper surface is formed into a box shape with an opening.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially uniform thickness as a whole, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface through which visible light does not pass. Therefore, the functional component below the top plate 15, for example, the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right side has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17R is 3200 W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a donut-shaped shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. The diameter may be expanded to about 180 mm so that it can be used for objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. FIG. 11 shows a case where the diameter of the IH coil 17L on the left side is made larger than that of the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a horizontally elongated opening at the rear of the upper case 16, and 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, which is a shutter or a large number of through holes for ventilation. Is formed. Reference numeral 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, reference numeral 22 denotes a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end portion of the upper case 16, as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the width of the trailing edge of the upper case 16.

Reference numeral 21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame projects to the rear of the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16. That is, when viewed from above, it seems that the rear side of the exhaust cover 19 and both the left and right sides are surrounded in a series (see FIG. 11).

In FIGS. 11, 12, and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. The decorative frame 25 is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end faces of the top plate 15 from an impact from the outside (see FIG. 11).

Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushion material made of a highly elastic material such as silicon rubber, which is attached to the entire lower surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25. As a result, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26. It should be noted that the design may be such that the three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 or the four parts (peripheral four sides) including the rear end face are surrounded by one decorative frame 25.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L, 30R)
In FIGS. 11 and 19, reference numeral 30 is an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is installed at the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the left and right center portions.
31L is a left side display unit, and 31R is a right side display unit. The left and right display units 31L and 31R are also installed one on the left side of the front portion of the top plate 15 and one on the lower side of the right side.

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later. That is, it is used during microwave cooking and oven cooking.

The integrated display unit 30 has a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 54) used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 51) used in the combined cooking mode KM2. Each is displayed alternately.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are oriented in the left-right direction. It is installed on a long horizontal operation board 41.

Corresponding to the positions directly above the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R, the lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and alarms of the cooking device 1. For example, the selection result of the three types of heating sources of the cooking device 1 and the caution information and the warning information indicating the operating state of the heating sources are displayed. That is, the integrated display unit 30 is referred to as an integrated display unit 30 because it may display information related to the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189.

Further, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various cookings corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which will be described later, and the control conditions thereof.
The integrated display unit 30 may be referred to as a "central display unit 30" because of its installation position. In particular, when the difference between the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L is shown, it may be referred to as "center display unit 30".

Further, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying "inventory information" of the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display 31R, left side display 31L)
The left side display unit 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left side IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in 1-minute units and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time ends. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature), the current temperature, and the like are displayed. The above "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds from the stage when it becomes less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in 1 second units.

Similarly, the right side display unit 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right side IH coil 17R. The right side display unit 31R basically displays information on various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right side IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left side display unit 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 19, 40 is an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged horizontally long along the front end edge portion of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the operation board 41 which is horizontally long and is installed in a band shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation. On the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100, there is a central operation board 32 supported by the holder 50. The integrated control device MC described later is mounted on the back surface side of the central operation board 32.

Below the operation board 41, flat plate-shaped auxiliary support plates (not shown) are installed so as to be vertically overlapped with each other so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap. That is, it has a structure of two upper and lower layers (two sheets) facing each other at intervals, so that as many electric components and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 described later flows, and is formed by a space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of places.

As is clear from FIG. 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end portion of the lower case 101 face each other closely within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. Is fixed. In addition to the screw 51, a screw 51F (not shown) for fixing the facing portions of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 is also provided, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected at a plurality of places. Has been done.

The 16BX is a horizontally bent portion formed by further bending the upper end portion of the rear vertical wall 16B to the rear BK. The positions of the horizontally bent portion 16BX and the flange 16A (see FIG. 14) described later are on the same horizontal line.

Due to the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both the heavy objects of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bent portion 16BX cooperate to firmly support such a load. It may function as a part. That is, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A whose mechanical strength is increased by bending a metal plate in a series and the horizontally bent portion 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Has been done. In the first embodiment, the horizontal bent portion 16BX does not come into direct contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity having a large depth and flat area. The cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, in the first embodiment, there is a flat upper case 16 (which constitutes the outer shell of the main body 10) in which the opening on the upper surface is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101, which will be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting a part of the microwave heating device 120 described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113.
Further behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 of the power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying electric power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and a power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 is a support metal fitting for connection formed of a metal plate, and includes a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 have a box shape formed of a thin metal plate, and by fastening the screws 51 and 51F (not shown), the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are separated from each other. It is a strong box-shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 are the front-rear maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) and the left-right maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) of the upper case 16. The dimensions are the same in design. Alternatively, it is only 0.2 mm larger (at the maximum) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101.

When a little force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B, the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 widens a little, so the upper case 16 is tightly placed inside. Can be fitted (just).

The "fitting" in the first embodiment does not necessarily mean a state of tight fitting as shown in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-back / left-right direction) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and they are in close contact with each other as a whole. It does not have to be in a state. Further, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it can be fixed with a screw 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are one strong box-shaped structure, the support structure of the door 114, which will be described later, can be firmly realized, and the door 114 and the peripheral portion of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 can be firmly realized. It is useful for preventing microwave leakage during the period.

In particular, the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, so that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole are not distorted or deformed. Is important. Since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire circumference of the lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the lower part 2 of the kitchen.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is horizontally installed in the center of the upper case 16.
The inverter circuit board 80 is a rectangle whose planar shape is long in the left-right direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, the right side display unit 31R, and the left side display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached so as to overlap with each other with a slight gap on the lower surface of the holder 50.

(Cooling structure of inverter circuit board)
Next, FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device 1. FIG. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view when cut along the SS line of FIG. 24. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 28 is a simplified perspective view illustrating the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board.

In this type of inverter circuit board, when making a circuit with various electronic parts, parts such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors are fixed to the insulator board, and the parts are wired with copper foil. To form. Since it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced by mounting it on an automatic charging machine or the like. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the substrate, and even when used in this type of cooking cooker, the shape of the circuit board is basically a square or a rectangle. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding parts. Moreover, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board inevitably increases.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. It is composed of a circuit 81R and. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29, 30 and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sink 82 is as shown in FIGS. 12, 15, and 26. That is, the heat sinks 82 are installed in two rows so that the two heat radiation fins 82FN face each other, and are close to each other to about several mm to 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed by facing the heat radiation fins 82FN of the two heat sinks 82. The size (width in the front-rear direction) of the gap GP2 is the same over the entire left-right direction of the heat sinks 82 in the two front-rear rows. For example, it is 8 mm. In order to distinguish it from the (second) void GP12 described later, this void GP2 may be referred to as a "first void".

As can be seen from FIGS. 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has electric power constituting a part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R on inclined surfaces existing on opposite sides to each other. A control switching element 83 is attached to each. Therefore, the heat generated during the operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). On the other hand, the power control switching element 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side is attached to the rear side of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows.
The power control switching element 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side is attached to the front side of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. It may be attached to the opposite side.

In FIGS. 12 and 26, 70 is a cover integrally formed of a thin metal plate or a plastic material that covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. The left and right end surfaces of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 serves as the inlet FI for the cooling air RF1 and RF2 described later, and the right end surface of the cover 70 becomes the cooling air RF1 and RF2. Consists of the exit FO of.

The cover 70 is in a position where a constant gap GP11 is secured between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the coil base 17C supporting the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). The gap GP11 has a linear distance of about 1 mm to a maximum of several mm.

In the first embodiment, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. As a result, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surface of the IH coils 17L and 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. This space has the effect of mitigating the magnetic influence of the IH coils 17L and 17R on the cover 70, and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The cover 70 has a size that secures a constant gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In the first embodiment, the GP12 is 20 mm.
In order to distinguish it from the (first) void GP2, this void GP12 may be referred to as a "second void".

In FIG. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 with respect to the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16 and is 28 mm. H7 also has a height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, which is 31 mm. Reference numeral 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shield sheet (thin aluminum plate or the like) may be installed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is a straight line distance from the lower surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In the first embodiment, the height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 is 40 mm. The height dimension H10 and the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK do not match because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A or the like.

Since the cover 70 is directly below the IH coil 17L and is in a state of being close to the cover 70, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover 70 may be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. .. If the cover 70 is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, there is a concern that the cover 70 will be heated by the leakage magnetic flux and the temperature will rise. In that case, it is preferable to cover the upper surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, it is advisable to adopt a method of stacking aluminum sheets or attaching an aluminum tape.

When the cover 70 is made of metal, it is more preferable to electrically connect the cover 70 to the upper case 16. For example, a metal screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 is set to reach the screw hole of the cover 70 directly.

Since the upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101, which will be described later, with a metal screw or the like, it is electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided in the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. By doing so, the magnetic shield effect of the cover 70 can be expected to have a noise shielding effect on various electric components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

Further, if the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
The gap GP12 between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70 is secured to be about 21 mm, and the height of the gap GP12 is also the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is about 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed from both front and rear edges of the cover 70 downward.

The facing distance between the pair of hanging walls 70B in the front-rear direction, that is, the dimension W9 (see FIG. 26) of the space in the front-rear direction is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a minute gap between the two, the guiding effect of the cooling air is not hindered.

In FIG. 26, the GP 16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. The gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12, GP16 and the heat radiation fins 82FN formed inside the cover 70.
In FIG. 26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm. Further, W9 is the facing distance (dimension of the space in the front-rear direction) of the hanging wall 70B, which is 205 mm.

Next, it returns to FIG. 25 and will be described.
W10 indicates the distance from the right end surface of the cover 70, that is, the exit side end surface to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space at this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 25, 70A is the left edge of the cover 70, that is, the anterior notch formed at the inlet side end. The front notch 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside immediately before the cover 70.
A plurality of front notch portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP 14 shows a gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end surface of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is about 40 mm. A gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end surface of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, the gap GP15 is small, so it is not shown.

In FIG. 25, the XB passes through the center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and intersects the intersection of the “outlet line” FL1 orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 60A and the partition wall 11. Shows.
The outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. It should be noted that the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction may be inclined with respect to a straight line that simply crosses the partition wall 11 (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27).

XF indicates a point (intersection point) where the "outlet line" FL2 passing through the center point of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 61A and the partition wall 11 intersects. ing. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27. The blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are fictitious straight lines provided for convenience in the explanation of the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blowout lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation interval W14 measured at the center point of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 27, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
Further, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2. This linear distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 sandwiches a straight line (reference line) BL penetrating the central portion of the gap GP2, and the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82F are located behind the straight line (reference line) BL. It is aimed at the heat sink 82B.
The outlet 60A is oblique (angle is θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

On the contrary, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is oblique (the angle is θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction of the straight line (reference line) BL.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is “θ1> θ2”, but they may be the same.

As can be seen from FIG. 27, in the first embodiment, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. It changes depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, the direction of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, and the direction of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sink 82 has 82F1 and 82F2 as the heat sink 82F on the front FR side. There are 82B1 and 82B2 as the heat sink 82B on the rear BK side. Of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink on the front left side is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1 when viewed from the front side of the cooking cooker 1, and the heat sink is installed on the front right side at a distance. May be referred to as "front second heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, among the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink on the rear left side is called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed on the rear right side at a distance is called the "rear second heat sink". It may be called "heat sink" 82B2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 26 again.
Reference numeral 11 is a partition wall integrally formed so as to integrally project downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, it can be integrally formed as described above, but a plate-shaped member different from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it is referred to as a partition member 11. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, they are collectively referred to as "partition wall" 11.

The partition wall 11 has a front surface and a back surface (back surface) formed flat over the entire length from the right end portion to the left end portion. This is to reduce the air passage resistance of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first air passage F1 as much as possible. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-rear direction is about 2.0 mm.

The partition wall 11 is preferably made of a material having high electrical insulation (for example, a plastic material). Note that in FIGS. 12, 13 and 15, the partition wall 11 is not shown.

Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, D7 is a distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 described later, and is a dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIGS. 13 and 24). Is. W8 is the maximum (horizontal width) dimension in the left-right direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17 are supported from below by a component called a coil base 17C (see FIG. 12) made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C is provided individually for the two IH coils 17L and 17R. It may be formed by one structure in common with two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C has a structure in which the coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with a fixing tool such as a screw. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70, and the cover 70 is supported in a form of being constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. Detailed description of these support structures will be omitted. In any case, in the IH coils 17L and 17R, the facing distance (distance) from the back surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change for a long period of time. The coil base 17C is formed with a plurality of large communication holes (not shown) so that air can easily pass in the vertical direction throughout the coil base 17C.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L and 17R does not change during induction heating. As a result, changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above the first horizontal plane HP1 that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, it exists on the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R, and is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C and the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of the flat plate-shaped support plate 71, which is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. Then, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a first air passage F1 long in the left-right direction is formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, for example, heat resistant plastic.

In FIGS. 12 and 15, 102 is a metal exhaust duct to which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The exhaust port side end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 penetrates through the gap GP1 formed between the partition plate 52 described later and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 13). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

The TS10 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and measures the temperature of the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature around the food to be cooked.
As shown in FIG. 15, the temperature sensor TS 10 is installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat-sensitive portion is exposed inside the exhaust duct 102.
Further, since the temperature sensor TS 10 is preferably installed at a position close to the back surface of the heating chamber 113, it is located near a communication port 174 formed at the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.

The temperature sensor TS10 is in operation for cooking (for example, thawing of frozen food) by the microwave heating source 189 as well as during cooking by driving the oven heating source 188 (cooking step of the combined cooking mode KM2 described later). In), the temperature is always measured. The temperature detection data of the temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control unit 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at a right angle in a series from the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16.
The 101A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, in a series from the upper ends at right angles to the outside.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this polymerization state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screw 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is received by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so that even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed of a thin metal plate, they are integrated. Then, it can be made into a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

The means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts instead of the screw 51. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not come into contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Since the flange 16A and the flange 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that the kitchen furniture 2 may be damaged. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A hit the kitchen furniture 2, the cushion material 26 cannot be installed in a compressed state. If the cushion material 26 is not in close contact with the cushion material 26, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water or the like may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking device 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, 311 is a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm. Is.

The 301R is a right-side gap formed between the side vertical wall 101R on the right side of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
The 301L is a left side gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

Reference numeral 302 denotes a front gap formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 with the door 114 closed, and has a size of about 10 mm. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap having the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112. It is a configuration that exists.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on the opening and closing of the door 114, but as shown in FIG. 12, the size of the front gap 302 is large (for example, about 5 mm to 10 mm) so that the outside air can be sucked in the state where the door 114 is closed. It should be secured. In the description of the cooking device 1, the "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the cooking device 1, and does not refer to the outdoor air of the house HA shown in FIG. 1.

The lower gap 311, the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when the outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by starting the operation of the cooking cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right side gap 301R, and the left side gap 301L, respectively. The gap 303 described with reference to FIG. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311 and the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302.

Next, it returns to FIG. 18 and will be described.
W3 is the maximum width dimension in the front portion of the cooking device 1. The width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, for example, 595 mm.

Reference numeral 303 is a gap formed between the inner surface (right side surface) of the right side wall material existing on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This void is secured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the front cover 112 on the left side, a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the front cover 112 and the inner surface (left side surface) of the left side wall material existing on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. Depending on the installation of the cooking device 1, the sizes of the left and right voids 303 may be slightly different. Further, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be arranged in the step portion 2G (see FIG. 10), and the space 303 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost closed. However, even in such a state, there is no problem in the internal cooling function of the cooking device 1.

As shown in FIG. 18, the front cover 112 extends to the outside of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L. Therefore, in the state where the cooking cooker 1 is installed, the front side of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L is covered by the two left and right front covers 112.

Since the front side of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L is covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, it feels as if there is a large gap between the cooking cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. I will not give it.

In the installed state of the cooking cooker 1, the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L are secured, so that the outside air for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, is surely introduced. Can be done.

In FIG. 18, WS is a width dimension in which the door 114 faces the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be in close contact with each other to prevent microwave leakage, and for forming the choke chamber 194, which will be described later, at the front / rear / left / right positions of the opening 113A. See FIG. 11).

(1st cooling fan 60, 2nd cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the lateral vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16, respectively. The rotary shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotary blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical (vertical) direction, and the rotary blades are: Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is adopted as the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. The reason for this is that the static pressure is high and the ventilation resistance is large in a space with a high mounting density. In general, there is also a type of centrifugal fan in which one suction port is provided and the blowing (sending) direction is the entire radial direction. However, the one of the first embodiment is a type having only one blowing direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool the IH coil installation space CK inside the upper space 300A, which will be described later. Therefore, the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as "upper cooling fan" for these two.

The outlets 60A and 61A are directed to the inverter circuit board 80. That is, the two outlets 60A and 61A are both located above the common first horizontal plane (HP1) and are directed to the right. The "first horizontal plane" HP1 in the first embodiment means the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. .. However, in the first embodiment, the rotation speed is changed by the IH control unit 90 to change the amount of air blown. For example, when the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R is increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than in normal times. In order to increase the cooling effect, the number of revolutions may be increased to increase the amount of air blown. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds due to measures against "beating noise" described later.

The rated specifications are, for example, rated voltage, operating voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, and the like. The rotation speed can be changed by changing the voltage applied or the voltage application time (on DUTY time) within the working voltage range.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the duty cycle (pulse width) of the pulse width is adopted according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level). The motor of the first cooling fan 60 is controlled by changing the ratio of H and L). This PWM control is also adopted in the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have a configuration in which a rotary blade (not shown) is surrounded by fan cases 60C and 61C, and a circular suction port (not shown) is formed on the lower surface of the fan case. Not shown) is provided.

Vent holes 64 (FIG.) composed of a large number of round holes or elliptical holes at positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 directly below the suction ports (not shown). 14 and FIG. 16). The ventilation holes 64 are formed on the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. The ventilation holes 64 communicate with the ventilation holes 164 formed on the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct), and the ventilation hole 64 is provided to directly communicate with the ventilation hole 164 of the lower case 101. The recess 165 is formed by recessing it by a certain depth (dimension) DP1 from the left side. The dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, an electric component mounted on the vertical center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the upper surface of the power supply circuit board 55 described later. The vertical center point of 85 is at the position of one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is in a positional relationship so as to reach the heat sink 82 and the electric component 85 when traveling straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by the horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from the commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54 described later. Then, in the power supply circuit board 55, alternating current is converted to direct current. Therefore, an electric component 85 such as a diode for converting alternating current to direct current and a transformer 57 (not shown) is mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating reduces the heating amount of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time of the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 24) such as a thermistor fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

When the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged and operated in parallel, there is a high possibility that a growl noise will be generated. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a measure against the roaring noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to have different values within the range where the roaring noise is likely to occur. There is. In other words, they are not always operating at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 52 denotes a metal partition plate that is long left and right at the rear of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16. The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the term "partitioning" here does not mean a strict shielding that completely blocks the flow of air. The cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be prevented from flowing backward to some extent beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage in the range from the ventilation hole 64 to the front surface of the partition plate 52 inside the upper unit 100. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH and has a structure that substantially communicates with the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

In FIG. 24, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 53 is an exhaust port plate installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and a large number of through holes 53A are formed. , The cooling air toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52A is discharged to the external space of the cooking device 1 through the exhaust cover 19.

In FIG. 24, the LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating a range (horizontal width dimension) on the left side of the partition plate 12 described later with respect to the exhaust gas exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size of the exhaust port is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53A and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53A (the form shown in FIG. 24), the exhaust range LF is determined by the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A.
The width dimension of the exhaust window 52B on the right side and the formation range of the through hole 53B are the same.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 54 is a filter circuit board arranged in the rear right corner of the upper case 16. In this filter circuit board, the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 is removed and supplied to the output terminal side, and conversely, the noise is not leaked (backflow) to the commercial (alternating current) power supply side on the input terminal side. Electrical components (not shown) such as resistors and inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses are mounted. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200 described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after exiting from the first air passage F1. Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that penetrates the rotation centers of the rotary blades (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 shows the cooling air blown from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. A part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. That is, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before reaching the through hole 53A of the exhaust port plate 53.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Reference numeral 13 is also a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

The space GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52 is divided into two spaces on the left and right by the partition plate 12. On the left side of the partition plate 12, the exhaust duct 102 is vertically present from below. Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, a terminal portion (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) for discharging air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be arranged. However, in the first embodiment, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not arranged.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 14 is a vertically installed plate-shaped or rib-shaped (raised object-shaped) partition wall. The partition wall 14 is integrally formed or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it comes into contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15. That is, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two on the left and right by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It is divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are generically referred to, RF4 is used as the reference numeral in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
Next, returning to FIGS. 19 and 20, the main part of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In FIGS. 19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation unit formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, and as described below, the change in capacitance when the user lightly touches the top plate 15 with a finger or the like is used. Various input keys (touch-type keys) that can be input are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation unit 40 includes three units: a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R, a central operation unit 40M, and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. Reference numeral 98 is an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of the main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off the commercial power supply 99 described later. The operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R. The operation buttons or operation keys 98 will be described below on the assumption that they are within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

The right operation unit 40R may be referred to as an "individual operation unit" because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L may also be referred to as an "individual operation unit".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit" because it is commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperation operation unit" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode described later. These will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit unit (not shown in FIG. 25) of the lower unit 200.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or a plurality of input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Further, the operation of the right IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation can be stopped. Therefore, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when it is pressed once after that, it has a function of instantly issuing a stop command for the heating operation. As described above, each time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be referred to as a third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 and the input key 43R1 start the heating operation in the "single (heating) cooking" mode using either one of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9. It is a means of ordering.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys that specify the thermal power (power consumption) at the time of induction heating.
When the input key 43R2 on the left side of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is reduced by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), if the input key 43R2 is touched once, it is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When you touch the input key 42R3 on the right side, the heating power is increased one step at a time for each operation. For example, in the case of a thermal power of 2500 W (thermal power level 8), 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9) can be selected by touching the input key 42R3 once.

43R4 is an input key for selecting a control menu for timer cooking. Timer cooking is a control method in which when a user sets a cooking time, an induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when timer cooking is started by designating 10 minutes, a predetermined display is performed on the right side display unit 31R when 10 minutes have passed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the end of cooking by voice. It is done in. The induction heating is automatically stopped when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time elapses.

In the first embodiment, both the display unit such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R and the voice synthesizer 95 may be collectively referred to as a "notification unit" AN.

The 44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one can be selected from a plurality of control menus each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the induction heating source 9 as shown in FIG. 38, for example, "boiled water", "boiled", "fried food (automatic cooking)", and the like. The control mode, in other words the type of control. That is, the driving time of the IH coil 17R, the heating power, the driving pattern for changing the heating power, and the like are different between "boiled water", "simmered", "fried food", and the like.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the name of the final cooked product or the name of the food material obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of the food to be cooked, not the "control menu" here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a comprehensive expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc. until the cooking is completed.
The control menu of the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" in order to distinguish it from the control menus of other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L is provided with a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be referred to as a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys that specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL, similarly to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. Similar to the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the touch is made, the thermal power that has been increased by one step is selected or specified by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can choose the firepower of.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. Like the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R, the input key 43L4 can specify the time for induction heating. Further, at the end of timer cooking, the end of timer cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L as in the input key 43R4, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the end.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction cooking. Similar to the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu that can be selected with the input key 44L on the left side is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the input key 44R on the right side.

As is clear from FIGS. 20 and 23, a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L arranged on the left operation unit 40L are arranged on a straight line in the left-right direction.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
Hereinafter, 10 touch-type input keys will be described.

The input key 43KP on the far left is for setting various operations, displays, and the like of the entire cooking cooker 1 as desired by the user.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC described later switches to the "function mode", and the following "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (cleaning time automatic notification function setting for heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (Select one of the maximum power consumption of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Voice setting of voice guide (6) Volume setting of voice guide (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out cooked foods, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (voice synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30) Necessity of alarm)
(8) HEMS registration setting (setting related to the power usage restriction function by the household power control device)
(9) Timer cooking time unit (1 minute unit setting changed to 5 minutes or 30 minutes unit) setting (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode (11) Inventory information acquired from the microwave oven 401 Setting the type (range) (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the linked cooking mode KM3 (13) Composite Setting the display priority (specific control menu that should be the default display) of each control menu of cooking mode KM2 (for example, "range grill", "boiled leaf vegetables") (14) ON of the main power switch 97 After that, when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened, the cooking mode is automatically (priorityly) displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

The beginner mode is an optional function for a person (user) who is unfamiliar with the use of the cooking device 1, and when this beginner mode is set, the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesis device 95 becomes more detailed and polite. become. Further, regarding the input operation in the input operation unit 40, the number of voice guides increases and the display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, in particular, in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the reference information displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (described later). The amount of additional information 331) is increased, or the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesizer 95 is increased. Therefore, the function that can support the input operation of the user is enhanced.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the cooking mode setting automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is either the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2. One is set.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC detects the opening of the door 114.
It is presumed that the user cooks using the heating chamber 113, and either the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed first. This is a function for automatically displaying on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically set immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B: FIG. 46) described later is displayed. Is displayed in.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, "long press" (hereinafter, "long press") a specific input key other than the input key 43KP on the central operation unit 40M. You can select one of the setting menus in the above-mentioned "function setting menu" and then change to the desired setting contents.

Alternatively, when two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are "long-pressed" at the same time, one setting menu in the above-mentioned "function setting menu" can be called and changed to the desired setting content. can.

The "long press" means, for example, a state in which the press is continuously performed for 5 seconds or longer.
Whether or not the state is in the "long press" state is determined by the integrated control device MC by comparing the timing of the touch input in the input operation unit 40 with the reference value. That is, the timing at which the input keys (for example, 43M1 and 43M2) are simultaneously pressed in the central operation unit 40M is ON (at the time of touch) -OFF (at the time of non-touch) transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC. ) Although it can be discriminated by the signal, the integrated control device MC measures the time from the time when the ON signal is changed to the time when the signal is changed to the OFF signal, and determines whether or not it is a "long press".

The type (range) of inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 is, for example, limited to frozen foods or limited to foods that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "functional mode" and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 arranged in the central operation unit 40M, which will be described later, the cooking cooker The above 11 types of individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43KP is used so as not to switch the function mode. The input function of is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting work of the control mode and the control condition (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to either 5000W, 4800W or 4000W when installed at the user's home. In this way, the function of the cooking cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, the usage environment (electric power situation of the installed home), and the like. When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. Therefore, when the user selects the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described later, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. It is used to determine whether or not to permit the use of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

As shown in FIG. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M is referred to as a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG.
On the other hand, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, the range excluding the input key 43KP is the cooperation operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperation cooking mode described later.

In the following description, since the "individual operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit of the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. ..

The 43MC is a selection input key for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC. It consists of touch-type keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light emitting diode (LED) or the like, and the characters "cooperative cooking" and a figure indicating the characters can be easily confirmed by the user. However, the input key 43MC can only be seen shining during the period of the cooperative cooking mode. That is, after all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops the light emission and displays that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not effective.
The input key 43MC may be referred to as a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode KM2 using both an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, the input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "composite cooking mode". When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing the "composite cooking mode", either microwave heating or oven heating can be independently cooked.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53.

Further, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 75 to 102.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen on the hardware, but as shown in FIG. 21, a maximum of three display areas 30L and 30M are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63. It is displayed separately in 30R.

Of the three display areas, the display area 30L located on the left side is hereinafter referred to as "first area". The display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as a "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as a "third area". It should be noted that a method for displaying a single display screen by dividing it into a plurality of parts has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940. Omit.

The 43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which the input key 43M1 is operated and individual names indicating the “composite cooking mode” KM2 and the “single cooking mode” KM1 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 will be described.

When the input key 43M1 on the left side of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center of the front and back. The display screen is switched according to the image to be displayed. That is, when the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once, the "control menu" (in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2) and the identification information of the object to be cooked (in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) stored in the integrated control device MC (in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3). ) And the like, one of the desired display information (for example, a name that specifies "range grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected. It should be noted that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only visually appears to have moved forward.

On the contrary, when the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, another information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. Then, the display screen is switched. That is, even if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is selected. ) Is the opposite.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L by operating either the input key 43M1 on the right side or the input key 43M1 on the left side. ..

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the display information of the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for supporting the input of the user for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input key 43M3 is touch-operated in a specific scene such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when the guidance information 30P described later is displayed, the third area 30R is described. In the area R, "guidance information" 30P that is helpful for the user's operation is displayed (see FIG. 49).

The display of the guidance information 30P automatically disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and returns to the state of the immediately preceding display screen. Details of such an operation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

The 43MS is a start unit capable of instructing the start of operation of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is composed of a touch-type input key. It also serves as an input key that can command the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

On the contrary, the 43MT is an end portion capable of stopping the operation of the microwave heating and the oven heating, and is composed of a touch type input key. It also serves as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is pressed to start cooking, for example, in the right operation unit 40R, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R do not always need an input function.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always need an input function. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches it without recognizing it, in the integrated control device MC, immediately after starting the cooking device 1, depending on the input process of cooking conditions, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled to prevent input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 23, the light emitting display units 27R and 27L are used for each of the three operation units 40R, 40L and 40M. , 27M is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27R2 share one.

The individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 emit light and turn off by the display unit drive circuit 63. Is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is operated. Is glowing blue. From this, it can be seen that the operation input can be accepted.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate that the user is accepting the operation. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on the command of the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light with one color, for example, the emission color may be changed from blue to red to indicate to the user that the operation is being accepted. This also applies to the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

It should be noted that even in a method in which the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is not emitted before the input key 43R1 is operated, the light emission is started when the operation is accepted, and the light emission is continued. good. Further, a method may be adopted in which only the fact that the operation input is possible is indicated by light emission in advance (the stage before the operation), and the acceptance of the operation input is not displayed by light. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L as well, the individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27L4 share one.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, even in the central operation unit 40M, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT. is doing.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating is started, each input key (43M1, 43M2, etc.) in the central operation unit 40M cannot be input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT is effectively maintained. Therefore, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode can be stopped at any time, and the cooperative cooking mode can be canceled.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3 is started, when the input key 43MT is pressed, the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3 is canceled in the middle, and as will be described later, the linked cooking mode KM3 is used. The occupied state of the left heating unit 17HL is immediately released.
Therefore, after this release, the input of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.

When the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MC are operated to display the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the start of the cooking process, the input settings before that are set. Are all released. Therefore, in order to display the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30). Light emission and extinguishing with a unified emission color are controlled. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, the pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting unit 27M3. Since the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 are also paired with each other, the individual light emitting units 27M4 and 27M5 are shared one by one. In the following description, when the individual light emitting units in the central operation unit 40M are generically referred to, the reference numeral 27M is used.

As shown in FIG. 22, the individual light emitting unit 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R.

It is desirable that the light emission modes (continuous light emission, blinking, light emission color, etc.) of the light emission display units 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above are unified among the three operation units in order to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding by the user. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting modes of the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are unified in the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

In order to show that the input function of each input key is effective, there is also a method of making the operation unit of the input key emit light, but in that case, the light emitting unit is arranged directly under the operation unit of the input key and the operation unit is concerned. It is also necessary to manufacture the material with a light-transmitting material, and there is also a problem of ensuring the sensitivity of the operation unit of the input key, so that there are many problems in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as described above, the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions while avoiding the operation unit of the input key. The term "adjacent" as used herein means a positional relationship in which the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are close to each other from the user's point of view and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R. .. Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a structure of illuminating with light from below is adopted.

In FIG. 20, thermal power display units 67L and 67R are provided at rear positions of the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L so as to indicate the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display units 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power stages in the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL by light emission (red). Nine stages from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W) are shown by light.

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The emission color may be changed depending on the magnitude of the thermal power. In the first embodiment, for example, the thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red lighting, 8 remaining blue lighting (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lighting, 7 remaining blue lighting In addition, the left end of the thermal power display units 67L, 67R The heat-retaining display unit that emits light and displays the LED when operated in the "heat-retaining mode" (see "display screen 3A" in FIG. 47) that heats the object to be heated with a heating power smaller than the minimum heating power level 1. 67H is provided.

On the left display unit 31L, the thermal power level value of the left heating unit 17HL is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. "1" is displayed when the minimum firepower level is 1, and "9" is displayed when the maximum firepower level is 9. The thermal power display on the left display unit 31L matches the thermal power stage displayed by the thermal power display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Further, also in the right display unit 31R, the thermal power level value of the right heating unit 17HR is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as in the case of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are on a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R. Because it is lined up in, operability and visibility are good. Further, the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction, and the entire operation is performed from the viewpoint of the user who operates while standing on the front side of the cooking cooker 1. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIG. 20, reference numeral 68 denotes a heating source display unit arranged behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since the heating source display unit 68 uses a plurality of heating sources by using the central operation unit 40M, the heating source that is actually operating is displayed by the LED light.

As shown in FIG. 21, the heating source display unit 68 is composed of three display units. The leftmost display unit 68L is a display unit indicating that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and the character "range" is displayed in the vicinity of the front side, so that microwave heating can be easily performed. I'm trying to understand.

The central display unit 68M is a display unit indicating a case where "grill cooking" is performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it can be easily understood that the food is grilled.

The rightmost display unit 68R is a display unit indicating the case where "oven cooking" is performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" grasps the temperature in the heating chamber 113 and reflects (feeds back) it to the energization control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be described in detail later.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 69 is a high temperature display unit provided at a position immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. The high temperature display unit 69 causes the LED light emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, and displays that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
As will be described later, the integrated control device MC commands the high temperature display based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 that receives the temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control unit 159.

The high temperature display unit 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, a left heating unit 17HL, a heating chamber 113, and a right heating unit 17HR, and individually displays the status of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, it is possible to notify the user that the temperature in the range from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL is high.

In order to shorten the period of high temperature display on the high temperature display unit 69 as much as possible, for example, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after the end of one induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90. Continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and cools the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A by the outside air.

It will be described back to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 is a touch-type input key for an Internet connection command for requesting wireless communication from the integrated control device MC. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, the user is wirelessly connected to the home gateway 411 and can acquire information from the outside via the home gateway 411.

The 46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. Below this window, an infrared transmitter 48 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) is installed. Actually, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so as not to be visible from above the top plate 15. The sheet is, of course, made of a material that transmits infrared signals.

When manually displaying the details of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 on the integrated display unit 30 while the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed, the input key 47 may be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In that case, the inventory information may be, for example, displayed as the name of the frozen food (for example, "rice" or "dumpling") and its amount (for one person, weight of 200 g, etc.).

While executing the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heating cooker 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the input key 47. This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104.

In FIG. 19, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmission / reception circuit (not shown) that receive radio waves from the outside and transmit radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. I have. The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41 at a slight distance from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The purpose of maintaining such an interval is that if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close to the bottom wall surface 16S, there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves may be lowered.

In the state of being installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the upper surface of the cooking device 1 is exposed on the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust gas from the exhaust port side end portion 102E (see FIG. 15) of the exhaust duct 102 can also be discharged above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.
In FIGS. 29 to 31, some configurations are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown.

FIG. 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In FIG. 31, only the main control means in FIG. 29 is extracted, and the transmission / reception of control command signals, the power supply relationship, and the like are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 97 denotes a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200 V commercial power supply 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 is a power supply circuit to which electric energy is supplied via the main power supply switch 97, and reference numeral 92 is a direct current power conversion unit for converting AC power from a commercial power source into direct current. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant pressure current is supplied to the integrated control device MC from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 (indicated by a broken line frame in FIGS. 24 and 25). However, this may be arranged on the back (lower) surface side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts, an input unit, an output unit, a storage unit, and a CPU (arithmetic control unit), and the storage unit stores the energization control programs of the three heating sources in advance. It is (stored). Further, apart from the storage unit (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is built in. The storage device MM may store the energization control programs of the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls control during induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores (stores) in advance an energization control program corresponding to various control menus at the time of induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

A second IH control unit 90A (not shown) may be in charge of a part of the function of the IH control unit 90. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be in charge of input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations such as induction cooking and microwave cooking, the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality is centrally monitored by the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit also called a real-time clock, and power is supplied from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 different from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power supply switch 97 for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven over. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which always informs the current date and the exact time in seconds if requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time at the manufacturing stage of this cooking cooker 1. There is.

Even if the main power of the heating cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and there is a function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored at the same time with an accurate time. The clock circuit 96 may be omitted and the timekeeping function may be possessed by the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also referred to as a “demand control unit”). The power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds a specified value or an upper limit value individually set by the user. There is a function to monitor so that it does not exist, and a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed the specified value or the arbitrarily set value. There is.

Generally, the "demand control device" or "demand control device" means a device that controls the value of demand (demand power). It automatically checks the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, it will notify you with an alarm etc., and if you set the automatic stop of the device that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shut down possible electrical equipment. After that, it is known that the electric device is automatically restored after a certain period of time, and it is said that each household also exerts great power in contract power management with an electric power company.

The electric power control unit 72 of the first embodiment is provided so that the cooking cooker 1 itself has the above-mentioned power consumption suppressing function. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and a control program for demand may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC from the beginning, or may be provided. It can be realized even if it is added later.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking cooker 1 by operating the function setting input key 43KP in only one of the four stages as described above. It should be noted that this setting can be set in the input operation unit 40 while observing the above-mentioned four-step numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. .. Such a simple setting method is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 6012780.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the “functional mode”, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the “peak cut value”. Since the display that allows "setting" and "HEMS registration setting" is displayed, the function for suppressing the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 as described above can be easily additionally set, or the function can be changed or canceled. Can be done. In the determination of the "permission condition" described later, the data of the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used.

Reference numeral 73 is a signal transmission unit provided for transmitting various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, a signal line and a connector that can transmit a signal by wire are applicable. Further, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly. The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90.

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether or not the main part of the upper unit 100 has an abnormally high temperature. For example, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT and the like are arranged in the central operation unit 40M, but since these parts are relatively sensitive to heat, a predetermined temperature is provided. It is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed (for example, 60 ° C.).

The IH control unit 90 determines that the measured temperature is in the "abnormal preliminary state" when the temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature. The abnormal preliminary state is limited to the case where the detection temperature is in the range of 60 ° C to 65 ° C. If the temperature exceeds 65 ° C, the risk increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes it as a true abnormal condition.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and control is performed to reduce the thermal power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65 ° C., an abnormal state is determined by the IH control unit 90, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Specifically, for example, when the driven IH coil is the right side IH coil 17R, the power supply of the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R and the capacitor for resonance is stopped. Note that 94L is an induction heating circuit for the left IH coil 17L.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, it may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 that cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Further, it may be used in combination with a measure for lowering the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least, the electrical and physical (as an example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 described above) change state of the main part during the induction heating during the period from the abnormal preliminary state to the emergency stop is shown (abnormality monitoring). The information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and the ventilation capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotation speed of the rotary blade is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are used. The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the start command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the information on the "IH control menu" (for example, "boiler", "simmered", "fried food", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) in the single cooking mode KM1 and the thermal power of the induction heating is also in chronological order. Recorded. If an emergency stop is caused due to an abnormal state on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after turning on the main power switch 97, all the heating on the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 side is performed. The integrated control device MC has acquired the monitoring information regarding the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information for the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

In the inverter circuit board 80, an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the IH coil 17R on the right side and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the IH coil 17L on the left side are mounted one by one.

The two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are generically referred to, "81" is used as the reference numeral.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 95 is a speech synthesizer that synthesizes electronically created speech. The voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of an input operation and a notification when an abnormality occurs by voice from the speaker 95S each time. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part constituting the notification unit AN (see FIG. 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. .. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, respectively, and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. As shown in FIG. 19, these two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in the gaps in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. That is, this makes it possible to measure the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated, such as a metal pan or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use a thermistor as a contact type sensor. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 via a heat conductive inclusion. This makes it possible to measure the temperature of the top plate 15.

One of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, the temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 19), uses a thermistor as a contact type sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. Then, the atmospheric temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40 is detected. Further, the two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use a thermistor and are attached to the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above. As described above, a thermistor type temperature sensor TS10 that detects the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 is also installed.

The lower unit 200 is also provided with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 in order to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, but the details will be described later.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit, which controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M and 61M of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. That is, the ventilation capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are independently changed from each other in multiple stages by the control by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 63 denotes a display unit drive circuit, which can control the operation of the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. Further, the control program (software) that exerts the function of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensing device that detects shaking when an earthquake occurs, and when it senses a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or higher, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC Upon receiving the signal, it is determined that an earthquake has occurred, and the power supply of all the heating means in use is cut off instantly.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit also shown in FIG. 19, which transmits information in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. In addition, information from the outside is acquired in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the EM is an abnormality detection unit. This abnormality detection unit monitors a detection electrode (not shown) arranged on the back surface of the top plate 15 and a change in the current flowing through the detection electrode, and hot water, cooking liquid, etc. are discharged from the heated object N during induction heating. It is equipped with a determination circuit (not shown) that determines that it has boiled and overflowed.

When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, the abnormality detection unit EM transmits an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated control device MC issues an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to urgently stop the heating units 17HL and 17HR during the heating operation. Even in this case, the operation of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continues.

Further, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality, if microwave heating or oven cooking (including the case of the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode) is executed in the heating chamber 113, those heatings are performed. The operation continues unaffected. Therefore, if the two cooling fans 128 and 129 were in operation, their operation will continue.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
In FIGS. 12 to 17, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) constituting the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single metal thin plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of metal thin plates by spot welding or screws. The first embodiment is composed of three thin metal plates as described below.

101H is a body portion forming three surfaces (vertical surfaces) at the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat plate-shaped bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, and is a wall surface inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

The 101F is a front plate constituting the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is in close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F so that microwaves do not leak from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. Reference numeral 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that continuously rises vertically to the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 includes two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120. The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140.

The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven storage) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the food to be cooked. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the "microwave heating source 189" will be described on the premise that the "inverter circuit board 121" described later is not included.

12, 13, and 15 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120.
From the front side, the main parts are installed in the following order.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which the inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is arranged on the frontmost side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 that is a source of microwaves and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillating portion 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 in the antenna case are arranged respectively.
Behind the antenna case 124, a motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies electric power to the output of microwave heating and the magnetron 122, and is described later with a power supply circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54. A microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan, which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box shape without a bottom surface.

Reference numeral 129 is a fourth cooling fan, which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. Several heat radiation fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiation unit 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with the entire lower surface open and no bottom surface.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may be collectively referred to as a "lower cooling fan". This is because these two cooling fans 128 and 199 have a function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending in the vertical direction away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
The inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed in the vertical portion 308 in the vertical direction.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. Then, it is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis in the center of the rotary blade is in the vertical (vertical) direction.

As described above, the case A150 and the case B151 have an entire bottom surface open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged inside the openings so as to lie down, respectively.

In FIG. 12, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are integrally or separately formed inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed in order to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and the two communication ports 138A and 138B described later.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152F is an intake port on the front side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, the ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing the outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the inside of the upper unit 100, and the outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the above into the lower unit 200 are arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, the second intake ports 152B and 152F are on the right side of the heating chamber 113, and the ventilation holes (first intake port) are on the left side. There are 164 and vents 64.

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 153 is a duct installed above the heat radiating unit 122H, and guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating unit 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. It is a thing.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 154 is a case C, and houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. The case C154 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation.

The case C154 is configured by superimposing the lid 154A on the rear side and the container-shaped or box-shaped main body 154B on the front side. The lid 154A closes the large opening formed on the front surface side of the main body 154B from the rear.

In the case C154, a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) to which the microwave heating control unit 130 is attached are attached to the main body 154B on the front side. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 inside can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far as possible from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113. Further, it is installed away from the bottom plate 101U so that even if a liquid such as water or a cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation property is not impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space having the largest facing distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 forming a part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and the case is behind the waveguide 123. C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 rearward. The support metal fitting 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 131 is a door open / close detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door open / close detection mechanism 131. A typical door open / close detection mechanism 131 of this type is known in patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the above patent document, as the door open / close detection mechanism 131, three types of switches, a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, are built in, and these switches are interlocked with the opening / closing of the door to detect the opening / closing with a time lag. Has been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147, the power supply of the inverter circuit is opened and closed by the first interlock switch and the second interlock switch, and the first interlock switch is inserted into the power supply circuit when a short circuit failure occurs. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch to turn off the fuse.

12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. If either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality, the monitor switch 133 (FIG. 6) for shutting off the power supply of the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121. Not shown) is also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 fixed and protruding on the door 114 side to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side and protruding, and a built-in contact is opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, 136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, the door switch 132B, the monitor switch 133 (not shown), the interlocking rods 136A, 136B, and the like are collectively attached. The support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a plurality of screws. The door open / close detection mechanism 131 is mainly configured with various switches mounted on the support plate 137 in this way.

If there is a variation in the mounting position of the latch switch 132A or the door switch 132B in the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing of operating each switch may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the closing detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) of the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137 so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. During manufacturing and after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, and replaced.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138A guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 141 described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described later, and uses it for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160 described later. There is.

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor substrate housed inside the sensor case (not shown), and one or more infrared rays mounted on the surface of the sensor substrate. A detection element (not shown) and a lens (not shown) that faces the infrared detection element and is attached and fixed to the sensor case are configured as main components.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected in a wide range, and the direction of the temperature sensor 160 is not fixed and is automatically swung within a certain angle range. It may be in the form of detecting the temperature at a wide angle.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 161 is a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that cooling air can pass therethrough. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In FIGS. 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat resistant plastic. The cooking dish 162 is formed to have external dimensions so that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, the HV is an effective height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In the first embodiment, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example, and the present disclosure is not limited to the configuration of this dimension.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A in this inner width dimension, it can be said to be a frontage dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked or a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), it can be said to be a dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked, a cooking dish 162, and a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is about 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 has a heater 163.
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, for example, a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire thin support plate made of mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A is an upper heater fixed in close contact with or close to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and 163B is a lower heater fixed in close contact with or close to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113. ..

The upper heater 163A can select a multi-stage thermal power in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W. As for the lower heater, a multi-stage thermal power can be selected in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, 166R is a right partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between the heating chamber 113 and the right wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
166L is a left partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between the heating chamber 113 and the left wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat dissipation) from the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 167 is an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
The GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shape with the upper heat shield plate 167. The lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

The GP 7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This void is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield plate 168 is fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the lower end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 169 is an upper case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167. Reference numeral 170 is a lower case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical shape and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. The GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. The gap GP8 is a closed space so that air does not flow to and from the outside.

The GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in the GP9. If each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a form in which a plurality of layers are stacked instead of a one-layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical / horizontal dimensions) of each of the heat insulating materials 175A to 17D is at least larger than the respective installation ranges of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 171 is a partition plate in which a passage 172 through which the cooling air RF5 flows is partitioned above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper part of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 174 is a communication port formed at the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the entrance portion of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 174. 102E is a terminal portion that is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 includes two independent internal passages 102A and 102B at the top and bottom, and the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled in the internal passage 102A on the upper side thereof. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
Further, in the other internal passage 102B, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and having an increased temperature flows.

As will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32, the exhaust duct 102 includes an internal passage (internal route) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal route) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the part where they meet.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the discharge port of the cooling air RF5 in which the opening area of the air passage is narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the discharge port. By such an action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both the two cooling air RF5 and RF6 are efficiently discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20. It should be noted that instead of adopting such an attraction structure, a method of merging at the upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large feeding port formed on the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the feeding port 180 from the outside, and is a heat-resistant plastic that transmits microwaves. It is formed in the shape of a plate from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the back side of the cover 181. The antenna driving motor 126 is thus fixed to the back surface side of the waveguide 123 via a heat-resistant sealing material 184.

The 126A is a rotation shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, and is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end portion) of the rotating shaft 126A. Although the rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and from there to the antenna driving motor 126 is heat-resistant and insulated from plastic, ceramic, etc. It may be formed of a material rich in properties.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotation shaft 126A with a predetermined dimension around the rotation shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to prevent microwave leakage more effectively, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is arranged closer to the antenna driving motor 126 than the choke structure, and microwaves from the periphery of the rotating shaft 126A are arranged. You may try to prevent leakage. As for the choke structure in the microwave heating device, Japanese patent documents include, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-174669, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-255978, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-172828 (a quarter wavelength choke). Since there is a combination of a room and a radio wave absorber), detailed explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 15, LA shows the dimensions from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the tail end of the antenna driving motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension is referred to as "protruding dimension". It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also required, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is. This protrusion dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 15, GP10 is a gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. Degree. It is dimensionally impossible to arrange the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is arranged so as to be displaced to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113.

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 15, 190 is a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192.

Reference numeral 191 is a cover in which an outer peripheral edge portion is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic or glass.

Reference numeral 193 is an inner seal frame having innumerable small holes having dimensions that do not allow microwaves to pass through the portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed by press-molding a thin metal plate as a whole, and a choke chamber 194 having an inlet (slit) formed on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion.

Reference numeral 195 is a sealing plate made of a thin metal plate. As shown in FIG. 15, the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 is bent in a series toward the inner seal frame 193 side. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 196 is a transparent sealing plate provided inside the portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. Reference numeral 197 is a metal upper shielding plate having a width dimension equal to at least the width of the door 114 along the upper surface of the door 114. The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in an eaves shape close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with a fixing tool such as a metal screw so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) in the lower case 101, the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by pulling the door 114 toward the handle portion 115.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a gap is momentarily generated in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101 and a part of the microwave leaks. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 is present. Thereby, such unwanted microwave leakage can be suppressed above the door 114.

As described with reference to FIG. 5, in view of the fact that the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is recommended to be 40 mm or less, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The height is from to the lower surface of the flange 16A. In the first embodiment, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, since the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed in the kitchen furniture 2 The upper case 16 does not protrude below the front lowering portion 2F. Therefore, the space below the upper case 16 becomes larger than before, which is advantageous when the lower case 101 is installed as described below.

In FIG. 17, reference numeral 201 denotes an introduction port formed in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, which is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter so as not to leak microwaves. The reason why the introduction port 201 is provided in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
The cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the introduction port 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and a part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the portion of the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the introduction port 201 is small. However, the purpose of injecting air from the introduction port 201 is to "suppress fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small air volume. It is not necessary to adopt the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, the details of the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30 again.
In FIG. 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the electric power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna driving motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129, and these are controlled. It controls the start, stop, operating conditions, etc. of the operation of.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit of the microwave heating device 120. The power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electric components (diodes and the like) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127, and are housed in a sealed state in the case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 in response to the command signal, and outputs the magnetron 122. There is a function of transmitting a command signal that lowers the power consumption to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control unit 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat radiation unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat radiating unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, the command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops is sent to the fourth cooling. Send to fan 129. In FIG. 30, the cooling fan drive circuit for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is not shown.

Reference numeral 139 is a closing detection unit for the door 114. The closure detection unit 139 electrically detects the open / closed state of any one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 by the current flowing through each circuit or the open / close signal. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board constituting the closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, whether or not the circuit board can be operated normally by removing the support plate 137 for inspection or measuring with the support plate 137 installed. Can be inspected (see FIG. 12).

Reference numeral 158 is a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and receives the temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from the temperature sensor. It consists of a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the electric power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, that is, calorific value) and the like. The control circuit of the heating chamber control unit 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B in response to the command signal, and the upper heater 163A. And there is a function to transmit a command signal that lowers the output of the lower heater 163. In addition, in order to reduce the outputs of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is changed to change the substantial thermal power.

(Drive circuit of induction heating source 9)
Next, the configuration of the drive circuit of the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking cooker 1 will be described. For the sake of brevity, FIG. 33 illustrates an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the heating cooker 1, the induction heating operation is performed by supplying high frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 of the IH coil 17R on the right side. Even with the IH coil 17L on the left side, the drive circuit may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b are sent to the IH control unit 90.

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to. 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the AC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching element 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b as flywheel diodes, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the DC power to the resonance circuit including the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

The resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of A flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the heated object N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. It is heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be configured using a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or a gallium nitride-based material.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG. 33.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce the energization loss as a switching element. Further, even if the switching frequency, that is, the drive frequency is set to a high frequency, that is, the switching is performed at high speed, the heat dissipation is good. Therefore, the heat radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be miniaturized, and the drive unit can be miniaturized and the cost can be reduced.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonance circuit including an IH coil 17R and a resonance capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. In this configuration, the half-bridge type inverter has been described, but the circuit for driving the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge type inverter. Further, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 33 is a current resonance type, a voltage resonance type may be adopted.

As described in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411 that comprehensively manages the power consumption and operation information of the home electric appliance 400 in the home. Yes, it can send and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC by communication wiring, but the longer the wiring, the more easily it is affected by noise. Therefore, the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC are arranged close to each other and wirelessly. It is desirable to shorten the wiring connecting the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the above-mentioned noise, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Further, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left and right center portions of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In FIG. 12, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 has an upper space 300A and the partition wall by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16. It is divided into two spaces, a lower space 300B formed below and a lower space 300B. That is, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" and divides the inside of the main body case HC into two upper and lower spaces (upper space 300A and lower space 300B).

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH for guiding cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coil have the ventilation holes 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. The outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101.

On the other hand, the lower air passage UH for guiding the cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. Further, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air flowing through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air flowing through the lower air passage UH do not merge in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is discharged to the outside of the cooking device 1 from the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending up and down in the same void GP 1, and is finally discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
As is clear from FIG. 32, the air (outside air) outside the cooking device 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking device 1 in two ways.

First path: From the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R are connected from the first cooling fan 60. The path to cool and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is referred to as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is sucked from two intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. Then, one of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128. The other outside air cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 via the fourth cooling fan 129. As described above, although there are two second paths, they eventually enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is referred to as a "lower airway" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is formed into an upper space 300A by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space below the partition wall 16S. It is divided into two spaces, 300B and 300B, each of which has independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and cooling fans 60, 128, 129 dedicated to each of these air passages. It is a configuration equipped with.
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61, which cools the inside of the upper unit 100 in cooperation with the first cooling fan 60.

(Control menu and cooking menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M and selectable will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

As described above, the "control menu" of the "independent cooking mode" that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R that use the induction heating source 9 is, for example, boiling or boiling as shown in FIG. 38. , Fried food (automatic cooking), etc.
However, as shown in FIG. 34, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (except in the case of the cooperative cooking mode described later). These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. An instruction for executing these control menu groups is a "control menu program", which is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final cooking or the name of the food material obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188. That is, it is not possible to directly select the food to be cooked in the "control menu" referred to here.

It can be said that the "control menu" in the "single cooking mode" and the "combined cooking mode" selected by the central operation unit 40M is roughly classified in consideration of the type, method and conditions of heating until the cooking is completed. Therefore, the names of the control menus are conceptual and comprehensive, such as "warm" and "oven (cooking)".

The control menu of the "composite cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M is a control menu called "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. There is. The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu prepared for each object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger"), which is targeted by the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 described later.

The RG control menu and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later, are basically different from each other. Further, the RG control menu and the combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later, are also different. These will be described in detail later.

Various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34. It should be noted that what is shown in FIG. 34 includes a control menu of the "single cooking mode" using the microwave heating source 189, but does not include the control menu of the "cooperative control mode" KM3.

The “left display area” in FIG. 34 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display unit 30.
The "center display area" is also the second area 30M.
The “right display area” also means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu "warm" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 34, a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave oven", "leafy vegetable boiled", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven" other than "warm" There is a control menu. However, the "center heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 34 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100.

The "RG control menu" is either a control pattern (in the combined cooking mode KM2) in which microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating are used in combination, or microwave heating (range) or oven heating. It is a general term for the control pattern of one (single cooking mode KM1). That is, the control pattern of the "single cooking mode KM1" in which either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is used independently is also exceptionally included.

The "central heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating unit (central induction heating unit) is added between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL in the upper unit 100. Strictly speaking, it is neither a "range" nor a "grill".

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, the "microwave oven" refers to cooking using a microwave heating source 189. "Grill" refers to cooking using an oven heating source 188. That is, the range grill refers to a (heating) control pattern that uses a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

In the first area of FIG. 34, a total of 10 types such as "warm" and "grill" are displayed, but "combined cooking" using two or more heating sources is "RG cooking" or "RG manual". "Etc. Further, since "warming" uses only the microwave heating source 9, strictly speaking, it is the single cooking mode KM1 and not the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. Also, "warm" does not correspond to the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The content described in the "center display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "center display area" are listed in the right column of the "center display area".

The content described in the "right display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "right display area" are listed in the right column of the "right display area". The blank area means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menu is created by the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later, is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, which is a reference guide for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Information 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the combined cooking mode (RG control menu group) is selected, and in the first area 30L, one of the control menus, "warm", is set as the default display. In the 2 area 30M, "80 ° C." indicating the temperature condition is displayed, and in the 3rd area 30R, no control condition is displayed. Further, in this embodiment, the guidance information 30P used as a reference for cooking is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the RG control menu can be changed to one RG control menu from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34. The corresponding "control conditions" (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) are displayed simultaneously in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "combined cooking mode KM2" such as "RG cooking", then the input key 43MS for instructing the start of the heating operation is operated by the user. Then, the cooking operation is started by shifting to the "composite cooking mode KM2" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described later.

Detailed data such as specific contents, control conditions, and additional information of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, a display program, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Warming: This is a kind of "control menu of single cooking mode KM1" for heating food using a microwave heating source 189. This "warming" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80 ° C", microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated to 80 ° C. In addition, "80 ° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before the start of heating.
As shown in FIG. 34, it can be set in 5 ° C increments in the range of 0 ° C to 90 ° C. For heating frozen foods, it can be set in 2 ° C increments in the range of -10 to 0 ° C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500 W.

(2) Manual microwave oven: Heating food using a microwave heating source 189, which is performed by setting a heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three stages of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The default heating time is 1 minute, but it can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes at 500 W output.
This "range manual" is also a kind of "control menu of independent cooking mode KM1". That is, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 includes the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: Suitable for boiling foods, especially leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. The non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "leaf vegetable boiled" is also one of the "single (heating) control menus".

(4) Boiled root vegetables: It is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes that eat roots and rhizomes, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. Since the heating power value is determined in advance on the cooking device 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, change the default display "standard" in the second area to "weak" or "strong" ( Must be selected).
This "leaf vegetable boiled" is also one of the "single (heating) control menus".

(5) Meat thawing: This is a control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
Since the food is heated using the microwave heating source 189, it is one of the "control menus of the independent cooking mode KM1".
(6) RG cooking: It is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
The microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the control pattern of heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the control pattern of heating in the reverse order, and the microwave heating and the heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of control patterns. It is a control pattern belonging to the combined cooking mode KM2.
The heating power value (watt) at the time of microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display of the second area 30M and select the heating intensity. ..

(7) RG re-cooking: Suitable for reheating cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also one of the pure "complex cooking mode KM2" control menus. A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used in combination.
(8) RG manual: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. It should be noted that microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the pattern of heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the pattern of heating in the reverse order, and the microwave heating and the heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also one of the pure "complex cooking mode KM2" control menus.

(9) Grill: The heating chamber 113 is used to heat food, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not controlled, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. Grilled fish is a typical applicable cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the energization control is performed by the heating chamber control unit 159 so as to reach the set target temperature.
As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180 ° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. As described in the section of "grill", the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. Then, the energization rate for the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is controlled by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the calorific value of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

The data indicating the individual control menu names (for example, "warm", "range manual", etc.) in the total of 10 RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is the storage device. It is stored in the first layer of MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

The data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking" and the like) that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and the reference information 30P and 30P1 are the third layer of the storage device MM. I remember it.

(Collaboration cooking mode)
Next, the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, inside the storage device MM, the data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated and the data of the first specific screen 30SP which is subsequently read out when the input key 43M1 is operated are "coordinated". The control data of the "cooking mode KM3" and the operation program (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "cooperative operation program") are stored in a storage area different from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" and the "cooperative operation program" are information for specifying a plurality of heating sources used to execute an individual object to be cooked (for example, a hamburger steak), and various control conditions. Includes information on cooking processes, including information on (heat power, standard heating temperature, etc.), control parameters, and the order (sequence) of heating sources to operate. That is, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuit and the processor that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is specified, the available (plural) heating sources and the order in which they operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative control mode KM3, it is not necessary to first select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and after the user sees the display, for example, if the right heating unit 17HR is selected, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be entered.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with the content of using the left heating unit 17HL in advance. The user can pre-set to use the right heating unit 17HR instead of using the left heating unit 17HL. However, such a setting may not be possible in some cases.
Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 is heated by the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113, the information of the series of cooking steps is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

In addition, as additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), and the next cooking process. Guidance information, instruction information, etc. that prompt the user's input operation to proceed are stored in correspondence with each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger", "karaage") in each cooperative cooking mode.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process until the temperature rises to the set (target) temperature is called the "preheating process", and after reaching the set temperature, the food to be cooked is actually heated to contribute to cooking. The process is called "cooking process 1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the time when the user puts the object to be cooked on the object to be heated N which has already been heated to a desired temperature after the preheating process and actually starts heating is the time when the "cooking process" starts. become.

(Information on how to use the RG control menu, etc.)
Next, the RG (range grill) control menu described with reference to FIG. 34 and the control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9 will be described properly.

FIG. 37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9.
A part of the name of the control menu shown in the classification 3 of FIG. 37 is also displayed in the first area 30L as shown in FIG. 34, and is used for the user to select the control menu.

Further, as shown in Category 2 of FIG. 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data of the first layer or the second layer of the storage device MM as described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. There is.

Therefore, at the stage of operating the input key 43M1, the user can optionally display information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37.

The integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in the category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 at the stage where the user selects the RG control menu to support the user's input operation. For example, when the user holds down the input key 43M1 once and the time elapses, for example, a predetermined reference time (example: 10 seconds), in any of the above-mentioned first area 30L to third area 30R. Information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed. Alternatively, it may be notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. For example, "warm" guides you to say, "It's best to warm rice or bento to your favorite temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 of FIG. 37, information that can be guided even in the scene of selecting the induction heating source 9 is stored in the storage device MM. Therefore, at the stage of step ST4 shown in FIG. 38 below, the information of the classification 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the selection operation of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. It is configured.

(Operation of cooking cooker)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking cooker 1 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation at the time of induction cooking in the cooking device 1. FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining a control operation in the case of performing microwave heating during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. FIG. 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 43 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking.

FIG. 38 will be described.
The basic operation program from turning on the power to starting cooking preparation is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time when the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so that the user can use the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97. Press (see FIGS. 20 and 30) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 38).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power supply conversion unit 92 in the power supply circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program.

Then, the presence or absence of abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130 that centrally control the induction heating source 9 is checked.

In the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100, a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are provided in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the detection temperature of those temperature sensors is transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. As a result, the IH control unit 90 can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (ST2).

Further, the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also acquire the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 and determine the presence or absence of an abnormality.

In step ST2, there is "transmission of activation information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 gives a notice to the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1. This will be explained later.

Since the temperature information of the main component built in the upper unit 100 is collected in the IH control unit 90, the IH control unit 90 performs an abnormal heating determination process as an abnormality monitoring control before the start of cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistant temperature (for example, 70 ° C.) of an electronic element such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified of the abnormality, and processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started is executed. It should be noted that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 transmits a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality" (ST3). The display screen at this initial time point will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the content similar to the content displayed by the integrated display unit 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information such as control menus and recipe information useful for health management within a range set in advance by the user. For example, the information previously transmitted by the user of the cooking cooker 1 to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using the information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is activated.

When the heating cooker 1 acquires some information, it is preferable to turn on a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100 to notify the user.

Inventory information for refrigerated 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted to the home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the individual cooking by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which is the individual operation unit, is selected without operating the input key 43M1 (STC).

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that neither the cooperative cooking mode nor the combined cooking is selected. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the above grace time, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L, 17R Only is determined to be selected (“Yes” in step ST6).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is operated in the step STC, the process proceeds to the processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode. The processing step STR1 in the cooperative cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 102 and the like.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. Subsequent control steps for induction heating will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to the menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources included in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is a case where the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are sequentially displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in a fixed order. These three types of control menus are a total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L described above.

The control menu displayed at the stage of step ST8 in FIG. 38 displays the following three types of control menus on the premise that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used.
(1) A cooking menu (ST9A) using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. The "grill" and "oven" of the control menu shown in FIG. 34 correspond to this.
(2) A control menu (ST9B) in which the microwave heating device 120 is used in combination with the above (1). This corresponds to the "range grill" heating (cooking) of the control menu shown in FIGS. 34 and 37.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) that uses only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "microwave oven manual", "leafy vegetable boiled", "warm" and the like in the control menu shown in FIG. 34.
Here, the above-mentioned "cooperative cooking mode KM3" is not displayed.

If it is found that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is better from the middle, the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M can be operated to advance to the stage of step STR1 in FIG. 67. That is, it is possible to proceed to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 39 shows the operation steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating control menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The following will be described with an example of using the right heating unit 17HR.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not the object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is obtained. Is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment is suitable for a pan with a standard diameter or a heat treatment suitable for a pan with a large diameter (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if it is not compatible with heating, the treatment is different from that of the standard pot.

In response to a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a display prompting the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 to select the "IH control menu" of the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu" for cooking, the heating power, the cooking time, etc. with the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR in earnest (MS4).
There are seven "IH control menus" displayed on the integrated display unit 30, "high-speed heating", "fried food", "boiler", "preheat", "cooking", "boiled", and "boiled + heat-retaining". be. However, in order to simplify the operability, it may be set so that a part or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected in the above-mentioned "function setting".

When the user selects any one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to those IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the energization amount of the IH coil 17R. (Firepower), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set an arbitrary thermal power, energization time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). The operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user touches the input key 43R1 again to stop using the input key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the above display is performed, the IH control unit 90 will be used after the certain period of time has elapsed. Drives the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R and starts induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes each time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start of the heating operation and the stop of the heating operation.

The case of the "large diameter pan" is basically the same as in steps MS1 to MS7, but as the IH control menu, some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 in FIG. 39 cannot be selected. The "high-speed heating menu" can be heated only in the case of "normal pot" or "large-diameter pot" using the IH coil 17L on the left side. The small pot means that the diameter of the bottom surface of the pot is less than 10 cm in the first embodiment, and it is detected as unsuitable for induction heating, and induction heating cannot be performed.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used at the same time, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. The examples described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41 are not the case of the above-mentioned "cooperative cooking mode KM3".

The example shown in FIG. 40 is a case where the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during the period in which the induction heating cooking is performed in the upper unit 100 first. Even when oven cooking, grill cooking, etc. are performed using both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the period of induction cooking, as described in FIG. 40. Basic total power control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.
Further, in this case, it is necessary to select the combined cooking mode KM2 by the central operation unit 40M.

When the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, the main power switch 97 is first turned on, and the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected by the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to open the door 114 as is. That is, in the first embodiment, when the upper unit 100 is operated (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), cooking by the lower unit 200 can be started as it is. Therefore. It is not necessary to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as described in the main part of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, there are a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened / closed according to the opening / closing of the door 114. Then, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 40, when a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened is received as described above (step S1), the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guide is, for example, "To start heating, select microwave oven heating and press the start button."

In the default setting of microwave heating, the target temperature is 80 ° C., so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started as it is, it automatically stops when it is detected that the temperature of the object to be cooked reaches 80 ° C. When changing the temperature to 80 ° C. (for example, 75 ° C.), the input key 43MS (see FIG. 21) may be pressed after changing the temperature conditions.

When the user selects, for example, "microwave oven manual" from the combined cooking menu with the input key 43M1 and then gives the instruction "start heating" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value, the integrated control device MC regulates the total power in step S3. Determine if the value is exceeded.

For example, since the integrated control device MC holds the thermal power value of the induced heating cooking started earlier and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as data, the power consumption of the upper unit 100 And the total value of the power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. The integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption amount by using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like at the stage when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the thermal power of microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of the cooking of the induction heating at that time is determined from the control menu of the induction heating and the cooking step. For example, when rice is cooked in the upper unit 100 (particularly, the "boiling step"), the rice cooking (boiling step) is prioritized and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

Further, when the upper unit 100 is performing "fried food", the fried food is automatically controlled to increase the heating power so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the input of ingredients and the like. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that the induced heating is prioritized, the power consumption of the microwave heating is reduced. Therefore, if the rated output of the microwave is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced. For example, the output is set to 300 W. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction is applied. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130, and starts microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since it has a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, whether or not the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. Is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 is completed (S9). Unless the induction heating operation is completed, the above steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, a signal is output from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, and the notification that the microwave heating is completed is notified.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating power is initially restored to the set thermal power intended by the user, and the microwave heating is continued. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the object to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the power priority between two parties, microwave cooking and induction heating, is the control menu (eg, “fried food”) and cooking process (eg, “fried food”) being performed in induction heating. , It was a premise to judge the priority with induction heating at that time from the "boiling process" of rice cooking.

Therefore, when the power priority between the two parties of microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. Before the 43MS, for example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Further, an alarm message is also output from the voice synthesizer 95. Further, even if microwave heating is started thereafter, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the above-mentioned "function setting". Once the power priority is set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the temperature of the object to be heated was monitored, and when the target temperature was reached, the microwave heating was terminated. However, since there is also a control method for measuring the microwave irradiation time and ending the cooking when the set time elapses, FIG. 41 will be described next.

FIG. 41 is an example in the case where a control method for terminating cooking by the irradiation time of microwaves is adopted.
Since the steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the microwave heating is started in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the operation required time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has elapsed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Until the set time 2 elapses, the temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 may be used together.

(Integrated control device and total electric energy control)
Next, FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described.
42 and 43 are flowcharts for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. The example shown in these two figures is a case where the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during the period when the induction heating is first performed in the upper unit 100. .. Even in this case, the basic total electric energy control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) as described with reference to FIG. 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the electric power control unit 72.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, unlike FIGS. 40 and 41, there is an integrated control device MC and an induction heating device including a microwave heating device 120, an IH coil 17L, 17R, an inverter circuit 81, and the like. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, or the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the input operation unit 40 determines the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, and the like (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39), information indicating the contents is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). .. That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum thermal power and the operating time at the time of induction heating from the integrated control device MC. If there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation by the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

A case where the induction heating is started in this way and the microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started at the maximum thermal power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B opens as described with reference to FIG. 40. Therefore, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 (closed detection unit 139) that monitors this opens. Therefore, a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the thermal power in the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal for starting operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to "start heating" in the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal for starting operation to the microwave heating control unit 130.

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, a "notice signal" for starting cooking is transmitted from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, when the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, it becomes a "notice signal" including information using 1000 W as shown in FIG. 42.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in advance in the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in, find the total power consumption when microwave heating and induced heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power consumption regulation value. (Same as step S3 in FIGS. 40 and 41). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total electric energy of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are determined. ) May be used at the same time to determine whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the thermal power of microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the cooking priority of the induction heating at that time from the control menu of the induction heating and the heating step.

In the example of FIG. 42, since the microwave heating is set to be prioritized, the thermal power of the microwave heating is not reduced.

When it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating is prioritized, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the target thermal power of the IH coil 17R to temporarily reduce the power consumption. Lower the target. Notify the user that such restrictions will be applied. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low thermal power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b that the power has been reduced. Then, the fact that the power reduction is completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits a permission signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A has a current detection unit (not shown) such as the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when the microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has been completed, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Further, the microwave heating may be performed only for a certain time depending on the timer setting, and in that case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the lapse of the time and notifies that the heating operation is completed (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 so as to return to the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, the thermal power is raised to the initial target level and the induction heating is continued (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time or the target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends the induction heating. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified that the operation has been completed (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction heating)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start induction heating, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. Drives the inverter circuits 81L and 81R of.

An operation command signal is output from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as or slightly delayed from the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

The ventilation capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not have to be fixed. For example, the blowing capacity may be automatically changed between the weak operation and the strong operation according to the temperature of the temperature sensor TS 8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, if the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, the wind noise of the fan becomes louder, which may cause noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined as a correspondence table (data table) from the data of the preliminary ventilation test, etc., and this correspondence table is determined. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. Then, the IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 at any time according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the outlet 60A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, one of the features of the first embodiment will be described. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 27 and 28.

In the first cooling fan 60, the flat rotary blade 60T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 60C advances to the outlet 60A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the outlet 60A toward the inverter circuit board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost side of the inside of the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is schematically shown in FIG. 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL1, but the rotation direction RD1 of the rotary blade 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, the cooling air gradually changes its direction to the rear side as shown by the arrow of the broken line in FIG. 27 toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. Then, it advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward on the rear surface of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF1 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front and back and the upper part of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, the main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A does not diffuse to the surroundings but is a partition wall. It is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the rear side of 11.

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A to the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, since the outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A, a part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown from the outlet 60A is Turn backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, cooling air flowing in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L is also generated.

The flow of the cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25, 27 and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 61C travels in the direction of the outlet 61A while turning as shown in FIG. 27. Then, it is blown out from the outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost circumference inside the fan case 61C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is shown by three solid arrows in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotary blade 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, the cooling air gradually changes its direction to the rear side as shown by the arrow of the broken line in FIG. 27 toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front surface side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear rows. Then, it advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward in front of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, back, and above of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a slight gap.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not diffused to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the front side of the partition wall 11. ..

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A to the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF2 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, since the outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown from the outlet 61A A part of the air leaks forward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, it flows as cooling air branched in the spatial direction directly below the input operation unit 40 in front, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The ventilation holes 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are individually provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but a large number of them are provided. The small hole group may be provided and the small hole group may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and they are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching element 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Further, the power control switching element 83 is also used for the other IH coil 17L.

The two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A proceeds to the right while cooling parts such as various switches, a liquid crystal display screen, and a display unit drive circuit 63 that receive input operations arranged in the input operation unit 40.

As shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF1 may change its direction upward when it exits the outlet FO of the cover 70, but the cooling air RF2 merging from the front side also has the momentum. It is roughly divided into one that travels by reversing the top of the cover 70 to the left like the cooling air RF3 and one that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54 as shown by the cooling air RF4.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the IH coil 17R on the right side, and then flows directly below the IH coil 17L on the left side. In this process, the two IH coils 17R and 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250 ° C to 300 ° C during the induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, the two cooling air RF1 and RF2 are combined and cooled by the cooling air RF3 and RF4.

As described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R traveling to the right side of the partition plate 14 travels backward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B. The 53R is an exhaust plate and forms a large number of through holes 53R1.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also turns in the direction of the exhaust window 52A that is the final exhaust port, passes through a large number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and passes from the exhaust window 52A. It is discharged.
As a result, the cooling air RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the parts group such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the parts group to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these parts is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but inside this gap GP1, there is no component group to be cooled as described above, so the upper unit. It is not a cooling space of 100.

(Basic operation during microwave heating)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started as it is even if the upper unit 100 does not actually execute induction cooking. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 automatically resets after a certain period of time (for example, 30 minutes) from the last timing when any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. Will be released. Alternatively, when the temperatures of the top plate 15 and the heating chamber 113 all drop below the specified value, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or the like is put into the heating chamber 113, and after occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) is used in the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. When the start of microwave cooking is ordered, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. The microwave referred to here is a radio wave of 2450 MH ± 50 MHz.

The generated microwave is guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operation at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced in the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be evenly propagated inside the heating chamber 113. Since the operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is described in detail by, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF5. Then, the cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

Next, the cooling air RF5 passes through the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A provided at two locations above and below the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 passing through the communication port B138B hits the back surface of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. There is a minute gap of several mm or less between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. That is, the guide is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has an effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature exceeding 300 ° C.

Looking at the position of the communication port 173 from the communication port A138A in a plane, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. That is, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 that passes through the communication port 173 and extends horizontally to the rear (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 exits the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from the lower side and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, air is sucked into the case A151 from the intake port B152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF6. .. Then, the cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the radiating portion 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the void GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and proceeds to the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201.

Since the introduction port 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, a part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114 and eliminates the fogging generated on the heating chamber 113 side of the seal plate 196. ..

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, and the like generated from the object to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling portion at the rear portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into an exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it joins the cooling air RF5 so as to be attracted to the updraft, and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 into the room.

Even when the initial air volumes of the cooling air RF5 and the cooling air RF6 are the same, the air speed of the cooling air RF5 is faster when the cooling air RF5 is discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in the path as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it has an action of attracting the cooling air RF6 discharged from below.

Since the cooling air RF5 and RF6 are forcibly discharged from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102. In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at low cost, and it is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100.

Next, FIG. 44 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the cooking device 1 and the types of cooking.
As is clear from FIG. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in the case of induction cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated in the case of microwave cooking and oven cooking, respectively.

(Basic operation when cooking in the oven)
Next, in the cooking apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some kind of cooking is started and pre-starts. Therefore, even if the upper unit 100 does not actually perform the induction cooking or the microwave cooking, the oven cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start cooking in the oven.

Next, the door 114 is opened to put food or the like into the heating chamber 113, and then the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 selects a cooking control menu using the heating chamber 113. For example, in the case of cooking to bake fish or meat, the heating time and heating power are set. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control unit 159. The selection of this control menu will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the energization time zone, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measuring unit 158. The heating chamber control unit 159 sees the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature, and controls the energization of both the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, or one of them so as to reduce the difference (feedback). control). The temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

When the timer cooking control method is input by the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, or one of them, is energized for a set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the detection temperature data of the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated control device MC controls the microwave heating. A drive command is issued to the unit 130, and the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started. The drive command signal may be output directly from the heating chamber control unit 159 to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown out from the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the mouth edge of the mounting hole into the heating chamber 113 through the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, the communication port 173 is reached, and then the upper case 169 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the void GP5R with almost no temperature rise (see FIGS. 16 and 17).

Then, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114.

The food or the like to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, or the like due to the radiant heat of the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. As shown in FIG. 15, such steam, oil smoke, etc. are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 to the rear portion.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted to the cooling air RF5 rising upward and is discharged into the room through the exhaust port 20 (see FIG. 15).

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the cooking cooker 1 up to a certain stage, and then temporarily the left operation unit 40L or the right operation. When the unit 40R was operated, the subsequent induction heating control was entrusted to the IH control unit 90. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the IH control unit 90.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after the control menu of either induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 can be used. Basically, it may be possible to perform a control operation related to heating.

In that case, when a new input is made by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), it is once controlled by the integrated control device MC, but when no input is made, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be executed by any of the unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during cooking of fried food by IH control unit 90)
A specific control operation example of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 45.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one of the independent cooking modes using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When "fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the control menu of induction heating by operating the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, it is edible placed in the object to be heated (metal pot) N. The temperature of the oil is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes the preheating step, the fried food cooking step, and the heating power up step as shown in FIG. 45.
Further, on the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display unit 30, information indicating necessary information and reference information (for example, an estimated time required for preheating) appears in characters, figures, and the like. It is also displayed that the priority cooking is such that the electric power is not limited (suppressed) by the electric power control unit 72.

Therefore, during the cooking of the fried food, the user can recognize that the electric power is preferentially secured even if the microwave heating or the oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, when the target oil temperature set by the user is 180 ° C., the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) is started to be driven at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500 W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rapidly rises. The temperature rises from room temperature (for example, 20 ° C.) to 180 ° C., which is the target temperature T1.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180 ° C., the IH control unit 90 is a control operation that adjusts the induced heating amount, that is, the inverter output, and tries to maintain the target temperature as it is (based on such temperature detection information, automatically adjusts the high frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature. Is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display command is issued to the integrated control device MC, and a voice guide such as "The temperature of the oil has reached an appropriate temperature. Please put in the ingredients" is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95.

When the user puts an ingredient, for example, a frozen croquette, into the cooking oil, the cooking step 1 starts from this point.
Since the cooking oil is rapidly cooled by a cold ingredient (croquette) from the time of its addition, the temperature drops sharply as shown in FIG. 45. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, it immediately raises the thermal power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to a predetermined thermal power of 1500 W or 1800 W and drives it, so that the oil temperature rises again. (Temperature feedback control). In this way, as soon as the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the process shifts from the fried food process to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power up step, the oil temperature is controlled to be maintained between 225 ° C. of the second temperature T2, which is higher than the target temperature T1, and 230 ° C. of the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 higher than this. The device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 45, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900 W.
The process after the temperature reaches the first temperature T1 is called the "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crisply. If you do not cook with sufficient heat in such a process to increase the heat, you will not be able to make fried food well. Since the fried food process is not limited to a predetermined time, if the user presses the input key 44R (or the input key 45L), all the fried food cooking is completed.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the process from the fried food cooking process to the heating power up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time zone", and other execution time zones are defined. Power is not reduced by starting the heating source or changing the operating conditions. That is, the IH control unit 90 of this induction heating always grasps whether or not the control menu being executed is in the "execution time zone of the priority control menu", and if it is in the execution time zone, the execution time zone is the same. It has a function to notify the outside to that effect.

As is clear from the above explanation, every time a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90, and the progress of the heating process is all the IH. It is left to the control of the control unit 90.

In the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "fried food cooking process" that actually heats the object to be cooked becomes the "cooking process". The preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display of integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R, and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 47 is a plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L before and after the start of induction cooking. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 31L in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode.

FIG. 46 will be described. Since the integrated display unit 30 is not activated in the state where the main power switch 97 is turned off, no information is displayed.
In the state where the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG. 46 on the integrated display unit 30 after performing a self-diagnosis such as the presence or absence of an abnormality as described above.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 46, 30A is a display statement notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code. When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 that holds information on various cooking recipes. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display sentence 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed. On the display screen 2A, the character display "Caution for bumping" is one of the caution displays 30E. This "sudden boiling" means that when a viscous cooking object (liquid) such as curry or stew is heated, the inside of the cooking object is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly. A phenomenon that causes intense boiling. As steam erupts from the heated liquid, hot droplets may scatter and be dangerous. It is said that the timing and cause of bumping is the mixing of foreign matter from the outside or the impact. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 for induction heating, caution is given when the food to be cooked is stirred. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B shown in FIG. 46 may be referred to as a common screen 30Z. In addition, a form other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

On the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature and does not come into contact carelessly. When the integrated control device MC detects that the heating chamber 113 has not been sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state of the display screen 2 is automatically switched to. Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Further, the voice synthesizing device 95 may be used to simultaneously perform the contents of the alerts on the display screens 2A and 2B by voice.

As is clear from the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B of FIG. 46, these displays are performed by using the entire display screen 30D. That is, instead of partially displaying in any of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, the three areas 30L to the third area 30R cannot be identified in order to secure the widest possible display area. In this way, the integrated display is performed so that the user can see that the integrated display unit 30 is displayed as a whole.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are the stages of ST3 in the operation step of FIG. 38.
After a certain period of time, for example, 10 seconds has elapsed from the display time of the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B, the display content changes to prompt the selection of the heating source (heating means) (corresponding to the stage of the operation step ST4 in FIG. 38). ..

Therefore, the case of induction cooking will be described next. Note that FIG. 47 describes the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 47 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and the left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before pressing the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL, the state is shown in FIG. 47 (A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the left heating source 17HL has been selected by the user. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, and displays that the operation input has been accepted.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L1 is blinked. Further, since the selection of the control menu is also in the state of waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L2 directly behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 47B, the star-shaped figure indicates that the light emitting display unit 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heating power is set to "3", the heating power display unit 67L indicating the heating power stage during induction heating causes the light emitting unit of the heating power display unit 67L to continuously emit light from the left side (or until the heating power 3 is indicated). Change the blue color to red) and display the amount of firepower to the user.

When the user changes to a thermal power that is not the default setting, pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3 reduces or increases the thermal power by one step each time the input key is pressed, and the light emitting unit of the thermal power display unit 67L (correspondingly Or the range of the red light emitting part) is expanded from the left side to the right or reduced to the left side, and the adjustment state of the thermal power is displayed to the user.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
FIG. 48 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L of the cooking cooker 1.
In FIG. 48, the diagrams of states A to C drawn on the left side are schematic views of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L. The state before the start of the operation is the state A in FIG. 48.

As described with reference to FIG. 47, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display unit 27L3 emits light as shown in the state B of FIG. 48.
In the state B, the light emitting display unit 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input function is effective for both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3. Therefore, if the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed twice, the thermal power is reduced. The increase / decrease in the thermal power can be seen from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L immediately behind.

Next, a case where the “single (heating) cooking mode” using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
In order to simplify the explanation, a case where the left heating unit 17HL is used will be described.

When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, it means that the temperature is specified below the thermal power level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the control mode of "heat insulation" is specified, and the integrated display unit 30. On the display screen 30D of the above, the "third specific screen" 30ST of the heat insulating display is displayed.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific" corresponding to the fried food is selected. "Screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature of the "third specific screen 30ST" for fried food is set to 180 ° C., the characters "fried food 180 ° C." may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for tamagoyaki may be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 48, a "schematic diagram of a container" 280 such as a pot is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. , It has a wide horizontal display area.

In the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the characters "heat insulation (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the heat insulation temperature is about 80 ° C. The explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soups and the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 48, the heat insulating temperature may be displayed as "80 ° C.".

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state B of FIG. 48, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time the input key 44L is pressed, and the control menu is displayed as shown on the display screen 3B. .. In the example of the display screen 3B, it is shown that "fried food" is selected. In the state B of FIG. 48, after a certain period of time elapses, the control menu of the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "fried food", and the driving of the IH coil 17L is started. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiled food", "boiled water heater", and the like in addition to "fried food".

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180 ° C., the characters “fried food 180 ° C.” are displayed on the left side display unit 31L as shown in FIG. 48.
This temperature of "180 ° C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained in the vicinity of 180 ° C, and when the temperature reaches 180 ° C, it is notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. In addition to that, the integrated display unit 30 displays "the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to input foodstuffs and the like.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature in the fried food (automatic) control menu, the temperature can be lowered by the input key 43L2 or raised by the input key 43L3.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the display screen 30D has a horizontally long and wide display area in which the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. In the space provided, a cautionary statement 30G indicating that the preheating is started and that the cooker 1 is not separated from the side during the preheating operation is displayed.

Next, in the state B of FIG. 48, when the input key 44L is pressed and "appropriate temperature" is selected as another control menu, the display screen 3C is displayed. As shown on the display screen 3C, the control menu "suitable temperature" is a recommended control mode for heating a pot or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180 ° C.) and for tamagoyaki or the like. The recommended sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of this display screen 3C, the character information "preheating 180 ° C." is displayed on the left side display unit 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed on the individual display unit (left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L). Is also good.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated. The scene where the said "combination cooking mode" is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC, "warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 49 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menu) called "warm" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 49, the position where the specific sentence 30J is displayed may be referred to as "display position A" in the following description.
Further, the position (second area 30M) where the control conditions (target temperature information 30T, heating time information 30S, etc.) are displayed may be referred to as "display position C" in the following description (see FIGS. 49 and 52). ). These control conditions may be referred to as "control condition A" in the following description.

The word "oven" is displayed in the rear BK of the specific sentence 30J of "warm" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the character "range manual" is displayed in a slightly smaller size on the front FR side. To.

And when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are "oven" and "manual range". If the input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once at this stage, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "range manual".
Further, when the input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the character "warm" changes to "oven".

In FIG. 49, the target temperature information 30T of “80 ° C.” is displayed in the second area 30M on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen. In the case of microwave heating at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80 ° C., the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80 ° C.

In order to raise the target temperature (80 ° C.) of the second area 30M to 85 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the right side, which is located immediately before the second area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to lower the temperature to 75 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the left side may be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80 ° C.) in the second area 30M. Also, below the number at 80 ° C., a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since this symbol 30UP and the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the right side when raising the temperature, thermal power, etc. Is easy to understand.

On the contrary, since the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the left side) of the central operation unit 40M is similar to that of 30DN, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side when lowering the temperature, thermal power, etc. Is easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, we have adopted a device to avoid operation mistakes (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 49, 30K is a heating source display unit that indicates in characters that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As described above, 30P is reference information that automatically displays that it is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Further, as shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37, the information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time according to the operation of the input key 43M3.
That is, in the first embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence with the control menu (for example, "warm") so that the user does not hesitate whether to select each control menu (for example, "warm"). Information 30P is displayed.
Further, when the reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 49, when the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touch-operated, the reference information 30P1 is changed to the reference information 30P. Instead of, it can be displayed in the third area 30R.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described.
FIG. 50 is another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 is operated to carry out the combined cooking mode.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1 and the like shown in FIG. 50 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "range manual", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC of the cooperative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control condition (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. Is displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 49, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 49 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as a kind of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual", and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 50 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. ..

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "range manual" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

On the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Further, in the adjacent third area 30R, the microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the combined cooking mode, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. The heating source display unit 30K (indicating that it is a microwave heating source 189 in characters) may not be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST by one step to 200W, you can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the right side, which is located immediately before the third area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the left side may be operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 50, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) of the second area 30M. Also, below the number of 500 W, a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 50 shows the minimum thermal power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the minimum thermal power (100W) of the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only thermal power larger than this thermal power can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, the symbol 30UP also indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode is performed. That is, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to the input operation of the user.

When the input key 43M1 on the left side corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once in the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 50, it changes from "range manual" to "boiled leaf vegetables" as shown in FIG. can.

The display screen 6ST in FIG. 51 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, "Boiled leafy vegetables", which is a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, is displayed in large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started as it is, it will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. That is, when the microwave heating source 9 is used, the "standard" of the thermal power level is different in each compound cooking mode and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 51, as described with reference to FIG. 49, a heating source display unit 30K indicating that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189 is displayed. As described above, 30P is a recommended sentence (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this recommended sentence may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Instead of the recommended sentence 30P of FIG. 51, as described in FIG. 49, as shown in the classification 2 of FIG. 37, the reference information 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu is provided each time according to the user's request. You may display it.

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 52 is still another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to a user's input operation.
FIG. 52 shows a scene in which a range grill (RG) control menu called “RG cooking” is selected.

As described above, the above-mentioned "RG cooking" is a control menu that can be cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first to heat food to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types. Note that "simultaneous" here does not mean that the timings of both the start and end of heating are exactly the same, and it is sufficient that the time zones of the heating operations overlap even at a part.

In the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 52, first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, and then the microwave heating is stopped and the oven heating source 188 alone is used for 5 minutes. It can be seen that it is a heating control (time control) pattern of heating.

The reason why the abbreviated form "RG" is used instead of the term "range grill" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if an attempt is made to display a larger number of characters, the occupied area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 52, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the heating time information 30GY for the subsequent grill cooking is also displayed in minutes (however, short). When the time comes, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 52, the display screen 7ST2 is first heated by the microwave heating source 189 alone for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then heated only by the oven heating source 188 for 5 minutes, which is a heating control (time control) pattern. This is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen. The display screen 7ST1 that drives both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 for only the first minute is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance (“function setting” using the input key 43KP described above).

Next, FIG. 53 will be described.
FIG. 53 shows the state of the display screen 6ST in which the control menu of the “leafy greens boiled” shown in FIG. 51 is displayed at a predetermined position (center position in the front and back) of the first area 30L, and the central operation unit 40M. It is a plane schematic diagram explaining the operation of.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 emit light in a unified light emitting color by the display unit drive circuit 63.

After that, when the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode is further operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 51 is displayed by default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, a total of four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can all accept inputs. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS for the start is shown by a dotted line circle in FIG. 53 from the continuous light emission. It changes to blinking. Then, the existence of the input key 43MS is emphasized by light.

If the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 53, the mode shifts to the combined cooking mode KM2. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input keys 43R1 and 43L1 once after shifting to the combined cooking mode KM2. Even in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the same applies after the command to shift to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 is given by (input key 43MS).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are effective, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are made to emit light in the first light emitting form (continuous light emitting). It is provided with light emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63).
When the reference information 30P and 30P1 are displayed, the integrated control device MC causes only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light emitting mode (blinking). It is a composition.

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for the command to start the heating operation (in the combined cooking mode KM2) by the blinking of the light emitting unit 27M6. Since the light emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT that can stop the operation of microwave heating and oven heating, the light emitting unit 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation starts. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is also effective, and a command to stop heating can be transmitted by touch operation.

At the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection unit, to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during cooking in cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62.
FIG. 54 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing each input operation and process when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is implemented and the single cooking mode KM1 is implemented. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the linked cooking mode to the transition in chronological order. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display up to the transition between the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode in chronological order.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 is pressed first and the setting operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in FIGS. 49 to 53 is performed halfway, the input is performed before the input key 43MS is pressed. From the stage when the key 43MC is pressed, the input process for the linked cooking mode KM3 is changed. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43MC is subsequently touched and then the input key 43M1 is touched, the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) is subject to a plurality of cooperative cooking modes KM3 (cooperative cooking). Yet another identification information (including the graphic mark and the name of the cooked food) 330 for identifying the cooked food (which is a menu) is displayed.

In FIG. 54, the number of “foods to be cooked” that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three types: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef, and the number of items to be cooked is called "the number of cooperative cooking menus".

In the first embodiment, the total number of linked cooking menus is eight. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 78.

In FIG. 54, 330 is the identification information, and in the first embodiment, it is the information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight identification information 330. In other words, there are also eight cooperative cooking menus. Reference numeral 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).

The position where the identification information 330 is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B". In the first embodiment, the positions of the "display position B" and the "display position A" (see FIG. 49) are the same, but may be set to different positions. However, in order not to cause confusion for the user, the position is always the same in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Further, even in the combined cooking mode KM2, it is preferable that the "predetermined specific position A" is always the same position.

In FIG. 54, as additional information 331, "when the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH is started" is displayed. This means that if the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, induction heating can be started by the left heating unit 17HL. However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 with the left operation unit 40L after the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 54, the identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooked food (for example, gratin) is displayed on the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, below the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooked food (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, when the identification information is generically referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "composite cooking mode KM2" described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, it is possible to select the object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

That is, each time the input key 43M1 is operated once, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) changes in the form of sequentially moving upward or downward one step at a time. That is, the identification information 330 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front-back center position) of the first area 30L by forward feed and reverse feed.

In the first embodiment, there are a total of eight types of cooked foods in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described above. Therefore, for example, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes around. On the contrary, if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes around. This will be described in detail in FIGS. 76 to 78.

The default display for the linked cooking menu is "hamburger" as shown in FIG.
The identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another object to be cooked can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 68).

The "first specific screen" 30SP in the first embodiment means the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 54. The display content of the first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes at any time depending on the input of the central operation unit 40M by the user and the operating state of the cooking cooker 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG. 54.
(1) Identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. This identification information 330 is always displayed in principle even if the heating process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 87, there are some exceptions.
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, a pair of heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating unit of the induction heating source 9 used is displayed. To. Either one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. As shown in FIG. 54, the color and brightness of the selected heating unit specifying unit 333R and 333L change, for example, as shown in the white character "left", and the selected heating unit (either right or left). One) is shown.
(3) A horizontally long strip-shaped process display unit 332 is displayed in the latter half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. The process display unit 332 is continuously displayed during the period from before the transition to the linked cooking mode to the end of all the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode. In addition, the contents are updated as needed by methods such as black-and-white reverse display and changing the color so that the current cooking process can be understood according to the progress of the cooking process. This will be explained in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating unit specifying unit 333R and 333L, except that it is displayed in a wide range covering the entire integrated display unit 30. (See the display screen 10C in FIG. 87).

With the identification information 330 of the target object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) displayed in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction, when the input key 43MS is pressed, the object to be cooked is cooked. The execution command of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is given to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 67).

The position where the identification information 330 is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B". That is, the "display position B" is the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L.
Further, the position directly beside the display position B is the "display position D" described later. This will be explained later.

In cooking using the induction heating source 9 in the cooking step 1 (for example, hamburger steak), either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking mode. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP in the case of the hamburger is as shown in FIG. 54, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process, and also changes depending on the object to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 54 illustrates that the input key 43MS needs to be operated in order to start induction cooking.

When the input key 43MS is pressed in the state of FIG. 54, the “hamburger” is used as the object to be cooked to shift to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

When the input key 43MS is pressed, the preheating operation by the induction heating source 9 is started.
Then, the induction heating source 9 starts the preheating operation for the object to be heated N such as a frying pan or a pan. When the food to be cooked (for example, the dough of "hamburger") is placed on the food to be heated N which has become hot, the preheating process is started.

If the next cooking step 1 is a control program performed by the left heating unit 17HL, pressing the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operating unit 40L starts the cooking process 1 by the induction heating source 9 (see FIG. 23). The stage shown in FIG. 54).

After the cooking step 1 is started, the input key 43L1 may be pressed once again to finish the cooking step 1.
Further, at this point, in order to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 itself and return to the standby initial screen 30Z (see FIG. 46), the input key 43MT may be pressed.

The cooking step 1 is completed, and the object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) is transferred from the object to be heated N (for example, a frying pan) on the top plate 15 to the inside of the heating chamber 113.
Then, the cooking step 2 can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

After that, in order to finish the cooking step 2, the input key 43MT may be pressed once.
As shown in FIG. 54, the two input keys 43MS and 43MT are input means for starting and canceling (ending) the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
At the same time, it also serves as an input means for starting and stopping the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

Due to the above circumstances, the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, the cooked object is moved from the heated object N (for example, a frying pan) on the top plate 15 to the inside of the heating chamber 113, and the input key 43MT is pressed. If it is pressed once, the cooking step 2 is completed.
Further, if the same input key 43MT is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be canceled at this stage.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the flat area of the input operation unit 40, particularly the central operation unit 40M, is restricted, and it is difficult to arrange a large number of input keys in a plane. As shown in FIG. 54, the two input keys 43MS and 43MS are shared by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the other cooking modes, respectively. Therefore, even in a small installation area, the user can operate it reliably.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
In the flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 38, the operation after step ST4 is shown in FIG. 55.

After the display / notification step (ST4) prompting the selection of the heating means, the right operation unit 40R can select the cooking by the right heating unit 17HR (SP1). In addition, cooking by the left heating unit 17HL can also be selected by the left operation unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after that step (ST4), cooking by the microwave heating source 189 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS1). In addition, cooking using the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS2).

Further, the combined cooking mode KM2 can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). In addition, the single cooking mode KM1 can also be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In FIG. 55, CH1 is a first layer selection means for selecting three types of heating sources. That is, as the selection means of the first layer, the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M, the input key 43M1, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L which is an individual operation unit, and the input key of the right operation unit 40R are also used. There are a total of 4 of 43R1.

As described above, "cooperative cooking" means that one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc., hereinafter the same) has a different heating location and is independently heated under operating conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). Refers to cooking performed using two or more heat sources that can be set.

More specifically, in the "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment, the heating place for one object to be cooked is on the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113.
The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be independently set are an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are heated with the same time zone or time difference.

The "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of two "first cooperative cooking" and "second cooperative cooking".
In the "first cooperative cooking", first, the induction heating source 9 is used for cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, and then the inside of the heating chamber 113 is cooked by microwaves. The cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the one that defines the cooking sequence is the "first cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, the "second cooperative cooking" means that first, microwave heating, oven heating source 188, or (cooperative) heating cooking by these two heating sources is performed inside the heating chamber 113, and then induction. Cooking is performed in the left heating unit 17HL by the heating source 9.

The cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the one that defines the cooking sequence is the "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2B).
In the case of the second linked cooking mode, usually (default setting condition), the first used heating source, either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, is linked for a specific period of time. The integrated control device MC performs a process of limiting operations corresponding to menus other than the cooking mode KM3.

The selection (SR2A, SR2B) of the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode" is not one in which the user judges and performs the selection operation each time, but the cooperative cooking menu is displayed in the cooperative cooking mode. When the corresponding identification information 330 (for example, the cooking name "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines) it.

In the first embodiment, the heating unit of the induction heating source 9 used when executing the "cooperative cooking" menu is both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the process of implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, when only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode. can. However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. The integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit or forcibly reduce the thermal power.

In FIG. 55, CH2 is a second layer selection means for selecting a control menu. That is, as the selection means of the second layer, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is used.

On the other hand, as the selection means of the second layer, in the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is used.
Further, as the selection means of the second layer, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, there are two, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L and the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

That is, in the first embodiment, the input key for displaying the combined cooking menu and the linked cooking menu at a predetermined display position of the integrated display unit 30 by forward and reverse is the input key 43M1. be. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu, the desired cooking menu can be displayed by the same input key, and the operability is good.

As shown in FIG. 55, at the stage (SR5) when the induction cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Can be done (SR6). Further, by operating the input key 43L1, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing (SR7).

In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is basically not set in advance, so that the user can cook for any time desired.

Further, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operating unit 40R to generate heat (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. Can be specified (SR6).

Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the cooking step by the left heating unit 17HL is completed by the input key 43L1, the cooking step of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next step (described in detail in FIG. 56).

When the induction heating step is completed in the cooking step of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there is also a control menu in which the cooking process proceeds while the microwave output is fixed at 500 W, for example.

When the microwave heating cooking is terminated by the input key 43MT, the entire cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is terminated (SR11). Although it is not the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, after that, the user operates the central operation unit 40M to further perform microwave cooking (by the control menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the independent cooking mode KM1). May be.

FIG. 55 will continue to be described.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 55 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the single control mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 for microwave heating and oven heating are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34). .. Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, one combined cooking mode KM2 or the single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3).

Next, if the input key 43MS is pressed, the execution of one combined cooking mode KM2 or the single control mode KM1 is instructed (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). In the description of FIG. 34, the whole is described as the combined cooking mode, but the menu such as "microwave oven manual" is only microwave heating. That is, in reality, the control menu of the single heating mode KM1 is exceptionally included. This has been described in FIG. 37.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the control menu "range grill (RG) cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit, and this "RG cooking" is a combination of microwave cooking and grill cooking. Is.
On the other hand, when the same input key 43M1 is operated, "warm" can be selected, which is cooking with the microwave heating source 189 alone, which is one of the single cooking modes.

The heating conditions (eg, heating time) may be changed after the start of microwave heating or oven heating (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is instructed to be stopped (SS7), and the operation of microwave heating or oven heating is stopped (SS8).

FIG. 55 will continue to be described.
SP1 to SP8 of FIG. 55 show the operation steps when the induction heating cooking is performed by the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, if the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed, cooking by the right heating unit 17HL can be selected (SP2). Then, the induction heating control menu is automatically determined after a certain period of time without operating the input keys 43L2 or 43L3 (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is an IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the cooperative cooking menu of the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the first specific screen 30SP.

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
The "single cooking" in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If the user operates the input keys 43R2 or 43R3 to command the change of the thermal power of the induction heating after the induction heating is started, the integrated control device MC changes the thermal power which is one of the control conditions. (SP6).

In both the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start command of the cooking process for performing microwave heating is the input key 43MS. Further, the input key 43MS is also used to start the cooking process of the independent cooking mode KM1 that independently drives the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the dedicated switch (button or input key) for instructing the start of cooking for the induction heating source 9 is not provided, but the dedicated switch or input key is used (input). It may be provided (in addition to the key 43MS).

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, the right heating unit 17HR is instructed to stop (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43L1 may be pressed. As described above, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both in the scene where the heating unit is selected and the operation is started, and in the case where the cooking is finished.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9. Further, it is a schematic diagram showing that the heating source used is restricted in operation during cooperative cooking.
The linked cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 56 is the “first linked cooking mode” described with reference to FIG. 55.

In the "first cooperative cooking mode" of this example, the induction heating source 9 is operated in the cooking step 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated as the heating source in the cooking step 2. Further, in the cooking step 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 55, one cooperative cooking mode KM3 is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is a period from operating the input key 43MC to execute the cooperative cooking mode and then pressing the input key 43MS.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1). The cooking step 1 does not include a "preheating step" (see FIGS. 59, 60, 64) in which the object to be cooked is not actually heated.
Since P3 switches from cooking by the heating means used in the cooking step 1 to cooking in the cooking step 2 in which another heating means is used, the operation of the heating means used in the cooking step 1 is temporarily stopped, and another heating means is used. It is a rest period (also referred to as “transition period TR”) until the heating of the heating means is started. The length of this pause period depends on the operation timing of the user. That is, if the user issues a command to start the cooking process 2 earlier, this pause time becomes shorter.
P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by a heating means (either a single heating source or a plurality of heating sources) used in the cooking step 2.

In the first embodiment, the "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" is provided as one of the linked cooking modes KM3.
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65, and as a cooking menu using the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, for example, there is "hamburger steak". In the case of this "hamburger", the preheating step is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the heating operation of the preheating step is not stopped at the start of the cooking step 1. Therefore, from an electrical point of view, the oven heating source 189 and the microwave heating source 189, which are in charge of the cooking step 1, and the induction heating source 9 are energized in parallel in the same time zone.

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (induction heating source 9 in the above description) that has started the operation before the cooking step 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking step 1, and the cooking step is performed. During the period of 1, the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or the microwave heating source 189 may be energized together.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following description will be made on the premise that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheated cooking mode KM4.

As is clear from FIG. 56, at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the displayed first specific screen 30SP). At that point, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable.

Specifically, among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 43L1 is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. The meaning of "invalidation" is that a valid command signal is not transmitted from the input key 43L1 to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC transmits the command signal. It has both meanings of not processing as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

At the same time, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed. If the right heating unit 17HR has already been used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right heating unit 17HR can be used as it is. On the other hand, since it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be used (according to the integrated control device MC), the above-mentioned "prohibition of use" processing is not performed.

Therefore, only the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of being "occupied" by the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Further, when viewed from the whole of the induction heating source 9, the use of only a part (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". When the right heating unit 17HL is not in use for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR may be occupied or not occupied in the same manner. The control program may be changed so that the time when the input key 43MS is pressed after selecting the linked cooking mode is in the "occupied" state.

Here, the occupancy of the induction heating source 9 will be described focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has an input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
After the heating operation of the left side IH coil 17L is started, the input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.

On the other hand, the input operation unit has an input key 44L. The input key 44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
In this case, the "control menu" includes "boiled water", "boiled", "cooked rice", "fried food (automatic)", and the like, and only one of them can be selected.

To select cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed when the above-mentioned "permission condition" is satisfied.
When the stage where the first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 56) or when the "input command for starting" for shifting to the linked cooking mode is performed by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 57), the linkage is performed. The cooking mode shifts to KM3, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied state".

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the “occupied state” will be described.
There are two ways for the integrated control device MC to occupy the left heating unit 17HL.
(1) First method:
When the mode shifts to the linked cooking mode KM3, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled. All other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, 44L disable the input function.
In this case, after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the input key 43MS is pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started.
Therefore, when stopping the started induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3), the input key 43L1 may be pressed once.
Further, in order to start heating again for additional heating in this state, the input key 43L1 may be pressed once (the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).
(2) Second method:
The input function of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL is invalidated. However, even if the mode is changed to the cooperative cooking mode, only the input key 44L is enabled.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is determined for the first time only when the input key 44L is pressed once after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
After that, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started and the induction heating is started, the input function of the input key 43L1 is immediately restored. Therefore, if the input key 43L1 is pressed once, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately. Further, by pressing the input key 43L1 again, the induction heating operation can be restarted (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled even at this stage).

In the following description, the first method will be selected and described, but even if the second method is adopted, there is no effect on the basic effect obtained in the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the cooking step 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do.

In the cooking step 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L only once, and at this point, the left operation unit 40L sends an induction heating start command to the integrated control device MC. ..

The operation of the heating start command by the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking has a constant heating power (weak or standard heating power) within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds later) from the input time by the input key 43MS. You may start with.

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation of stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking step 1 is immediately completed. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (coordinated cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation for resuming the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode KM1 as described with reference to FIGS. 47 (A) and 47 (B), and the input key 43L1 for resuming cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is used. You only need to press it once again. Further, when the user specifies the thermal power, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the thermal power is reduced or increased by one step each time the input key is pressed, and the desired thermal power can be set.

As shown in FIG. 56, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is also possible to store the metal dish used for induction heating in the heating chamber 113 as it is and heat it with microwaves. However, if the food to be cooked is completely covered with metal, the metal dish is covered with metal. Since the food inside cannot be heated by microwave, it is necessary to transfer it to a metal container without a lid, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

In the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided to the inside of the heating chamber 113, and the heating cooking period (P3). Cooking process 2) (P4) begins.

After being started by the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual object to be cooked targeted by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the change of control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is such that this cannot be increased or decreased during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 56, after the cooking step 2 (P4), a predetermined time (default time) specified by the control program is set without setting the microwave heating control condition (for example, heating time). There are two types, one is to automatically end the cooking process at the elapsed stage, and the other is to end at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Further, once the cooking step 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 have been completed. Therefore, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set a control menu such as "range manual", and additional cooking is performed, as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2. You can also do. If the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 plans to have the cooking step 3 after the cooking step 2, the process proceeds to the cooking step 3 after the transition period TR after the cooking step 2.

As shown in FIG. 56, in this cooperative cooking mode KM3, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating source 9 is used, so that the right heating unit is used during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking step 2 (P4). The use of 17HR is not restricted in any way. Therefore, during the period of these cooking steps 1 and 2, another cooking can be performed in parallel with the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right side) 40R may be used to perform, for example, "water heating" in the IH control menu on the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 56 is slightly modified.
As shown in FIG. 57, the start time at which the heating source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) is restricted in operation during the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, that is, the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP). Then, the left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be input-operated, and cooking of the IH control menu (for example, "boiler") can be selected by the independent cooking mode KM1.

That is, in this preparation period P1, a new input operation (independent cooking mode KM1) by the left operation unit 40L is possible.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. This point is different from that of FIG. 56. All input keys of the left operation unit 40L may be invalidated. The meaning of "invalidation" in FIG. 57 is the same as that described in FIG. 56.

Next, the basic operations of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the linked cooking mode to the transition in chronological order. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in chronological order. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 63 is a flowchart 1 showing a notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 64 is a flowchart 2 showing a notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL and the cooking step 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4).
In FIG. 58, when the input function of the main input key is effective and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is shown by a white rectangular frame. Not all input keys are drawn.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are effective. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating unit 17HL, the cooking step 1 is executed in the left heating unit 17HL.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the control conditions such as the heating power and the heating time are automatically displayed by the default setting, it is not always necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the cooking period P2 is entered, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are invalidated (actually, even if the input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, the integrated control is performed. Ignored by device MC).

In FIG. 58, the input function of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is shown by a broken line frame.

When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the induction heating operation is stopped at this stage and the cooking period P2 ends.

Next, the heating rest period P3 is entered. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, all the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are enabled (each input key is shown by a solid line frame).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, since the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all effectively maintained, the left heating unit 17HL is separated in the transition period TR or the cooking period P4. May be used for cooking (in this case, the control menu will be selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches the input keys 43M1 or 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. Then, by pressing the input key 43MT, the cooking step 2 can be completed at an arbitrary timing.

The cooking step 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has elapsed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2 regardless of whether the user terminates the cooking step arbitrarily or automatically.

Therefore, if it is desired to perform additional heating in the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 again in the heating chamber 113 immediately after the end of the cooking step 2, the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are input. The key 43MS may be operated to cook the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooperative cooking mode is used. It may be a process of giving guidance to be handled as a part of KM3 and waiting for user input (operation of input key 43MS).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user takes out the object to be cooked from the heating chamber 113, checks the degree of baking, etc., and if the heating is insufficient, immediately returns it to the heating chamber 113, and the user A method of touching the input key MS waiting for an additional operation can be adopted. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

FIG. 59 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59, the operation procedure until the transition to the combined cooking mode KM2 basically requires four inputs. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. Then, in the case of shifting to the combined cooking mode KM2, it is necessary to operate the input key 43R1 or 43L1 in order to actually operate the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 59. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

In the case of shifting to the linked cooking mode KM3 as described above, the user can operate the right heating unit 17HR first after operating the input key 43M2 in the central operation unit 40M by operating the input key 43R1 in the right operation unit 40R. do.

Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is selected to be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation unit corresponding to the heating source can command the start of the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can be performed with the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the position of the operation unit or the input key when the heating starts and ends.

Next, FIG. 60 will be described.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes in the cooperative cooking mode on the horizontal axis and the vertical axis showing the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

FIG. 60 shows a process until the cooking operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started.
In the item A on the left side of FIG. 60, the "user operation" indicates various input operations in the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, A1 to A5 are performed five times.

"Pressing the relay button" of A1 means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The "menu selection" of A2 is to select one desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

The "heating source selection" of A3 is an operation of selecting either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected is shown.
"Pressing the start button" of A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the input button of the right IH" of A5 means operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

In the item B on the left side of FIG. 60, the “cooking process” indicates the type of process until the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
“Cooking mode selected” in B1 indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program of the linked cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the object to be cooked.
“Waiting for grill heating source” in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is waiting. “During heating” of B3 indicates an induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In the item C on the left side of FIG. 60, the “left IH display unit” refers to the left side display unit 31L.
"Turning off (no operation is accepted)" of C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. As described above, the user is operating the input while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60). It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left side display unit 31 is not activated as part of setting the left heating unit 17HL to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function in the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

“Turning off (accepting normal operation)” in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, at the stage after the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60), the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP is completed. Therefore, it has been confirmed that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, it is not necessary to put the left heating unit 17HL in the "occupied state". For this reason, the input function in the left operation unit 40L can be accepted at this stage. If the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is actually pressed, the control menu (for example, "water heater") of the independent cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected.

In the item D on the left side of FIG. 60, the “right IH display unit” refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
"Turning off (no operation is accepted)" of D1 means that no information is displayed on the right side display unit 31R.
As described above, the user is operating the input while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60). It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right side display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, at the stage after the time point of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 60), the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after it is confirmed that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, it is a stage of waiting for the start command of the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means that the information on the preheating state is displayed on the right side display unit 31R. For example, displaying information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (eg, 180 ° C.) is reached.

In the item E on the left side of FIG. 60, the "center display unit" refers to the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 88).
The "menu change" of E2 means that the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target cooked object from the linked cooking modes and select the corresponding linked cooking mode (FIG. 89). reference).

The "selective heating source change (selecting the right IH)" of E3 means selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made by the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 89). ).

The "right IH input button pressing guidance display" of E4 is an operation of the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation unit 40R in order to start cooperative cooking on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. It is meant to indicate that it is necessary. That is, it is recommended that the user press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking (see FIG. 90 (A)).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the integrated display unit (center display unit) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP (additional information 331). (See FIG. 90 (B)).

In the item F on the left side of FIG. 60, the “notification means” refers to the notification content notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
As shown in F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are performed.
The content of the F1 notification is, for example, "It's a hamburger steak. After cooking with IH, finish it with a microwave oven." That is, even on the first specific screen 30SP, the object to be cooked is displayed and the cooking process is displayed, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the F2 notification is, for example, "Karaage. Cook on a microwave oven and then finish with IH." That is, according to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the cooperative cooking mode selection and the explanation of the cooking process are given in real time.

The notification content of F3 is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR by the operation A3, the result of selecting the heating source is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "press the input button of the right IH to start heating". That is, the user is requested to operate the start button (input key 43MS) A4 after the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, the operation of the "input key" in the right operation unit 40L is requested. The input key referred to here is the input key 43R1.

The content of the notification of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180 ° C.".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started so that the temperature of the object to be heated such as a pot placed on the top plate 15 becomes the target temperature of 180 ° C. The preheating operation is started and this fact is notified.

In the item G on the left side of FIG. 60, the “left IH drive unit” is the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In the item H on the left side of FIG. 60, the “right IH drive unit” is the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven to perform the operation of the preheating process.

In item J on the left side of FIG. 60, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source. Refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of 189. That is, the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is comprehensively shown.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61 shows a case where the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Similar to FIG. 60, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis is an explanatory diagram showing the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

The meanings of the items A to J on the left side of FIG. 61 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 60.
In FIG. 61, the operation content of A11 is that, in order to cook the hamburger steak, the right heating unit 17HR is first selected as the cooking process 1 (corresponding part of the cooking process B11 in FIG. 61), and the input key 43R1 is pressed. be.

The "IH off / on button press" of A12 means that the user first selects the right heating unit 17HR as an input switch and presses the input key 43R1 in order to end the cooking process 1 of the hamburger steak.

"Opening the grill door" of A13 is an operation of opening the door 114 by the user.
"Pressing the start button" of A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the time button" of A15 means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

“Pressing the start button” of A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the cancel button (cancelling in the middle of grill heating)" of A17 means pressing the oven heating source 188.
"Pressing the cancel button" of A18 means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the linked cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the linked cooking mode).

In item B (cooking step) of FIG. 61, the “IH heating step” of B11 indicates an induction heating step in the right heating portion 17HR selected by the user.
The “grill heating standby step” of B12 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user operation A14 is performed.
The "grill heating step" of B13 indicates a heating step by an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189.

The "grill heating extension waiting process" of B14 indicates a waiting period in which the user is waiting for a determination as to whether or not to order the extension process after the grill heating process of B13 is once completed.
The "extended heating process" of B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (energized) because the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extension standby process of B14. This is the process to be performed. The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 61, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button is pressed" on the A18, the linked cooking mode is canceled at the time of operating the input key 43MT. Therefore, in order to cook again in the heating chamber 113, the oven heating source 188 is used. And the microwave heating source 189 needs to be operated in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display unit) of FIG. 61, the “preheating display” of C11 is to display the target preheating temperature in the preheating process on the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L (FIG. 80, FIG. 83). For example, the target preheating temperature (eg 180 ° C.) is displayed.

C11a to C11d indicate progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, the progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and the "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". This "appropriate temperature" means that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the target preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). During the period of the preheating display (C11), the progress display 1 to the progress display 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress (temperature rise) of the preheating. In FIG. 61, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is performed on the left side display unit 31L.

The “cooking step” of C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HR is cooking the object to be heated N after reaching the target preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). That is, it indicates that the cooking process 1 has started.

Item E (center display unit) in FIG. 61 shows the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating unit 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 90).

In FIG. 61, the “IH heating display” of E12 indicates that the preheating is completed and the left heating unit 17HL is ready for heating (see FIG. 91). That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the cooking step 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening / closing operation guidance display" of E13 is to urge the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber (heating chamber) 113 (where the cooking step 2 is performed) because the induction heating (cooking step 1) has been completed. Yes (see Figure 93). One example of the additional information 331 in this scene is the indication "Please put the food in the heating chamber".

As shown in FIG. 92, if the user wants to stop the heating operation at an arbitrary timing during induction heating cooking by the left IH coil 17HL, the additional information "Please press the left IH turn-off button". 331 may be displayed.

In FIG. 61, the “alternate display of thermal power change display and start induction display” of E14 indicates that the thermal power in the range grill cooking (composite heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, in such a heating chamber. It indicates that the grill cooking can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 94).

In FIG. 61, the “grill heating indication” of E15 means that the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 (cooking step). 2) is shown (see FIG. 95). In the first embodiment, a method is adopted in which both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven, and the object to be cooked is simultaneously heated from the inside and the outside by the synergistic effect of the microwave and the radiant heat.

In FIG. 61, "alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" of E16 means that since the grill heating step B13 has been completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again. It is to be displayed (see FIG. 96).

Further, when the user does not want the extended heating, he / she can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to display that the linked cooking mode can be ended without the extended heating (see FIG. 96). These two types of information are alternately displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 is to extend the cooking time with the input key 43M2 and display the result of setting the extension time when the grill is heated again (see FIG. 97). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 61, the notification content of F11 is "start preheating of the pot at 180 ° C.". This is to notify by voice that the preheating step has been started by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating step B11.

In FIG. 61, the notification content of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Start cooking." It notifies that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), and prompts the heating start operation in the right operating unit 40R.

FA1 in FIG. 61 is a notification of the first reference information. This "first reference information" FA1 is referred to as "reference information 1" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 1".

The notification of the reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 1 (G12 in FIG. 61) by the left IH coil 17L is started. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 63.

In FIG. 61, the content of the notification of F13 is "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator." This is to call attention to the fact that the cooking step 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR is completed, so that the food is moved to the heating chamber 113 for the cooking step 2 and the top plate 15 and the like are hot. be.

The content of the notification of F14 is "Start heating the range grill with the start button". This informs that the range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The content of the F15 notification is "Starting the range grill finish standard". This informs that the cooking step 2 of the microwave oven is started to complete the cooking (for example, hamburger steak). In addition, "starting the standard" means that the heating power at the time of cooking the microwave oven is "standard".

FA2 in FIG. 61 is a notification of the second reference information. This "second reference information" FA2 is referred to as "reference information 2" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 2".

Reference information 2 (FA2) is notified by setting a predetermined elapsed time (second elapsed time TN2) from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 61) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started. It will be done when it has passed. Alternatively, it is performed when the predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) is exceeded from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 61) is started. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 63.

The notification content of F16 is to notify that the cooking of the range grill is completed and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also notifies that if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, the series of cooperative cooking modes KM3 is terminated without extended heating. Further, since the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature, caution is advised to clean the inside of the chamber after it has cooled down.

The notification content of F17 is to notify that the user performs an extended heating operation after the cooking process (B13) of the microwave oven is completed, and further starts heating for 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further commands the extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 61, G11 shows an induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows an induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 performed following the preheating step.

In item J (range grill driving unit) of FIG. 61, J11 shows a period in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking step 2 is executed in this period.
J12 indicates a period of driving the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "karaage", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
Similar to FIGS. 60 and 61, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis shows the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

In FIG. 62, the operation content of item A (user's operation) A21 is to first select the left heating unit 17HL as the preheating step and press the input key 43L1 in order to cook the fried chicken (FIG. 62). See G21).

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) in the left heating unit 17HL has already started.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button", and pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By this operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. The "range grill drive unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating section 17HL is completed, the grill heating step B23 of the "range grill driving section" in the heating chamber 113 is started.
In this way, even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately. Therefore, considering the time required for raising the temperature, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is taken into consideration. Has been decided.

The operation of A24 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the “range grill driving unit” is completed. As a result, the food to be cooked can be taken out from the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, from the time before the door 114 is opened and the cooked food (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the fried chicken cooking utensil (heated food N such as a special pot) is heated in the left heating unit 17HL (cooking step G22). And the cooking oil is being heated (preheating process has been started).

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M2, which is called a time button, in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill drive unit" again.
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS in order to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to end the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. As a result, the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 in order to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 62, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is a preheating step using the induction heating source 9, and is a step of preheating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is a cooking step 2 in which heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating step.

Next, in FIG. 62, item C (left IH display unit) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays of C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of the display C21, C21a is a progress display 1, C21b is a progress display 2, C21c is a progress display 3, and C21d is a progress display 4.
The display of C22 is a display of the completion (cooking process) of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 62, item E (center display unit) will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the preheating operation is performed by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 98 (A)).
E22 is a grill door opening / closing operation guidance display, and prompts the user to put the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 in order to open the door 114 and perform the grill heating step B23 (FIG. 98 (B). )reference).

E23 is an alternating display of the heat power change display and the start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", the heat power can be adjusted and cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS. It shows what can be done (see FIG. 99 (A)).

E24 is a microwave oven heating display, which can change the heating power of cooking when driving the "microwave oven drive unit", and displays the remaining time until the end of cooking after the start of cooking (FIG. 100). reference).
As shown in FIGS. 101 (A) and 101 (B), E25 is an alternate display of the extension operation guide display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking step B24 that drives the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to indicate that the cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it is displayed that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed. That is, these two types of information are alternately displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking step B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit", is performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 102).
..

In FIG. 62, item F (notifying means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the target preheating temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, for example, "Start preheating of the pot at 180 ° C.".
The F22 notification says, "Soon the temperature will be set by the IH on the left. Please put the food in the refrigerator." Notifying that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), while urging food or the like to be put into the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. Is.

The notification of F23 is that "the start button starts heating the microwave oven". That is, the input key 43MS is pressed to notify that the range grill cooking is started.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "starting range and finish standard". The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 62 is a notification of the third reference information. This "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 3".

The notification of the reference information 3 is a predetermined time (third) from the time when the cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 62) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A23 in FIG. 62). It is performed when the elapsed time TN3) has elapsed. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The notification of F25 is related to the operation of the user when the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Please take out the food from the refrigerator and start cooking with IH."

The notification of F26 is to notify that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given. This means that since the extension time was set to 2 minutes, cooking of the microwave oven will be started for 2 minutes from now on.

FA5 in FIG. 62 is a notification of the fifth reference information. This "fifth reference information" FA5 is referred to as "reference information 5" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 5".

The notification of the reference information 5 is a predetermined time (fifth) from the time when the cooking step 3 (B23 in FIG. 62) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 62). It is performed when the time TN5) has elapsed. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 62, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating step of G21 is a preheating step by the left heating unit 17HL, and shows the driving period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 62, G22 also shows a heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) period for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive unit), the heating step of J21 indicates a drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Since the linked cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 61 is for cooking “karaage”, it is actually sufficient to drive only the microwave heating source 189.

Next, FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described.
FIGS. 63 to 65 show a process in which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 63 shows a case where the hamburger is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 61.
In the first embodiment, the hamburger steaks the cooking step 1 in, for example, the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, in the cooking step 2, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used in combination.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking step 1) is started in the object N to be heated which has already been heated to the preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) in the left heating unit 17HL, and as described in FIG. The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking. " The "set temperature" is a preheating temperature set by the user. The default value is 180 ° C. Further, this cooking step 1 is not started from the time when the IH coil 17L starts the induction heating. The time when the food to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) is placed on the food to be heated N which has reached the preheating temperature and the heating is started is the start time.

In the next step SA2, the measurement of the elapsed time of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In step SA3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded.
When baking a hamburger, the amount (weight) of the hamburger, the time to bake, and the amount of heat to bake are important. Assuming that the standard time is "7 minutes", the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

When the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know a guideline for the timing of turning the hamburger upside down (turning over) in the middle, in the above example, the user can set the timing of the upside down by the notification FA1 at the time when 5 minutes have passed. You can know. The actual content of the notification is, for example, "5 minutes have passed since the start of heating. The heating is scheduled to be completed in 2 minutes."

In the case of other cooperative cooking modes, for example, it is possible to know the timing of adding water, seasonings, and cooking liquid on the way.

When the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded, step SA3 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step SA4, and the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1 is notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed by the left side display unit 31L.

After this step SA4, it is determined whether or not the user stops the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if there is a stop command, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As explained with reference to FIG. 61, a voice notification F13 is performed to the effect that "the pot is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator".

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, the metal pot used for induction heating is not used. Instead, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a special saucer 145 (not shown) is used. Put the hamburger in such tableware or saucer and place it in the heating chamber 113.

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is in the closed state, in the next step SA7, as described in FIG. 61, "the start button starts heating the range grill. The voice notification F14 to the effect is performed.

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes “Yes”, and range grill cooking is started as the cooking step 2.
As described with reference to FIG. 61, the voice notification F15 with the content of "starting the range grill finish standard" is performed (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189, which is the heating source of the range grill, is driven by standard thermal power. For example, as described above, the operation is started with an output of 500 W.
Further, the upper heater 163A of the oven heating source 188, which is the heating source of the range grill, is energized at 1000 W.

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time point of the step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, and the second reference information (reference information 2) is notified by the voice synthesizer 95. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 2 (FA2) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

The content of the notification of the reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 2 is started. If the standard time of cooking step 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, if the elapsed time TN2 is set to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the end of cooking step 2 is completed 30 seconds before the end of cooking step 2. I can know.

Generally, it is said that when the food is heated to some extent, the degree of heating of the food rapidly progresses. In particular, if you are not accustomed to cooking using the ingredients, there is a concern that overheating will occur. Therefore, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified at a time point before the end of the cooking step 1.

Similarly, in the cooking step 2, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified at a time point before the end of the cooking step 2. Therefore, it is possible to urge the user to finish cooking and to pay attention to and prepare for the next process.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After that, the notification of F16 shown in FIG. 61 is performed. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). Further, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, all the cooking processes of the "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking mode are completed.

Next, FIG. 64 will be described.
In FIG. 64, “karaage” is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the cooking step 1 is performed in the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu). The cooking step 2 is a case where, for example, the left heating unit 17HL is used.

Further, in the example of FIG. 64, there is also a cooking step 3, and the step is performed by the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu).
FIG. 64 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 62.

As described with reference to FIG. 62, when the cooking step 1 is started (A23), for example, the voice notification F24 "start the range and finish standard" is performed. The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level. For example, the heating operation is started by the microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the object to be cooked is measured. That is, the measurement of the rising temperature TN3 of the chicken, which is the source of "karaage", is started.
The measurement of the temperature TN3 is performed by the temperature detection circuit 93.

In the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When chicken meat, which is a food material for "karaage", is heated with microwaves, the temperature rises. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the measurement result of this temperature reaches the predetermined rise temperature TN3.

The rate of increase in temperature TN3 changes depending on the amount (weight) of fried chicken, the baking time, and the amount of heat. The temperature rise pattern when a predetermined amount (for example, 300 g) of "karaage" material is cooked with standard heating power (for example, microwave with an output of 500 W) is determined by the integrated control device MC as control data based on the results of prior experiments. I have it.

That is, the integrated control device MC has data that when finishing with a standard microwave output (500 W), it is better to rise to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the user is notified when the temperature rises to the rising temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can know in advance by the voice notification of the reference information 3 (FA3) that the timing to end the fried chicken (microwave) heating is approaching. In synchronization with this, it can also be known by the reference display 3 of the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to overcooking time). The user may stop the operation in the middle. For example, in the case of a control program in which the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130 one minute after the temperature rises to the rising temperature TN3, the rising temperature is reached. The heating operation may be arbitrarily stopped 1 minute before the notification of the reference information 3 that the temperature has risen to TN3.

After that, the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 using the induction heating unit 17H. For this purpose, the user needs to move the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

In FIG. 64, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in the cooking step 2. This is determined by the elapsed time TN4 or the rising temperature TN4 from the time when the user places the cooked object on the heated object N which has become hot due to the preheating after the preheating is completed in the induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation on the input operation unit 40. It simply moves the food to be cooked. Therefore, as the starting point of the elapsed time TN4, the information in which the timing at which the temperature of the object to be heated N has decreased is detected is adopted. Since the temperature of the object to be heated N drops sharply once the object to be cooked is placed and charged, the time point may be detected by the temperature detection circuit 93 and the elapsed time from this detection time may be counted.

Subsequent step SB8 is a scene for determining a command for performing the cooking step 3 in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking step 2 is completed. The user performs the operation of A26 shown in FIG. 62. For that purpose, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before this step SB7, it is necessary for the user to return the object to be cooked, which has been subjected to induction heating (cooking step 2) on the top plate 15, to the heating chamber 113 again. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

In the next step SB9, the cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification of F26 notifies that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given.

In the next step SB10, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start time of the cooking step 3 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In the next step SB11, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN5 has been exceeded.
If, for example, the cooking of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to be performed for 2 minutes at the stage before the start of the cooking step 3 (the stage before the step SB8), the elapsed time is For example, it is set to 1 minute and 30 seconds. In other words, it is set 30 seconds before the cooking step 3 is completed.

If the elapsed time TN5 is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, the reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 is provided with guidance such as, for example, "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time." Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking step 3 is automatically stopped.
Further, the notification of F25 shown in FIG. 62 is also performed. This notification is related to the user's operation when the cooking of the microwave oven is finished. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Please take out the food from the refrigerator." To stop the cooking process 3, the door 114 may be opened without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, FIG. 65 will be described.
FIG. 65 shows an operation step when "karaage" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. FIG. 65 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 62 and 64.
In FIG. 65, # 1 to # 9 show the user's operation and the state change of the cooking cooker 1. Other reference numerals correspond to FIGS. 62 and 64.

In FIG. 65, in order for the user to cook “karaage”, the left heating unit 17HL is first selected and the input key 43L1 is pressed before starting the cooking step 1 (operation A21 in FIG. 62). Then, the preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is started. The object N to be heated in this case is a metal pan for tempura, and contains a certain amount or more of cooking oil.

On the other hand, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and puts the “karaage” ingredients (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 113 (# 1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and the cooking step 1 of the microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64 (SB4 in FIG. 64).

Further, during this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is completed (for example, the heated unit N is in a state of being heated to 180 ° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of this preheating is notified to the user by voice, characters, etc. by the notification unit AN (# 2).

The user can stop the microwave heating cooking at an arbitrary timing in the middle of the cooking step 1. The door 114 may be opened to stop. If the input key 40MT of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the selection of "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.

When the door 114 is opened, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking step 1 is completed (# 3).
Next, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the preheated object N, which is in turn on the top plate 15 (# 4).

Then, the cooking step 2 is started in the left heating unit 17HL (# 5).
In the cooking step 2, since the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed at the beginning before the preheating is started, the start command of the induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC at that time. Sent.

At the start of the cooking step 2 (# 5), the user does not need to particularly operate the input operation unit 40.
The time when the object to be cooked is placed on the actually preheated object N to be heated is the time point at which the cooking step 2 is started.
The end of the cooking step 2 can be ended at an arbitrary timing if the user operates the left operation unit 40L.

The user then moves the object to be cooked again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (# 6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start the cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
Reference information 5 (reference information 5) when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 61). FA5) is notified.

The reference information 5 (FA5) is information including a guide such as "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time". Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking step 3 is completed (# 7). The cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately when the user opens the door 114.
Then, after this, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N which is preheated on the top plate 15 (# 8). In this case, since the object N to be heated is maintained in a state of being heated by the induction heating, the induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (# 9). In this case, if the object to be heated N has already been preheated, it is sufficient to simply move the object to be cooked to the object to be heated N on the top plate 15.

Induction heating cooking can be completed by operating the left operation unit 40L. That is, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 65, the time required from the start of the heating operation (start of the preheating step) of the induction heating source 9 to the end of the cooking step 1 can be shortened.
That is, without waiting for the completion of the preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of the preheating, the food material (the object to be cooked) is put into the heating chamber 113 and the cooking step 1 is started before that.

Since the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the cooking step 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred into the food to be heated N on the top plate 15 immediately after the cooking step 1 is completed, and the cooking step is completed. 2 can be started.

It should be noted that the cooking step 3 and the cooking step 4 are not always required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user, the necessary cooking process may be completed.

Further, in FIG. 65, the “left IH coil drive period” continues even after the cooking step 2 is completed, but when the induction heating source 9 is not used after the cooking step 2 is completed. May stop driving the left IH coil 17L by the left operation unit 40L at any time after the cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, when the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating again before the cooking step 4.

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
FIG. 66 shows an operation step when "karaage" is performed as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as in FIG. 65. FIG. 66 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 62 and 64.
In FIG. 66, # 1 to # 9 show the user's operation and the state change of the cooking cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG. 65. Other reference numerals correspond to FIGS. 62 and 64.

The difference between FIG. 66 and FIG. 65 will be described.
FIG. 66 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after the completion of preheating of the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9 and the notification (# 2) thereof.

When the user is notified by the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L and 31R that the preheating of the object N to be heated by the induction heating source 9 is completed, and is notified by voice by the voice synthesizer 95, the heating chamber The door 114 of 113 is opened, and the ingredients of "karaage" (seasoned chicken, etc.) are put into the heating chamber 113 (# 1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and the cooking step 1 of the microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 64 (SB4 in FIG. 64). After that, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 65.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 66, the time required from the start of the heating operation (start of the preheating step) of the induction heating source 9 to the end time of the cooking step 1 is longer than that in FIG. 65.
However, since the food material (the object to be cooked) is started to be heated in the heating chamber 113 after waiting for the completion of the preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of the preheating thereof, the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113 is completed. If the cooked food is moved, there is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

In FIG. 66, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after the cooking step 2 is completed, but when the induction heating source 9 is not used after the cooking step 2 is completed. May stop driving the left IH coil 17L by the left operation unit 40L at any time after the cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 66, when the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating again before the cooking step 4.

In FIGS. 66 and 67, the induction heating source 9 is first energized to start the preheating operation, while the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113.
The "coordinated preheating cooking mode" of the first embodiment is not limited to the cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber as described above.

In the other cooperative preheating cooking mode, the induction heating source 9 is first energized, the object N to be heated such as a frying pan is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), and the target temperature is reached. This is a method in which the food to be cooked is placed on the food to be heated N, and the cooking step 1 is started by this. After this preheating step, the food to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 113 while being placed on the food to be heated N, and the food to be cooked is moved together with the food to be heated N in the heating chamber 113. Cooking step 2 may be executed by heating with a microwave heating source 189 or an oven heating source 188.

Next, FIGS. 67 to 69 will be described.
FIG. 67 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 68 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and the determination result.

FIG. 67 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have been described with reference to FIG. 38, they will be briefly described.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines the presence or absence of an abnormality. The integrated control device MC also diagnoses the presence or absence of abnormalities in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not a setting command has been received from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.
In this step ST4, the standby initial screens (display screens 1, 2A, 2B) are displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 46).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key other than the input key 43MC (for example, 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, the step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage state of the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
The permission condition and the determination result will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 69.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, it is determined whether or not individual cooking is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which is an individual operation unit, and the combined cooking mode KM2 is set by the central operation unit 40M. Determine if selected.

When the input key 43MC is first operated within a certain grace time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" is started as described above.
On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touch-operated, the step STC is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 67, steps STR1 and STR2 are “operation steps A” of “permission conditions” that determine whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step of determining "permission condition 1".
Here, "permit condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more.
(2) If there is a power reduction command signal received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more.
If these two are satisfied, step STR1 is determined to be "Yes".

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) When the central heating unit is provided in the induction heating source 9, the central heating unit is not in the heating operation.
(2) One or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in the heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating portion nor the left heating portion of the induction heating source 9 is in the heating operation (or only one is in the heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 is determined to be "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 68).
If "No" is determined in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning defined in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" as "5000 W or more" will be described. For the sake of simplicity, the following description does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heating source, for example, the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing the amount of power demand) required when implementing the linked cooking mode KM3 is 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power during operation of each heating source when the linked cooking mode is executed is as follows. Because it is a street.
(1) During range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) When operating the oven: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 10)
00W)
(3) When the range grill is operating: 1500 W (microwave heating source 189: 500 W, upper heater: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power of the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 1500 W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate at the same time.
That is, the total maximum power of the microwave heating source 189 "1000W", the oven heating source 188 "1000W (2000W is 1000W each, alternating energization)" and the induction heating source 9 "1500W". Will be 3500W.

When the demand (pre-securing of power demand) is 5000W:
When heating 3000 W (normal heating) with the right heating unit 17HR, the rest of the demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed from this state, the remaining demand is 1500 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for the cooperative cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR is reduced to 1500 W (from 3000 W) and the cooperative cooking is started. can do.

When the demand (pre-securing of power demand) is 4000W:
When fried food (maximum 1500W is required) in the right heating unit 17HR, the rest of the demand is 2500W.
When cooperative cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so it is necessary to reduce the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR. However, if the heating power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, the cooking will not be successful, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
After all, at 4000W, it is not possible to secure the required thermal power for the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) required for the cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand (preliminary securing of power demand) of 5000 W, which is the total value.

Next, FIG. 68 will be described.
In the cooperative cooking mode of the first embodiment, a pattern (first cooperative cooking mode) in which the induction heating source 9 is first driven and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (see FIG. 55). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in the reverse order.

The step of FIG. 68 is common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and information on the cooperative cooking mode is displayed (this step may be referred to as "operation step B" below). As shown in FIG. 54, in order to select the cooking menu of each cooperative cooking mode, the “name of the object to be cooked” (for example, “hamburger”) 330 is displayed as one kind of identification information.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 54, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is sequentially moved upward or downward. The display changes as it moves. In the first embodiment, since there are eight types of food to be cooked in total, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once in the state of FIG. 54, the identification information 330 is changed from "hamburger" to "gratin". Switch to.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting any one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed in the first specific screen. When the user operates a pair of left and right input keys 43M1, one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set by default so that the heating unit specifying unit 333R is displayed first on the first specific screen 30SP and proceeds to step STR7 as it is. In the example described with reference to FIG. 54, when hamburger steak is performed by cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default, and the heating unit specifying unit 333L preferentially selects the left heating unit 17HL. It was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the linked cooking mode has been performed. When the input key 43MT is operated, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 70).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT is not operated, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
When the input key 43MS is operated, the process proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “operation step C”), the finally selected heating unit (for example, the right heating unit 17HR) or the output during microwave heating in the first specific screen 30SP. A control condition such as a value of 500 W is displayed, the process proceeds to the next step STR9, and the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode from this stage. That is, after that, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is automatically performed.

As the display content of the first specific screen 30SP of step STR8 (operation step C), the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking step 1, and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking step 2. Process information such as that is displayed on the process display unit 332. The contents and transition of these display screens will be described in detail later.

When the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode, the induction heating cooking is started from the time when the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. It should be noted that the induction heating is not started immediately as described in FIG. 39. From step STR9 onward is step MS4 shown in FIG. 39.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, it is determined as "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed from the time when the input key 43MC is operated, but the circuit is patrolling between steps STR3 and STR7, the main power is automatically turned off or the step is described. You may return to ST4 (see FIG. 67).

Next, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIG. 69 shows the determination process of steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 67.
Step STX1 is a stage in which the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC investigates the latest state of the cooking device with respect to the above-mentioned permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

Next, step STX3 in FIG. 69 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 67. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 with the latest state of the cooking cooker, and determines whether the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied. ..

In step STX3 of FIG. 69, the notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
Further, the display 1 to the display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It should be noted that the displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 (operation step B) in FIG. 68, and are integrated displays in which the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is displayed in the unit 30. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the premise (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is satisfied.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
The control mode of FIG. 70 is a case of a (second) cooperative cooking mode different from the (first) cooperative cooking mode of FIG. 68. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode of FIG. 70, the first used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second heating source used is the left heating of the induction heating source 9. Part 17HL. The part where the control mode of FIG. 70 is significantly different from that of FIG. 68 is step STR11.

In the above-mentioned "warm" (microwave oven automatic) of the range grill cooking (composite cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the "target temperature" is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the heat during cooking previously performed remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" here is 80 ° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70 ° C.), the temperature measuring unit 158 detects the high temperature at an early stage, and the microwave is incompletely cooked. There is a concern that heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 70, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time. Display (STR12). Further, it may be displayed by the integrated display unit 30. Further, it is more reliable to notify by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. The reason why the left and right display units 31L and 31R are displayed is that the user has not yet selected any of the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

Further, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, in addition to being displayed by the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L, it is also displayed. Alternatively, instead, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 67 and 69, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is possible. Can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, at the selection stage of the cooperative cooking mode, it is possible to notify the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used.

In addition, at the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, if the door 114 is opened, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops quickly, which is beneficial to the user side. You may also convey the information together.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode.
In the first embodiment of FIG. 71, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode is, as described with reference to FIG. 60, first the right heating portion 17HR of the induction heating source 9, and then used. The heating sources are a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode has already advanced to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating unit 17HL for another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, it is determined that the use does not exceed, for example, the total power regulation value of 5000 W, as in the above-mentioned “permission condition 1”.

When the determination of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and the maximum amount of electric power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the heating source (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during cooperative cooking. For example, the maximum thermal power value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the total value with the electric energy does not exceed the regulation value of the power control unit 72, and the limit value is notified to the user by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, when the electric power used in the left heating unit 17HL (heat power of induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heating source in which the cooking of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed also exceeds the allowable total electric energy. In step SH8, the left heating unit 17HL is disallowed. Specifically, the left side display unit 31L displays that the device cannot be used, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

In the next step SH3, the input operation result of the user is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the "permission control menu" does not correspond to the prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as "prohibition control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of electric power used (required for cooking). For example, "(automatic) fried food" described in FIG. 45 and rice cooking 2 Is specified.
Both (automatic) fried food and rice cooking adopt a control method that is expected to use a large amount of electric power in the cooking process, so in order to secure that electric power, the heating source during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 There is a concern that the power supply of (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) may be hindered.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, it is determined whether or not the "permission control menu" is applicable. For example, one of the permitted control menus, "water heater", is checked.

In step SH3, when it is determined that the "permission control menu" does not apply, the above-mentioned disapproval process is performed and notification that the device cannot be used is performed.

When the determination of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 is automatically determined. The value etc. are determined. After that, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and the induction heating cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the end of cooking by voice (SH7).

If a change can be made to the permitted conditions (for example, lowering the thermal power), the step SH8 makes the change and notifies the change.
In addition, if there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL to be used cannot be permitted to use, a notification of disapproval is given. Then, if the change processing can be performed, the process returns to step SH2.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed at the stage where the heating of the heating source used for the first time is completed in the cooking process of one cooperative cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 72 is in the case of cooking in which the second used microwave heating source 189 is driven for a time (for example, 5 minutes) set by the user in the cooperative cooking mode. For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 72, the heating source used in the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR which is set by default as described with reference to FIG. 68. The heating sources used in the next cooking step 2 are a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

In FIG. 72, a scene in which the user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform the cooking step 2 in the one cooperative cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 68 will be described.
When the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next after the cooking step 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the drive of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and the measurement of the set time of the timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating is the default value (500W), but the user can also operate the central operation unit 40M to change the heating power (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188 are energized by the heating chamber control unit 159.
In the first embodiment, the start of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B coincides with the start of the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized during the oscillation of the magnetron 122. In other words, the object to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electric radiant heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. Therefore, in the following description, only the microwave heating time will be described, and the heating of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be described. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the drive of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the heating stop is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeatedly performed within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is performed so that the user can determine whether or not to execute the once stopped microwave cooking for a predetermined time or a time specified by the user. Specifically, it is displayed in characters on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Do you want to extend the time to heat? If you want to extend the time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the object to be cooked, it will be heated quickly (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation type). This is to restart the heating) and finish the food to be cooked in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal is present, and if there is an operation signal, the determination of "Yes" is performed.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended for 3 minutes. You may set the program so that if you press it twice in a row, it will take 5 minutes. Further, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press the input key 43MS within the "holding time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 and the operation of the final cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed. do. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays to that effect, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC sets the control conditions in which the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operate in the storage device MM in chronological order. Automatically memorize (at the time of this memorization, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time).

After that, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the stored linked cooking mode and control conditions immediately before being stored are called from the storage device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the next linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. It has a reproduction function used for the implementation of. It should be noted that not only the one-time cooperative cooking mode immediately before, but all the cooking histories in the past several times or a certain period (for example, one month) are called (including the information on the cooking execution date and time), and the desired one is selected. The user may select the item. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can set various settings for the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the energization of the oven heating source 189 is also started by the start of the RG cooking process, whether or not the integrated display unit 30 is to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. Do not display information about. However, if the sequence is such that the microwave heating source 189 is operated first and then the oven heating source 188 is operated, or vice versa, the microwave heating time is extended and the oven heating source is operated. The time extension of 188 may be set separately.

Next, FIGS. 73 and 74 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

FIG. 73 shows an input step in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular, shows a step of a support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or is lost in the operation.

The step of FIG. 73 is common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30 (step SL1).

On the first specific screen 30SP, identification information 330, 330A, 330B for selecting a cooperative cooking menu is displayed as information on the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 54) (step SL2).

In the next step SL3, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 68, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode moves sequentially upward or downward. The display changes in shape, and the identification information 330 corresponding to another object to be cooked is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In FIG. 73, the step of selecting any one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described with reference to FIG. 54 is not shown.

In the next step SL4, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the linked cooking mode has been performed. When the input key 43MT is operated, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. 70. That is, it returns to the state of the initial standby screen.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT is not operated, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SL5.
Next, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is operated among the input keys in the central operation unit 40M, step SL5 is determined to be "No" and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, the "input key not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3" is, for example, the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Further, the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As described with reference to FIG. 56, since the right heating unit 17HR is occupied when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input key 43MC, the input itself by the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. .. However, it is possible that the user may not be aware of it.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is immediately notified. When the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and controlled by the integrated control device MC so that the presence / absence of touch of the input key of the right operation unit 40R cannot be detected, erroneous operation of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, when the input itself from the input key 43R1 or the like is enabled and the integrated control device MC performs processing that is not regarded as a valid signal, an erroneous operation can be detected.

In step SL11, after notifying that the operation is incorrect, the process proceeds to step SL12. In step 12, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation or the content of the incorrect operation is displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, it is recommended to return to step SL3 and redo the operation.

If there is no erroneous input key operation in step SL5, step SL5 determines "Yes" and proceeds to step SL6.

In step SL6, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. When the operation is performed, the process proceeds to step SL13, and detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Further, at this stage, the outline of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL7 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8 for starting the cooking step 1 according to the program of the cooperative operation. In addition, before the cooking step 1, the preheating step for starting the preheating operation may be started. If the input key 43MS is not operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 74 shows an input step in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular, shows a step of a support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or is lost in the operation.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display unit 30.
Further, on the second specific screen 30SP, a control menu for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed (see FIG. 49) (step SL21).

In the next step SL22, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been further operated. As described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, the specific sentence 30J indicating the name (including abbreviation) of the control menu that can be adopted in the combined cooking mode KM2 by operating the input key 43M1 of the pair of left and right is sequentially upward. Alternatively, the display changes in the form of moving downward, and the specific sentence 30J of another control menu is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SL22, the display of the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "warm" defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL28.
In step SL28, as described above, the specific sentence 30J indicating the name (including abbreviation) of another control menu that can be adopted in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the central portion of the second area 30M, and in the next step SL23. move on.

In the next step SL23, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control condition such as the heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M can be changed to another control condition (see FIG. 52).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL29. In step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the central portion of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

In the next step SL25, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 is operated among the input keys in the central operation unit 40M, it is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, the "input keys not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2" are, for example, the input keys 43KP and 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. Further, the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

In step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is immediately notified. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

In step SL31, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3 that also serves as the guide key has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation or the content of the incorrect operation is displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, it is recommended to return to step SL22 and redo the operation.

If there is no erroneous input key operation in step SL24, step SL24 determines "Yes" and proceeds to step SL25.

In step SL25, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it is operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, and detailed information such as correct operation content is displayed. Further, at this stage, the reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27 for starting the cooking step 1 according to the operation program of the combined cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation unit in linked cooking mode)
Next, FIGS. 75 to 102 will be described.
These figures show the control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 75 is a plan view showing a control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the reference numeral FG is a user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 75, and the three identification information 330, 330A included in the cooperative cooking menu, The 330B corresponds to each of the three items to be cooked, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef". These identification information 330, 330A, 330B are displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 below, the process display unit 332 is not shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330. In the examples of FIGS. 75 and 76, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

The individual light emitting unit 27M6, which is in close proximity to the input key 43MS, is blinking as shown by a broken line circle in FIG. 75, and guides the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source first used in the cooperative cooking mode is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light emitting display units 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG. 75.

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. At that time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, cooking is executed in the left side heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the thermal power display unit 67L indicating the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL lights up (the number of the thermal power display units to be lit is determined by the default value).
Even if the left heating unit 17HL is individually used (regardless of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) while the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, the integrated control device MC can be used to control the left heating unit 17HL. When the operation is prohibited (occupied state), the light emitting display unit 27L3 does not emit light as shown in FIG. 75. Also, the thermal power display unit 67L is not lit.

Further, as described above, even if there is an operation of temporarily using the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during the cooking of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the left heating unit 17HL Cannot be used is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, the message "The left IH cannot be used because the cooking is in cooperation" or "The left IH and the heating chamber cannot be used now because the cooking is in cooperation" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, since the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is located in the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the top plate 15, the user's line of sight naturally shifts to the center. get together. Then, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the guidance display until the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the central portion.

Further, when the cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heating source, is completed, the input key 43MS for advancing to the next heating source is also located in the central operation unit 40M.
That is, the main input operations such as the selection of the cooperative cooking mode, the start of the first cooking process 1, and the start of the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the left and right central parts (central operation part 40M) in front of the heating cooker 1. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 76 will be described.
FIG. 76 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 simultaneously displays the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the cooperative cooking menu, as shown in FIG. 76 (B). (Display screen 8A).

Further, additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 76, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

When the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once more, the food identification information 330 (name "hamburger") displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 moves backward, and instead. The identification information 330B of the "roast beef" displayed in the front is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) is in a fixed order one by one. It will be updated with.

When the input key 43M1 on the right side is pressed, each time the input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 76 (B) is selected in the reverse direction, such as from the display screen 8D to the display screen 8C.
Although only four linked cooking menus are shown in FIG. 76, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screens 30SP.

Next, FIG. 77 will be described.
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of the linked cooking menu when the linked cooking mode of the cooking cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 77, the eight linked cooking menus are sequentially displayed (forward or backward) in the first specific screen 30SP by the operation of the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 78 will be described.
FIG. 78 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
As shown in FIG. 78, there are several types of process display units 332 at the stage immediately before the start of the cooking process, depending on the cooking menu (8 types from hamburger to gratin).

Further, the additional information 331 is unified throughout the cooperative cooking mode as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B. The additional information A and the additional information B are alternately displayed for a certain period of time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Further, in the additional information B, the reason why the heating part of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" is that there are two parts, the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR.

FIG. 79 is a plan view showing the control operation and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left side display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76.
The identification information 330 of the three cooperative cooking modes is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, the identification information 330 of the "hamburger" is displayed at the center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed. The user can select one or the other.

The example of FIG. 79 is a case where the left heating unit 17HL is set by default as recommended. As shown in FIG. 79, the left heating unit selection mark 334L displayed as “left” and white characters is always displayed on the first first specific screen 30SP.

With the pair of left and right input keys 43M2, either one of the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected. For example, if the input key 43M2 on the left side is pressed, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected and changes to white characters as shown in FIG. 79 to indicate that the selection has been made.
On the contrary, if the input key 43M2 on the right side is pressed in the state of FIG. 79, the right heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected.

At the time when the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 54) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 59), the right heating unit 17HR executes the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, it becomes an occupied state. Therefore, the right heating unit 17HR is in a state of not accepting the setting of other control menus (the integrated control device MC).

Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then, induction heating is automatically started. The operation of pressing the input key 44L is omitted, and the induction heating is automatically started in the left heating unit 17HL after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed. You may.
When the heating operation in the left heating unit 17HL is started as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the independent cooking mode on the right operation unit 40R can be started immediately.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR when the left heating unit selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2, but the selection of the heating unit by the input key 43M2 is easy. Since it can be changed, at the time of selecting the left heating unit selection mark 334L, as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is not released.

The "appropriate temperature of 180 ° C." means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N such as a metal pan or a frying pan, which is a container for containing the "hamburger" to be cooked in this case, is 180 ° C. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the thermal power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface portion of the object to be heated N becomes 180 ° C. by the action of the inverter circuit 81L and the temperature detection circuit 93.

Along with the increase in the preheating temperature, the thermal power display unit 67L for indicating the thermal power stage during induction heating cooking does not display the thermal power level, but the degree of increase in the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching the target preheating temperature (approaching). Demonstrates the function of displaying the degree).

In FIG. 79, what is indicated by a broken line circle at the thermal power display unit 67L indicates the current temperature range, and the broken line circle gradually moves to the right as the temperature rises. .. That is, the state of temperature rise can be understood from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG.

The additional information 331 displays "Notify me when the set temperature is reached" as shown in FIG. 79.
On the other hand, the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 is displayed in strip-shaped characters so as to laterally cross the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30.

As can be seen from the display unit 332 of the cooking process in FIG. 79, when the hamburger is cooked in cooperation, the preheating process is first started by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking process 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG). The cooking step 2 for performing heating) is started.

As shown in FIG. 79, until the moment when the cooperative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertip FG and the line of sight are on the right front side of the integrated display unit 30 in order to operate the input key 43MS, in other words, the central operation unit 40M. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight shifts toward the left heating unit 17HL as indicated by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked is placed above the left heating unit 17HL, the user's line of sight moves to the left.

After starting the cooperative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body move from the central part to the left side as shown by a long horizontal arrow in FIG. 79. However, this movement to the left is not a big one, and it does not put a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, and displays changes in the preheating temperature in chronological order.

FIG. 80A shows a portion of the thermal power display unit 67L on the left side. In FIG. 80 (A), what is indicated by the broken line circle indicates the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180 ° C., the four thermal power display units 67L emit light from the beginning of the cooking process of induction heating, as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The leftmost light emitting part is blinking as shown by the broken line circle. This blinking state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-mentioned "blinking part" moves to the right side in sequence. When the preheating temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), at the initial stage when the cooking process of induction heating is started, if any of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L is operated, the target value of the preheating temperature described above can be obtained. Can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), each time the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step. On the contrary, each time the input key 43L3 on the right side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be raised by one step. As shown in FIG. 75 (C), the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left side display unit 31L each time, so that the user can easily confirm the display content.

Next, FIG. 81 will be described.
FIG. 81 is a plan view showing a control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.

When the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL reaches the set preheating temperature, the blinking of the thermal power display unit 67L disappears as shown in FIG. 81.
When the product is heated to the preheating temperature in this way, the integrated display unit 30 displays "preheating has been completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG. 81.

Further, the display content of the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 changes. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" in the next cooking step 1 is displayed in white characters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage of full-scale induction heating has been reached. That is, it can be seen that the temperature of the object to be heated, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

The pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L has a function of designating the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the transition from the preheating process to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched once, the heat value is increased by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can select the firepower you have, or you can select a specific firepower that has been lowered by one level. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the preheating step is completed, the integrated display unit 30 indicates to the user that the cooking step 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking step 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L.

The display switching between (A) and (B) in FIG. 82 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after the cooking step 1 of full-scale induction heating is started, only the display shown in FIG. 82 (C) is displayed. The firepower at this point has been shown to be "slightly weak". It has also been shown that this thermal power level can be adjusted by the user (information 30V indicating microwave output level). The control condition (microwave output) shown by this information 30V may be referred to as "control condition B".

In FIG. 82, the central portion of the second area 30M in which the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as “standard” may be referred to as “display position D” in the following description. This "display position D" is right next to the above-mentioned "display position B". In other words, the "display position B" and the "display position D" have a corresponding positional relationship. The control condition (microwave thermal power level) is displayed in the "display position D" as described above.

Next, FIG. 83 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. The display content of FIG. 82 is slightly changed, and the preheating temperature value (for example, 180 ° C.) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 82 (B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 shows a stage in which the cooking step 1 of induction heating has not yet been started when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
Therefore, in order to encourage the operation of the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle.

Even if the input key 43M1 is operated in the states of FIGS. 82 and 83, the integrated display unit 30 cannot display the control menu of the combined cooking mode including "range manual" and "range automatic". To cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L can only end the cooking process 1 of the left side heating unit 17HL to be used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all the settings of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ..

Next, FIG. 84 will be described.
FIG. 84 shows a scene in which the user finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information unit) 332 has advanced to the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking). indicate. Specifically, it is indicated by white letters that the progress from the white display of IH heating to the stage of RG cooking which is the final cooking step 2 is performed.
From this information, it is easily understood that the user has reached the stage of carrying out the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined.

The command to start the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS becomes a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. ..

On the other hand, since the stage of FIG. 84 is after the user himself / herself finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the occupancy state of the left heating unit 17HL is released. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be started to be used for cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, another cooking menu can be started at the induction heating source 189 by inputting with the left operation unit 17HL. However, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not been canceled yet, another cooking using the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2) cannot be performed. The occupancy of the left heating unit 17HL has only been released.

Next, FIG. 85 will be described.
FIG. 85 shows that when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted while proceeding to the stage of “range grill cooking” (RG cooking). Although it is displayed as "RG", it does not mean that the combined cooking mode KM2 is implemented.

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating the microwave output level" described with reference to FIG. 83. Therefore, by operating the pair of input keys 43M2, the user can select the output level of microwave heating.

Next, FIG. 86 will be described.
FIG. 86 shows that, as in FIG. 85, when the linked cooking mode is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when the stage of the cooking step 2 is advanced.

As shown in FIG. 86 (B), the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M in a total of five stages from “strong” to “weak”. Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity by microwaves according to the finished state of the object to be cooked.

In the final cooking step 2 described with reference to FIG. 86, the user's operation and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, the user can stay in the central part of the front surface of the cooking device 1 and concentrate on the end of the cooking step 2.

In the middle of the cooking step 2, when it is desired to take out the object to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 from the heating chamber 113 and check it directly, the user may open the door 114 at an arbitrary timing. When the door 114 is opened, the transmission of microwaves is instantaneously stopped by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantly started again. When the door 114 is opened in the middle of the cooking step 2 as described above, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 remains continuous.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described.
FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking step 2 of FIG. 86 and the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily ends the final step of cooking (cooking step 2), the input key 43MT is operated. Pressing this cancels the sequence of control sequences in the co-cooking mode. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after stopping once in this way, it is necessary to select a heating source with the central operation unit 40M and then press the input key 43MS again. ..

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is finished, if the input key 43MS is pressed again within a certain time, the microwave heating is instantaneously performed again so that the additional heating can be easily performed. Made it start.

As shown in FIG. 87 (B), the first specific screen 30SP is a display screen so that the user can know the timing of ending the RG cooking process which is the final process of cooking (cooking process 2). After 10A, the display screen 10B changes to the displayed content. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking step 2 is about to be completed.

On the display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food or the like to be cooked, and the integrated control device MC determines the arrival time until the end. It performs the prediction process and is displayed as a result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the object to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict the cooking finish time, the user may set a timer in advance and finish the cooking step 2 by controlling the time. In this case, the load determination as described above is not necessary.

As described above, when the user sets a timer in advance and finishes the cooking step 2 by time control, the reference information 2 can be notified (FA2) as described with reference to FIG. 63. That is, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on the display screen 10B after the display screen 10A, and matches the reference information 2 as a part of the notification (FA2). Is displayed.

The display screen 10C of FIG. 87 (B) is heated again within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds. However, when the door 114 is opened, 15 seconds from that point) immediately after the cooking step 2 is completed. This is an example showing that it can be started.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has become hot due to cooking until just before this, additional information 331 such as "Caution for high temperature grill" is displayed to enhance the safety of the user.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, the content that the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 changes during the period until the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 60 will be described in detail.

88 to 90 show the correspondence between the contents of the displays E1 to E5 described in the “center display unit” of the item E and the input operation unit in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes described in FIG. 60 and the operation. Is shown.

The state of FIG. 88 shows the stage of "E1: initial screen of cooperative cooking", and the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. Shows the relationship with.
FIG. 89A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of “E2: menu change” and the central operation unit 40M. This is a stage in which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target object to be cooked from the linked cooking modes, and the corresponding linked cooking mode is selected.

FIG. 89 (B) is the stage of “E3: Selective heating source change (select the right IH)”. The stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP is shown. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 90 (A) is the stage of "E4: Right IH input button pressing guidance display". On the first specific screen 30SP, it is a stage in which it is displayed that the operation of the input key 43R1 arranged in the right operation unit 40R is necessary in order to start the cooperative cooking. That is, it is recommended that the user press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 90B is the stage of “E5: IH preheating display”. At this stage, on the first specific screen 30SP, it is shown that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating", "preheating completed", and "notifying that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 91 to 97 show the display E11 to the "center display unit" of the item E in the explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the various processes and the operation of the "hamburger" cooking (cooperative cooking mode) described with reference to FIG. It shows the correspondence between the contents of E17 and the input operation unit.

FIG. 91 (A) shows the stage of “E11: IH preheating display” described in the item E (center display unit) of FIG. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that it is notified that the set temperature is reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 91 (B) is the stage of “E12: IH heating display” also described with reference to FIG. 61. At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready to heat. That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the process of induction heating (IH heating).

The stage of FIG. 92 shows the display content performed after a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the display of FIG. 91 is displayed. The display of FIG. 92 is not described in item E of FIG.

At the stage of FIG. 92, it is shown that the user needs to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L in order to finish the cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9 currently being executed.

The next FIG. 93 is the stage of “E13: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display” described with reference to FIG. 61. Since this stage has completed the induction heating (cooking step 1), the additional information 331 urges the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber 113 (to perform the cooking step 2).

The following FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (C) are the stages of "E14: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display" described with reference to FIG. 61. At this stage, it is displayed that the heating power in the range grill cooking (composite cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that the grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by the start button (input key 43MS). is doing.

In FIG. 94 (C), the input key 43MS is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, indicating that it is waiting for the user's operation. The displays of FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B) are alternately displayed, for example, every 5 seconds.

The following FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (C) are the stages of "E15: Grill heating display" described with reference to FIG. 61. Here, it is shown that the object to be cooked is heated by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (cooking step 2).

FIG. 95 (A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 95 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven and are in the combined heating. FIG. 95 (C) shows that this RG cooking step (cooking step 2) is completed in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The following FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B) are the stages of "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" described with reference to FIG. 61. Here, since the RG heating process is completed, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again.

If the user does not want extended heating, he / she can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the linked cooking mode without extended heating. The first specific screen 30SP of the contents of FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B) is alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next figure 97 is the stage of “E17: time setting display”. Here, when the cooking time is extended by the input key 43M2 and the cooking is performed again inside the heating chamber 113, the result of setting the extended time is displayed. After this time setting display, the above-mentioned "E15: grill heating display" and "E16: alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 98 to 102 will be described.
FIGS. 98 to 102 show the relationship between various processes and operations of “karaage” cooking (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 62, in the “center display unit” of item E. The contents of the displayed displays E21 to E26 and the state of the input operation unit are shown.

FIG. 98 (A) shows the stage of “E21: IH preheating display”. Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation. That is, the induction heating of the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL has already started.
FIG. 98 (B) is the stage of “E22: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display”. Here, the door 114 is opened to encourage the cooked food (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 62).

The following FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (C) are the stages of "E23: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted when the fried chicken is cooked by driving the "range grill driving unit", and that the cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 99 (A) and 99 (B) are alternately displayed, for example, every 5 seconds.
Further, when the door 114 is left open, the display shown in FIG. 99 (C) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 100 (A) and 100 (B) are in the stage of "E24: microwave oven heating display".
FIG. 100A shows that the cooking power can be changed when the "range grill driving unit" is driven.
FIG. 100B is a content displayed after the cooking starts, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until the cooking is finished. This stage is the stage at which the cooking step 1 is started.

The following FIGS. 101 (A) and 101 (B) are the stages of "E25: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking step B24 (see FIG. 62) that drives the "range grill drive unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 101 (A) and the display screen of FIG. 101 (B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 102 is the stage of “E26: time setting display”. Here, it is indicated that the cooking step B24 is further extended for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "range grill (RG)" heating is completed at the stage of FIG. 102, the next step can proceed to the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL where the preheating has already been completed.

(Operation management system for home appliances)
Next, FIGS. 103 to 112 will be described. 103 to 112 relate to the cooking device 1 and the operation management system of home electric appliances, which are the objects of the present disclosure.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 103 shows the control operation on the cooking device 1 side. FIG. 104 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking device 1 in the example shown in FIG. 103.

FIG. 105 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG. 103.
FIG. 106 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking device 1. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking device 1. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after activation. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the exchange of information between the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented.

FIG. 103 will be described.
The operation step shown in FIG. 103 is defined in the control program that executes the cooperative cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
The inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted before the first step SD1. That is, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the stage of step ST2 in FIG. 38.

The operation step shown in FIG. 103 shows the operation after the user operation (A23) shown in FIG. 65. In step SD1, for example, when "karaage" is selected as the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the cooking step 1 is started, the heating of the foodstuff is started by the microwave.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in FIG. At this stage, as in the notification F24 of FIG. 62, "range, finish standard is started" is notified by voice.

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from the time point of the step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started cooperative cooking mode KM3 are collated. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and it can be verified by the integrated control device MC that the cooking of “karaage” is being executed.
It is also known at this point that the cooking step 1 uses the heating chamber 113 for the cooking of “karaage”. In other words, it can be seen that when the cooking step 1 is completed, the heating chamber 113 is not used.

Note that step SD3 may be omitted, and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the individual cooperative cooking modes (for example, karaage, hamburger, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the mode is a specific cooperative cooking mode. This "specific cooperative cooking mode" is, for example, as follows.
(1) Items that can generally be classified as side dishes, such as "karaage,""hamburger," and "dumplings."
(2) Items to be cooked in individual cooperative cooking modes (for example, hamburger steak) and items that are usually eaten at the same time (for example, soup, french fries).

If "No" in step SD4, the operation of FIG. 103 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 is being executed in the heating chamber 113. If "No" in step SD5, the operation of FIG. 103 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SD6. In step SD6, an inquiry signal RQ3 (see FIG. 104) is issued to the home gateway 411 in order to inquire about the inventory information of the foodstuff stored in the refrigerator 401.

When the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG. 38.
In the first embodiment, the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is transmitted at the stage where the conditions are further narrowed down and it is found that the inventory information is likely to be required (step SD6 in FIG. 103).

In the next step SD7, inventory information of ingredients is acquired from the home gateway 411. Then, the integrated control device MC temporarily stores the storage device MM.

In the next step SD8, the inventory information of the received foodstuff is analyzed.
In this step SD8, the presence or absence of ingredients that are highly related to the cooking (in this case, karaage) being executed in the cooperative cooking mode is searched. The "relevance" referred to here is typically rice as a staple food or a foodstuff (for example, frozen vegetables) that is often eaten together with a side dish called karaage. Therefore, in this step SD8, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted, and the following description will be given.

If the determination in step SD7 is "No", the process of FIG. 103 is terminated as it is, and nothing is notified to the user.

In the next step SD9, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, the notification that the cooking step 1 is about to be completed is performed. This notification is not shown in FIG. Further, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of the cooking step 1, another cooking menu for effectively utilizing the heating chamber 113, which is not used in the fried chicken cooking, is notified.
As mentioned above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether or not the user has performed an operation to stop the cooking step 1. If there is a stop operation by the user in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, notification of the end of the cooking step 1 (F25: see FIG. 62) is performed.
Then, when the user takes out the food to be cooked (fried food) from the heating chamber 113 and puts it in the food to be cooked (frying pan or the like) N which has already been preheated to a high temperature, the cooking step 2 is performed. It starts. At this stage, the cooking oil contained in the object to be heated N is already at a high temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8, which is a step before the cooking step 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from the refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to perform another cooking at the stage before the cooking step 2. can.

As mentioned above, in contrast to the karaage cooperative cooking mode, the staple food rice can be thawed and warmed can be prepared in parallel, so the actual total from the start to the end of the cooperative cooking. The time can be shortened. As a result, the convenience of the user can be improved.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is used within a short time from the end of the cooking step 1, it is assumed that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the target temperature is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the high heat of the heating chamber 113 remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, automatic microwave heating is prohibited by the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is to be used after that, the control menu (single cooking) of "microwave oven manual" may be selected. That is, the heating time of the microwave may be set by the user.

As described with reference to FIG. 57, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, but the cooking step 1 is completed. Until after the stage, the process of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 (by the integrated control device MC) is not performed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Further, if a control method is adopted in which even if the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking is completed in the heating chamber 113, the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 is continued until after that (after the cooking step 2). Only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8, a control program may be used to release the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 as an exception.

Next, FIGS. 104 and 105 will be described.
FIGS. 104 and 105 are diagrams illustrating information exchange between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on in chronological order.
The following will be described on the assumption that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed with reference to FIG. 104.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time of installation in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in the “home mode” (step SE1 in FIG. 104). The "home mode" refers to a driving pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. If all the residents are away, the mode will switch to "Answering mode".

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 103). Then, cooking is started according to the input operation of the user.

In the cooking apparatus 1, as described with reference to FIG. 103, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the start time (step SD1) of the cooking step 1. .. This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

Since the central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the detection information of the person detection unit 413H that detects the presence or movement of a person in the kitchen KT, it determines that it is a cooking scene and cooperates with the cooking device 1. Switch to operation (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411 to the wireless communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. The exchange of other signals is also performed by wireless communication between the communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 searches the inventory of foods stored in the refrigerating chamber 401B and the plurality of freezing chambers 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own storage unit (step: SE4). The foods stored in the refrigerator come in various forms such as foods processed halfway at home and foods in bags purchased outside. Many proposals have already been made for the identification and search methods of such inventory information, and it is known to use images taken by a camera, RF tags, two-dimensional codes, and the like.

Further, when putting food in the refrigerator 401, a method of manually inputting data such as the name of the food and its attributes, or a method of automatically optically or magnetically reading information such as food and accumulating inventory information, etc. Various methods have been proposed.
In the first embodiment, any method may be used because there are no restrictions on the identification of the food when the food is put in the refrigerator 401 or after it is stored.

The refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.
The home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted by the reply signal RS1 in the storage device 450 (SE5). Here, "temporary" is a period from the time when the inventory information data is transmitted again from the refrigerator 401 until the data is received, and does not mean that the storage is continued for a long period of time. The inventory data of the storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest one and stored.

In the heating cooker 1, as described with reference to FIG. 103, when the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 103). RQ3 is transmitted (SE6).

In the home gateway 411, the latest inventory data stored in the storage device 450 is transmitted from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking device 1 as the inventory data signal RS2.

In the heating cooker 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the storage device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of FIG. 103, the integrated control device MC has another cooking menu (of ingredients and dishes) directly related to one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode being executed from the inventory data. (Name, etc.) is notified (SE8).
In the example of FIG. 103, only “karaage” was described as a cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, but as shown in FIG. 78, “fried vegetables”, “pork cutlet”, “tempura”, etc. But it's okay.

Next, FIG. 105 will be described.
FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating the operation after step SE8 in FIG. 104.
When all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (SE9), the heating cooker 1 provides the home gateway 411 with main data indicating the contents of the cooperative cooking (hereinafter referred to as “cooking implementation data”). Is transmitted as a signal BS1.

Here, the "cooking implementation data" means at least one of the following information.
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the names (including abbreviations) of cooked foods such as "karaage" and "fried vegetables".
(2) Information on the weight or volume of the object to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (for example, microwave output 500 W, thermal power 1500 W at the time of induced heating or "medium heat"). (4) Information indicating the time required from the cooking step 1 to the end of the cooking step 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking step 2 (or the final cooking step) (6) All from the start of the preheating process Information indicating the time required to complete the cooking step 2 (7) Information specifying the heating source (for example, the left heating unit 17HL) in which the cooking operation was performed (8) Information regarding the restrictions imposed on the user during the next cooking (8) Example: Since the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature, range (automatic) heating cannot be performed.)
(9) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113.

The above-mentioned "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food to be cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g". This can be inferred from the temperature rise rate of the object to be cooked (fried chicken) in the cooking step 1 by the integrated control device MC.

The "cooking implementation data" can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401.
Further, the "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, in the "cooking execution data", "(4) information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2", "(5) information indicating the end time", and "(6) the end of all cooking processes 2". "Information indicating the time required until" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating these data, it is possible to estimate the concentration time zone of cooking in the kitchen KT.

Further, among the "cooking execution data", "(9) information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because the current temperature on the heating cooker 1 side and the estimated temperature "dissociation" can be known by optically measuring on the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, since the "cooking execution data" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate the cooking concentration time zone, it is possible to assume the timing at which the food is stored in the refrigerator 401 after that.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electric device (for example, an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part such as a cooling device is, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019. It is proposed in the publication No. -21153. However, in the conventional proposal, the environmental information provided from the cooking device 1 side is often ambiguous and is not necessarily useful from the refrigerator side. On the other hand, the "cooking implementation data" of the first embodiment is in line with a specific control menu and has high utility value.

In the home gateway 411, the "cooking execution data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS1 is transmitted to the refrigerator 401 as a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data". The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS2 may be basically the same, but may be different. In the "cooking execution data" sent by the transmission signal BS1, useful information was also included in the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since they are not necessary for the refrigerator 401, the home gateway 411 is used. After deleting it, it may be sent to the refrigerator 401.

In the refrigerator 401, the contents of the "cooking execution data" are analyzed, and those useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 are collected and analyzed (SE10).
Next, in the refrigerator 401, the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 are changed from the analysis result of the “cooking execution data” (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. In addition, the "cooking history data" of the schedule management unit 451 is updated. As a result, the date and time, time zone, cooking menu (for example, cooking name "karaage"), and other related information (for example, estimated karaage "300 g") of this one cooking (coordinated cooking) are recorded.

Further, the schedule management unit 451 recommends specific ingredients such as "frozen rice" and a cooking menu from the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 in the recorded "cooking history data". (See step SD8 in FIG. 103), the recommended facts may be included. When such daily cooking conditions are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 using artificial intelligence will improve the ability of "learning and prediction", so the value of providing information to users will gradually increase. improves.

After all the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the operation end warning signal BS3 is transmitted from the heating cooker 1 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
After that, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end warning signal BS3, the main control unit 417 ends the "mutual cooperation operation mode". Further, the alarm device 445 is switched to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). This allows the user to monitor the temperature change in the kitchen KT internal space regardless of whether or not the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Inventory information display example 1)
FIG. 106 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 and the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 106 shows the scene of step SD11 of FIG. 103.

The example shown in FIG. 106 is a stage in which "karaage", which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode, is being executed.
While the cooking step 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113, the integrated display unit 30 displays that there is "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 is also notified by voice.

If the input key 43MT is pressed in the state of FIG. 106, the microwave cooking in the cooking step 1 is stopped. The setting of the linked cooking mode is not canceled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the object to be cooked is taken out from the heating chamber 113, and the object to be cooked is placed on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL, from that point (cooking step 2). ) Induction cooking can be started. As shown by the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed at the first preheating start stage as described with reference to FIG. 62 (see operation A21 of FIG. 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to newly operate the left operation unit 40L.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 107 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1.
FIG. 107 is an example in which the display content of the integrated display unit 30 of FIG. 106 is changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 107 (A), the time saving information 333 meaning that the time can be shortened and the recommended cooking information 338 "warming" are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display "because it is a heating chamber and can be thawed". That is, it is shown that "warming" and "thawing" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 107 (A), the symbols 335U and 335D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if any of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to this symbol is pressed, the following Information is displayed.

In another example shown in FIG. 107 (B), the refrigerator information 334 in characters is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display two types of individual food information 339, "frozen rice" and "oden". ing. That is, the refrigerator 401 informs the user that there are "frozen rice" and "oden" as ingredients.

The individual food material information is information that identifies one food. The "food material information" of the refrigerator 401 means an aggregate of the individual food material information 339.

The display of FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) may be alternately performed, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In any case, the user can understand that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 by using the food material information stored in the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process 1.

FIG. 108 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 108 is an example of improving the display contents of FIG. 46.

In FIG. 108, the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 46, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. On this display screen 2C, the recommended sentence 30R1 prompts the user to perform an input operation so as to select a heating source.

Next, FIG. 109 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 109 is still another example of improving the display contents of FIG. 46.
In FIG. 109, the display screen 2D is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

On the display screen 2C of FIG. 109, the user is informed that the cooking device 1 automatically confirms the food information of the refrigerator 401. That is, it notifies that the inventory information acquisition operation is being executed.

In step ST2 shown in FIG. 38, it was explained that the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D of FIG. 109.

Next, FIG. 110 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
After the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 110, the display screen 2E informs the user that the food material information has been acquired. Immediately after that, the display screen 2E informs that there are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "dumplings" as specific ingredients. The heating source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in FIG. 38) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of home gateway operation)
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway.
The home gateway determines whether or not the schedule management unit 451 has entered the "cooking time zone" during the period in which the alarm device 445 is being operated in the "home mode" as described with reference to FIG. 104.

The resident may manually input the "cooking time zone" by the input unit 449. For example, it may be set that the cooking time zone is from 6:30 am to 7:30 am on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating time zone of the cooker 1 for 30 days in the past, and the average time zone is changed from 6:20 am to 7:30 am. It is determined that there is.

In the above situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether or not the current time has entered the cooking time zone.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, it means that the time has entered the average time zone (6:20 to 7:30 am) as described above, so "Yes". The determination is made and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452 and 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a person.
For example, when a resident moves in the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 or stops in front of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking device 1, such movement of a person is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401 has been opened based on the operation information from the refrigerator 401 side. When the door is opened and then it is detected that the door is closed (SF4), in the next step SF5, the latest status of the food contained in the refrigerator 401 is confirmed.

The confirmation of the inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described with reference to FIG. 104.

As described with reference to FIG. 104, the refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.
Therefore, the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 compares the latest inventory information data collected with the inventory information data sent from the refrigerator 401 last time, and if there is no change, processes in step SF6. To finish.

If there is a change from the previous inventory information data in step SF6, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with a new one (SF7).

Then, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking device 1 is prepared.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, and promptly receives an inquiry from the cooking cooker 1. It works so that it can provide inventory information.

It seems that it will take a certain amount of time to investigate the inventory of food contained in the refrigerator 401 in detail, and when the door of the refrigerator 401 is left open, the light from the outside will be ambient light. There is also a concern that it will interfere with optical detection and image analysis. Under such circumstances, inventory information is promptly acquired immediately after the door of the refrigerator 401 is closed.

With the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described with reference to FIG. 104 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking device 1. That is, the system is such that the heating cooker 1 can acquire the latest inventory information.

(Display of individual food information during the heating suspension period)
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring individual food material information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking device 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 103, inventory information is automatically acquired in the middle of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113, and the recommended cooking menu is notified.
On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 112 notifies that another cooking can be executed in the "heating pause period" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode, and responds to the user's command. It is designed to be notified.
Therefore, the operation by the operation program of FIG. 103 and the notification method by the operation program shown in FIG. 112 do not contradict each other. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (combined).

The cooking cooker 1 described up to FIG. 103 is
(1) Independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the induction heating source 9 (IH)
(2) Independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the microwave heating source 189 (range)
(3) (Oven) independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the oven heating source 188.
(4) The induction heating source with the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 is subjected to a transition period TR in which the start and end timings are determined depending on the input operation of the user. Coordinated cooking mode KM3 that operates sequentially
Has a function to execute according to the input operation of the user.

Further, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR.
In the middle of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC has at least a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 after the end of the first cooking step and information on individual ingredients of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu. The configuration is characterized in that any one of them is notified by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 112, after the cooking step 1 is completed, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 (the above-mentioned) even in the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIG. 57). It notifies that it can be executed (in parallel with the cooking step 2), and can notify according to the user's command.

In FIG. 112, step SG1 is a stage in which the cooperative cooking mode is selected and the cooking menu desired by the user (for example, “fried chicken”) is selected from the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similarly to step SD5 in FIG. 103, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 of the selected cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed in the heating chamber 113.
If this step SG2 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, inventory information is inquired to the home gateway 411. In this step SG3, information on frozen foods and reheated foods is acquired from the inventory information. Although the description of the inventory information reception and temporary storage steps as in step SD7 of FIG. 103 is omitted in FIG. 112, the same processing is performed in the operation program of FIG. 112.

In the next step SG4, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 executed in the heating chamber 113 has been completed.

If the cooking step 1 is completed at the stage of step SG4, the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIG. 57) starts from that point. That is, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking is suspended, and the user is waiting for a command to start the cooking process 2.

In such a transition period TR, in step SG5, it is determined whether or not another cooking can be performed. This is a process corresponding to step SD8 in FIG. 103.

When the step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify that there is a proposal for another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result in step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

When a specific input key of the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 20) is operated in the subsequent step SG6, it is determined as "Yes".

In step SG7, one or a plurality of different cooking menus (for example, “warming dumplings”) that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 are displayed. The place to display may be the integrated display unit 30 displaying the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8 waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
FIG. 113 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M of the cooking device 1 and the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 114 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view showing a peripheral portion of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

FIG. 113 shows a display example of the integrated display unit 30 in the scene of step SG6 of FIG. 112. As is clear from FIG. 113, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see FIG. 21) of the integrated display unit 30 are combined into one to form a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 113, 338 is recommended information indicating that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and 337 is an operation of the input key 43M2 for displaying the proposed content of the cooking menu of the recommended information. It is a display guide unit that explains.

In the state of FIG. 113, the individual light emitting unit 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 is blinking as shown by the dotted circle in order to encourage the user to input. By pressing any one of the (two) input keys 43M2 in this state, individual foodstuff information 339 such as specific recommended cooking (for example, "frozen rice") can be displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. can.

In FIG. 113, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the screen is switched to the display screen of FIG. 114. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 113 changes to the content of FIG. 114.
In FIG. 114, 339 is individual food information indicating another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in characters.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the weight and freezing temperature of the refrigerated "dumplings" and the frozen "rice" are displayed. That is, the individual food material information also includes information on the name and weight of one food material, and the refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.). In addition, related information such as expiration date information and storage start time (date) in the refrigerator 401 may be included.

Next, FIG. 115 shows the display content that is automatically switched after a few seconds while keeping the display content shown in FIG. 113. That is, after a few seconds have passed without pressing the input key 43M2 after the state shown in FIG. 113 is reached, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 115. Further, after a few seconds have elapsed in the state of FIG. 115, the display automatically returns to the display of FIG. 113.

As is clear from FIGS. 113 to 115, the integrated control device MC has a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 after the end of the first cooking step in the middle of the cooking step 1, and the cooking. At least one of the inventory information of the refrigerator related to the menu was notified by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 during the transition period TR (“heating rest period P3” in FIG. 57) after the cooking step 1 is completed. It can be notified that it can be executed (in parallel with the cooking step 2), and information on ingredients used for "another cooking" can be notified according to a user's command.
Therefore, for example, in a state where one cooking A (eg, fried chicken) in the cooperative cooking mode has entered the stage of the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, the cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113. Cooking B (thawing to warming frozen rice), which is different from that, can be executed at the same time. That is, when cooking A and cooking B are eaten in one meal, cooking can be performed in parallel instead of the method of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A. As a result, the entire cooking time can be shortened, and the convenience of the user is improved.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15.
A second heating means HM2 provided with a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and the like.
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
An input operation unit 40, which is an input means, is provided.
The integrated control device MC includes a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently.
The combined cooking mode KM2 that automatically advances the cooking process by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2, and
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 having the cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
In the single cooking mode KM1, the control pattern (for example, "boiler", "boil") of the first heating means HM1 is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating source and the control pattern (for example, “range grill”) to be used are determined in the second heating means HM2, and the heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger", "fried chicken") is determined and the heating operation is started.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the input operation unit 40 has an input key (43L1, 43R1, etc.) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 and an input key (43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2. ) And the input key (43MC) for selecting the linked cooking mode KM3 are separately provided.

Since this configuration allows selection of three cooking modes by each input key (input means), the operability of the user can be improved even in the cooking cooker 1 in which the number of heating sources is increased. Can be done.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN uses the first heating means HM1. A configuration for displaying a dedicated display screen (first specific screen SP) displaying the order of the cooking process to be cooked, the cooking process using the second heating means HM2, and the identification information 330 indicating the object to be cooked. It was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is used by combining a plurality of heating means, necessary information can be confirmed and input operations can be performed using the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, even in the cooking cooker 1 in which the number of heating means is increased, the operability of the user can be improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN is in the second heating means HM2. The present invention has disclosed a configuration for displaying a dedicated display screen (second specific screen 30SC) displaying the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) to be used.

Because of this configuration, in the combined cooking mode KM2 used by combining a plurality of heating means, necessary information can be confirmed and input operations can be performed using the second specific screen 30SC. As a result, even in the cooking cooker 1 in which the number of heating means is increased, the operability of the user can be improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the independent cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN uses the first heating means HM1 (induction heating). Information indicating one type of control pattern (for example, "heat retention", "preheating", "boiler", etc.) of the source 9) and standard control conditions (default setting value: for example, heat retention) applicable to the control pattern. A configuration for displaying a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) displaying 80 ° C., preheating 180 ° C., etc. (see FIG. 48) was disclosed.

With this configuration, the control pattern and control conditions in the single cooking mode KM1 can be confirmed on the third specific screen 30ST. As a result, the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the first specific screen 30SP has a standard control condition (default setting value) applicable to the object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) in the cooperative cooking mode. For example, thermal power disclosed a configuration in which "standard") is displayed (see FIG. 95 and the like).

Because of this configuration, the control conditions at the time of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment, the second specific screen 30SC has the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) used in the second heating means HM2. ) Discloses a configuration in which standard control conditions (default setting values) applicable to are displayed (see FIGS. 49 to 52, etc.).

With this configuration, the control conditions during cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 can be confirmed on the second specific screen 30SC. As a result, the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the first heating means HM1 discloses a configuration including an induction heating source 9 including IH coils 17L and 17R.

Because of this configuration, cooking can be performed on the top plate 15. Thereby, convenience can be improved.
If a combustor equipped with a gas burner is installed instead of the induction heating source 9, the gas burner can be used to perform the heating operation in the independent cooking mode on the top plate 15, and the same effect can be expected.

As the heating source constituting the second heating means HM2, a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 for heating the object to be cooked by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189 are provided. Was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, even in the case of cooking using the same heating chamber 113, since the heating principle is different, an appropriate heating method can be adopted for various objects to be cooked. Thereby, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 capable of supporting a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The heating chamber 113 and
Display means (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L and right side display unit 31R) and
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber 113.
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the command of the input operation unit 40 is provided.
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and cooking using the second heating means HM2. It has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the processes.
When the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays a standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and this standby initial screen (common screen 30Z). ) Is displayed during the period
(1) When the first command (selection command by the input key 43MC: see FIG. 35) is received, the identification information 330 of at least one object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is provided. Displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30,
(2) When the second command (selection command by the input key 43L1 or 43R1) is received before receiving the first command, at least one control pattern (for example, "water heater") in the single cooking mode KM1 is shown. The information is displayed on the third specific screen 30ST of the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 48).
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking of the single cooking mode KM1 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Moreover, when the main power is turned on, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is first displayed, and during the period during which the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is displayed, the first By giving a command or a second command, information that can identify the object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") in the cooperative cooking menu and information that indicates the control pattern (for example, "boiler") in the single cooking mode KM1 are displayed. It can be expected to prevent erroneous operation by the user and improve operability.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives the first command, the specific screen (first specific screen 30SP) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is received. ) Was disclosed on the integrated display unit 30 (the common screen 30Z was switched to the first specific screen 30SP).

With this configuration, the user can recognize the selection result of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the first specific screen 30SP, and the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives the second command, the specific screen (third specific screen 30ST) different from the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is received. ) Was disclosed on the integrated display unit 30 (the common screen 30Z was switched to the third specific screen 30ST).

With this configuration, the user can recognize the selection result of the single cooking mode KM1 on the third specific screen 30ST, and the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment, the first specific screen 30SP shows information on control conditions applicable to each of the identification information 330 (microwave output level shown in FIGS. 87 and 99). Information 30V ”) disclosed the configuration displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Because of this configuration, the control conditions at the time of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, the operability and convenience of the user can be improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the control conditions applicable to the third specific screen 30ST for each control pattern of the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "heat retention", "boiler", etc.) The configuration in which the information is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is disclosed.

Because of this configuration, for example, control conditions such as heat retention 80 ° C. and preheating 180 ° C. are displayed on a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) (see FIG. 48), so that user operability and convenience Can be improved.

Further, in the cooking apparatus 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC includes a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the first heating means HM1. Disclosed is a configuration in which a combined cooking mode KM2 is started at the same time or at a time lag, or is automatically switched and driven.

Because of this configuration, even in the case of cooking using the same heating chamber 113, since the heating principle is different, a heating method according to the object to be cooked can be adopted. In addition, since the heating source is automatically switched, the burden on the user is small. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 that can be used for a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means HM2. A configuration including a first cooperative cooking mode and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2 and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating means HM1. Was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, a method of switching between a plurality of heating sources to heat the food to be cooked is adopted in two places above the heating chamber 113 and the top plate 15, so that a wide variety of food to be cooked can be supported. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
On the top plate 15, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N and
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113, and
The input operation unit 40 that receives the user's command signal,
The first heating means HM1 and the integrated control device MC for controlling the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 are provided.
The integrated control device MC has an execution function of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are used in combination.
The integrated control device MC determines whether or not to allow cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 for a specific cooked object (for example, “hamburger”) selected by the input operation unit 40. STR2 (“operation step A”, see FIG. 67) and, when allowing cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3, include information about the object to be cooked (eg, “hamburger”) in which the linked cooking mode KM3 is cooked. 1 When a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 40 after the operation step STR3 (“operation step B”, see FIG. 70) for performing the specific notification and the first specific notification, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Has an operation step STR8 (“operation step C”, see FIG. 70).
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means without causing a situation in which the cooking cannot be performed due to insufficient power, for example, in the middle of the cooperative cooking. Can be done. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first specific notification is based on the identification information 330 of the object to be cooked, the cooking step by the first heating means (induction heating source 9), and the second heating means HM2. Among the cooking processes, at least the information on the cooking process to be started earlier is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP which is collectively displayed.

With this configuration, the user can confirm the food to be cooked in advance and can provide an easy-to-use cooking cooker.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The heating chamber 113 and
An integrated display unit 30 that serves as a display means,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber 113.
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the command of the input operation unit 40 is provided.
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and cooking using the second heating means HM2. It has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the processes.
When the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) common to the first and second heating means HM1 and HM2 on the integrated display unit 30. However, during the period when this standby initial screen is displayed,
(1) Upon receiving the first command (by operating the input key 43MC) for specifying the cooperative cooking mode, the standby initial screen can be switched to the first specific screen 30SP and become the target of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Display the cooking menu (eg "hamburger"),
(2) When the second heating means HM2 receives a second command (by operating the input key 43M1) for specifying a desired control pattern, the standby initial screen is switched to the second specific screen 30SC. The control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "range manual" is displayed (see FIGS. 37 and 51).
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 by using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Moreover, when a command for specifying a desired object to be cooked is received (according to the operation of the input key 43M1), the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, and the second heating means HM2 is displayed. When a command for specifying a desired control pattern is received (according to the operation of the input key 43M1), the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "range manual") is displayed, so that a highly operable cooking cooker can be provided. ..

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives the selection signal of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during the period of displaying the standby initial screen, the cooked dish is cooked. The identification information 330 for identifying an object (for example, "hamburger") and the guidance information 30P that can be used as a reference for the user's operation are associated with each other and displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is used by combining a plurality of heating means, necessary information can be confirmed and input operations can be performed using the first specific screen 30SP. As a result, even in the cooking cooker 1 in which the number of heating means is increased, the operability of the user can be improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the selection signal of the single cooking mode KM1 is received, the information for specifying the control pattern (for example, "range manual") (specific sentence 30J: see FIG. 50). And the information of the control condition (microwave output value information 30X: see FIG. 50) applicable to the one control pattern are associated with each other and displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, even in the cooking cooker 1 used in which a plurality of heating means are combined, it is possible to confirm the control pattern and the control condition in correspondence with each other. This can improve the operability of the user.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
On the top plate 15, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked, and
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
The first heating means HM1 and the input operation unit 40 for giving a command to the second heating means HM2 are provided.
The integrated control device MC has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking object (for example, "for example,"" It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having a cooking step 1 for heating a hamburger) and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 after the cooking step 1.
The cooker 1 is disclosed (see FIGS. 54 and 61).

Because of this configuration, the heated object N such as a frying pan or a pan placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, and the cooked object (for example, “hamburger”) is placed on the heated object N and cooked. (Cooking step 1), and then, a cooperative cooking menu in which the object to be cooked is cooked by a second heating means in the heating chamber 113 can be executed. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40 for the notification unit AN, the cooked object (for example, “hamburger”) is applied. A display unit (integrated display unit) 30 for displaying the identification information 330 is provided.
The cooker 1 characterized by this was disclosed (see FIG. 54).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly operable cooking device in which a specific object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) to which the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is applied can be easily selected by the identification information 330.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The input operation unit 40 is a first operation unit (left operation unit, right operation unit) 40L, 40R that sets the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation. The second operating unit (central operating unit) 40M, which sets the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation, is provided.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the second operation unit 40M.
The preheating step is completed by the first operation units 40L and 40R.
The start and end of the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is performed by the second operation unit 40M.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that uses a combination of a plurality of heating means can be selected by the second operation unit 40M, and the cooking step performed by the second heating means HM2 using the heating chamber 113. Since the second operation unit 40M also starts and ends the cooking, the user can start and end the cooking by the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 by the second operation unit 40M.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as a plurality of heating sources capable of heating independently of each other.
The integrated control device MC includes a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently.
Further having a function of executing the combined cooking mode KM2 in which the plurality of heating sources in the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined to automatically advance one cooking step.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, one cooking process in the heating chamber 113 automatically proceeds by automatically combining the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which have different heating principles (heating characteristics) for the object to be cooked. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking step 1 by either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2, and the first heating means HM1 or the above which is not used in the cooking step 1. Further having a function of executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 provided with the cooking step 2 started after the end of the cooking step 1 by any one of the second heating means HM2.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, one object to be cooked can be cooked at two locations, above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113, by automatically combining a plurality of heating means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 provided with a display screen, and has an integrated display unit 30.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
When the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
When the independent cooking mode KM1 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, when any of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, any of the corresponding first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC, and third specific screen 30ST. One of them is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
On the top plate 15, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked, and
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113,
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
The first heating means HM1 and the input operation unit 40 for giving a command to the second heating means HM2 are provided.
The integrated control device MC uses the first heating means HM1 to preheat the object N to be heated, and in parallel with the preheating step, the second heating means HM2 prepares the object to be cooked. A cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having a cooking step 1 for heating and a cooking step 2 using the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step and the first heating means HM1 after the cooking step 1. With the ability to run
The cooking cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 54 and 61).

Because of this configuration, the object N to be heated such as a frying pan or a pan placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, and the cooking step 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 113 in parallel with this preheating step, and then the preheating is performed. It is possible to execute a cooperative cooking menu in which a cooked food (for example, "hamburger") is cooked (cooking step 2) on the cooked food N. As a result, it is possible to shorten the entire cooking time including the preheating time, and to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A combined cooking mode KM2 with multiple control menus that operates two or more heating sources in a predetermined sequence, and
A cooperative cooking mode KM3 having a plurality of cooperative cooking menus that operates the heating sources in a predetermined order at each location inside the heating chamber 113 and above the top plate.
A display means (integrated display unit) 30 for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu, and
The input operation unit 40 capable of selecting the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode is provided.
When the start key 43MS of the input operation unit is operated while at least two of the control menus are displayed on the display means 30 at the same time, the predetermined display position A (the first display position A) of the display means 30. The control menu displayed in the central portion of one area 30L in the front-rear direction is selected, and the process shifts to the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the start key 43MS is operated while at least two of the linked cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means 30, a predetermined display position B (center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L). One of the linked cooking menus displayed in the section) is selected, and the process shifts to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3.
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M1 for displaying the control menu in the display position A of the display means 30 in order for each operation, and the control menu for displaying the control menu in the reverse direction for each operation. The input key 43M1 to be displayed at the display position A (central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) of the means 30 is arranged adjacent to each other.
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M1 that sequentially displays the cooperative cooking menu at the display position B (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) each time the operation is performed. The input key 43M1 for displaying the linked cooking menu in the reverse direction at the display position B (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) is arranged adjacent to each other.
The input key 43M1 for displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu in the display position A (the central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) and the display position B by forward and reverse feeding, respectively. , Shared by the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the work of selecting the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking menu by the user can be selected by shifting the menu forward and backward, so that there is no confusion. As a result, it is possible to select between combined cooking and cooperative cooking with a simple operation, and it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
In the display means 30, a second display position (second) adjacent to the predetermined display position (central portion in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L) in a state where at least two of the control menus are displayed at the same time. In the display area 30M), control conditions (for example, thermal power and heating time) that can be applied to one control menu displayed at the predetermined display position (central portion of the first area 30L) are displayed.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, in the combined cooking mode, the control conditions applicable to one control menu can be easily confirmed in the second area 30M, and a cooking device with high operability can be provided.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
Each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the control conditions applicable to one control menu are sequentially transmitted to a predetermined display position C (second display area 30M; see FIG. 49) of the display means 30. The input key 43M2 to be displayed and the input key 43M2 to display the control condition in the display position C (second display area 30M) in reverse feed each time the operation is performed are arranged adjacent to each other.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily confirm the control conditions displayed in the second area 30M, and it is possible to provide a cooking device with high operability.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
In the display means 30, a predetermined display position D (second display area 30M) adjacent to the display position B (center of the first area 30L) is displayed in a state where at least two of the linked cooking menus are displayed at the same time. In FIG. 82 (C), control conditions (eg, “hamburger”) applicable to one of the linked cooking menus (eg, “hamburger”) displayed in the display position B (center of the first area 30L; see FIG. 82). , Information 30V indicating the output level. See FIG. 82) is displayed.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, even in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can easily visually confirm the control conditions (for example, the thermal power level) displayed in the second area 30M, and provide a cooking device with high operability. Can be done.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 has an input key 43M2 that sequentially displays the control conditions at the second display position (second display area 30M) of the display means 30 each time it is operated, and each time it is operated. The input key 43M2 for displaying the control condition on the second display unit (second display area 30M) in reverse feed is arranged adjacent to each other.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the input key 43M2 can be used to feed the control conditions (for example, the thermal power level) forward and backward to display them at a predetermined display position (second display area 30M), and the user can easily confirm them. It is possible to provide a cooking device with high operability.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The control condition of the control menu KM2 and the control condition of the linked cooking mode KM3 are sequentially forwarded and reversely forwarded, respectively, and are selectively displayed on the second display unit (second display area 30M). The input key 43M2 is shared by the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, even if a large area of the input operation unit 40 cannot be secured, the installation area of the input key 43M2 can be minimized, and the operability is improved by sharing, which is highly convenient for the user. A vessel can be provided.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
Information for specifying the heating source to be used for the control menu displayed at the predetermined display position while the control menu is displayed at the predetermined display position (center of the first area 30L) (heating source). Display unit) 30K, information indicating the category of the food to be cooked (vegetables, meat, etc.) (see FIG. 51), and information 30P1 indicating the characteristics of the control menu (see FIG. 49), at least one of them is included. Auxiliary information 30P (reference information 30P: recommended sentence) is displayed on the display means 30.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, when the user selects the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a cooking device that can be correctly understood by the auxiliary information 30P and that the user's operability and convenience are enhanced.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The auxiliary information 30P includes summary information that is always simply displayed in characters or symbols when the control menu is displayed, and detailed information that is displayed in characters by a user's display command or prior function setting. is doing,
The cooker 1 is disclosed (see FIGS. 37, 49, 51).

With this configuration, when the user selects the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a cooking device that can be correctly understood by the auxiliary information 30P and that the user's operability and convenience are enhanced.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body case HC,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber 113.
A second heating source HM2 having a plurality of heating sources 188 and 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking object is heated by using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of cooked object is selected. The first selection unit 43MC, which displays two cooking menus in a selectable manner,
In the combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of the heating sources 188 and 189 are automatically combined to heat one object to be cooked simultaneously or at different times, one of a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of objects to be cooked is selected. A second selection unit 43M1 for selecting one control menu (for example, "boiled leafy vegetables"),
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the selection of the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1 is provided.
With,
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the user can easily select the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking menu by the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC is further provided with an input operation unit 40.
The input operation unit 40 is separately provided with a first input key constituting the first selection unit 43MC and a second input key constituting the second selection unit 43M1.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1 allow the user to easily select the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking menu, and a wide range of cooking can be performed. It is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle the above.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC.
At least one of the cooking menu display method of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the display method of each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, if the function mode is set, the display method of the control menu in the combined cooking mode and the display method of the linked cooking menu can be changed, and the heating is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking. A cooker can be provided.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body case HC is further provided with an integrated display unit 30 as a display means.
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1, respectively.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the integrated display unit 30 provides a highly convenient cooking cooker that allows the user to easily distinguish between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 and can support a wide range of cooking. can do.

Other features disclosed in Embodiment 1.
The following characteristic configurations were disclosed.

(1) Part 1:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information FA1 or the second cooking process 2 is related. Reference information FA2, at least one of them is automatically notified by the notification unit AN.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9.
The integrated control device MC automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced.
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and is a first reference of the cooking step 1 in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. At least one of the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 regarding the cooking step 2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time, the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), etc., and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(3) Part 3:
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 for heating the cooked object housed in the heating chamber 113 and the cooked object N placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking step 1 is completed. The cooking step 2 in which the food to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 by the microwave heating source 189 can be started in the heating chamber 113.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source 9 and ending the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the cooking device is disclosed, characterized in that information indicating the progress of the cooking step is notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, the cooking step 1 can be started while the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking step 1, and then the cooked object is moved toward the preheated object N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Furthermore, since the reference information is automatically notified to the user in the middle of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking and the anxiety is dispelled. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(4) Part 4:
The integrated control device MC is
(1) IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated independently (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated independently (3) Oven alone in which the oven heating source 188 is operated independently Cooking mode (4) Transition period TR in which the start and end timings of the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are determined depending on the input operation of the user. KM3, a cooperative cooking mode that operates sequentially after
Has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 comprises a cooking step 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113, and a cooking step 2 performed after the transition period in a place other than the heating chamber 113. Including,
The integrated control device MC provides reference information regarding the cooking step 2 or information indicating that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in the transition period TR. Notify by,
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, when cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 is separated during the transition period TR in which the heating operation is stopped (the preheating operation may be continued). It is possible to notify that cooking is possible.
Therefore, it is expected that the time spent by the user for cooking can be shortened, cooking can be performed more quickly than before, the burden on the user can be reduced, and the usability can be improved.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC includes a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is driven and started with a time lag.
The combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven, and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Has the function of doing
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and the microwave heating source in the heating chamber 113 before the cooking step 1 is completed. The notification unit AN notifies that cooking different from the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed using either one or both of the 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, in the case of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, when the cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 is completed, it is possible to notify in advance that another cooking using the heating chamber 113 can be performed, so that the user heats the cooking chamber 113. It is expected that the time spent on cooking can be shortened, cooking can be performed more quickly than before, the burden on users can be reduced, and usability can be improved.

(6) Part 6:
The heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with and from the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking is executed in cooperation with the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 started in response to a command from the user after the completion of the cooking step 1 are executed.
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Furthermore, when cooking in the linked cooking mode, information on the ingredients in the refrigerator 401 can be obtained as reference information related to cooking to which the linked cooking mode is applied, so that the burden on the user side of cooking can be reduced. It can be expected to improve usability.

(7) Part 7:
The heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with and from the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked by a cooperative cooking program to execute cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period TR in which no heating operation is performed.
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide a vessel.

Further, when cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode, the execution data of the cooking is provided to the external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. Finally, the utilization of such information can contribute to the improvement of user convenience, safety, maintenance and improvement of comfortable space, and the like.

(8) Part 8:
When the integrated control device MC receives the input for selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, the first specification as an example. By displaying either the screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

Because of this configuration, two heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 can be easily used properly. Can be provided.

Further, the input operation unit 40 for inputting to select one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the integrated display for selectively displaying the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC. It was a configuration including a part 30.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display unit 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first and second heating means, and includes the operation unit 98 of the main power switch 97 that supplies electric power to the integrated control device MC, the cooperative cooking mode, and the linked cooking mode. It was configured to have an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for instructing individual cooking start in the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can issue a command from the input of the main power to the start of heating, and the operability is good.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT as a cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, both the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and the operation of the combined cooking mode can be canceled by the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Further, the integrated control device MC receives an input of any one of the combined cooking mode, the linked cooking mode, and the single cooking mode in the input operation unit 40, and a specific screen (first specific) according to the cooking mode. The screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST) are displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

Moreover, for each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, such as "hamburger" and "karaage", the heating sources of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and further, the above-mentioned first reference. Since useful information such as information FA1 and second reference information FA2 is displayed to the user, it is possible to reduce the user's cooking failure and provide a cooking device with improved convenience.

Further, in the integrated control device MC, after the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) displaying cautionary information and reference information before cooking on the integrated display unit 30. ) Is displayed, and then the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the like are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to the input from the input operation unit 40.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 can be effectively used, and the user can be informed of the caution information before cooking.

The specific screen is a first specific screen 30SP for a cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode, and the first specific screen and the second specific screen are on the integrated display unit 30. It was a configuration that was displayed selectively.
Therefore, there is no concern that misunderstandings may occur between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the user-friendliness is good.
..

(9) Part 9:
Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 is pressed, the cooking process information 332 of one cooperative cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and one or more "controls" applied to the menu. The "condition" information (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
Then, the integrated control device MC displays additional information 331 such as guidance for prompting the user's operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. (See FIG. 54).

According to the first embodiment, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by the three types of heating sources, the display screen 30D is used to cook with the heating source by one control menu selected from the cooperative cooking mode group. Since at least three pieces of information such as a process and a user's input operation can be displayed at once, even a compound type cooking cooker equipped with three heating sources can be a convenient cooking cooker.

(10) Part 10:
The integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or the temperature rise from the start time of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in order to detect the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and the first reference information FA1 or The second reference information FA2 was notified.
Therefore, it is possible to ensure the notification operation of the reference information.

(11) Part 11:
The input operation unit 40
(1) IH independent cooking mode selection means 43L, 43R for operating the induction heating source independently, and
(2) A range independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the microwave heating source independently, and
(3) The oven independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the oven heating source independently, and
(4) A combined cooking mode selection means 43M1 for automatically switching and operating both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source at the same time or with a time lag.
(5) The configuration is provided with the cooperative cooking mode selection means 43MC.
Therefore, there is an advantage that each heating source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space of the three heating source selection means (input key or the like).

(12) Part 12:
The input operation unit 40 is a shared operation of the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, which are dedicated operation units of the induction heating source 9, and the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188. It has a unit (central operation unit) of 40M and
The shared operation unit 40M includes a first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the second selection means (input key 43M1), the first specific screen (30SP) for input regarding cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started. ) Is displayed,
When the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the first selection means (input key 43MC), the second specific screen 30SC for input regarding cooking in the combined cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration to be displayed.
Therefore, it is more effective to operate the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 first. Moreover, since different specific screens are displayed, there is no concern that an erroneous operation may occur in the selection between the two types of cooking modes.

(13) Part 13:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, at least one of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. Met. For example, in "manual range" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100W, 200W, and 500W, but the default value is 500W. That is, unless otherwise specified, it is determined to be 500 W.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the input operation of the user and improve the usability.

(14) Part 14:
The end of the cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 and the end of the cooking step 2 were determined by an input operation to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R and left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 determine the timing of starting and stopping the induction heating operation.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the linked cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L and concentrate on the start and end of the induction heating. In other words, it is not necessary to use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L and 40R properly to start and end the cooking process 1, so that the user's operation is not confused.

(15) Part 15:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R). ) Was determined by the user's operation.
Therefore, the heating conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) according to the object to be cooked, the heating form, and the heating source can be set, and the cooking finish can be improved.

(16) Part 16:
The notification unit AN includes a first display unit (31L, 31R) that performs a display operation during the execution period of the IH single cooking mode, an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode, and the integrated display unit 30. Had.
Therefore, especially when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 using a plurality of heating sources, one integrated display unit 30 intensively displays the cooking process, heating conditions, and the like, so attention is focused on the integrated display unit 30. be able to.

(17) Part 17:
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the identification information 330 that identifies a plurality of objects to be cooked is displayed in a certain order on the first specific screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 is sequentially displayed. It was a configuration that could be selected.
Therefore, when the desired cooking (for example, hamburger steak) is performed, the identification information can be sequentially displayed and selected, so that the selection method is simple and the user's operability can be improved.

(18) Part 18:
The combined cooking mode is divided by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see FIGS. 34 and 37).
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, the specific sentence 30J of "warm" and "range manual" in FIG. 49).
Therefore, the user can easily select the control menu.

(19) Part 19:
The reference information acquired from the home gateway 411 by the integrated control device MC via the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 discloses a configuration in which it is information on foodstuffs that can be cooked.
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(20) Part 20:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which the reference information (foodstuff information) is stored in the storage device MM until the cooking of one of the linked cooking modes is completed.
For this reason, it is not necessary for the user to operate the reference information for special recording each time or to write and record the reference information on paper.

(21) Part 21:
The food material information was information held by the refrigerator 401. Further, the food material information includes information on the refrigerating temperature or the freezing temperature of the food material.
Therefore, it can be used as a reference when determining control conditions (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.) when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode with the cooking device 1. You can expect better-finished cooking.

(22) Part 22:
Prior to the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC sends a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 104) requesting the provision of the food material information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 104). Home gateway) It was configured to send to 411.
..
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(23) Part 23:
Before the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411, and further. The notification unit AN notifies that the request for reference information is provided (see FIG. 110).
For this reason, the behavior of the user moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and checking it can be postponed in advance, so that the user's labor can be reduced.

(24) Part 24:
The integrated control device MC was configured to store the cooking execution data in the storage device MM after the completion of the cooking step 2.
Therefore, the user does not need to perform any special operation or write and record the cooking execution data on paper.

(25) Part 25:
The cooking execution data was transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and the cooking execution data was configured to include at least one or more of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (4) The cooking steps 1 to the above Information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information indicating the heating source in which the cooking operation was performed (7) The user at the time of the next cooking Information on restrictions received (8) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber Therefore, in order for the user to record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, special operations or on paper The work of writing and recording can also be eliminated.

(26) Part 26:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which information on the time required until the cooking is completed is stored in the storage device MM after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is completed.
Therefore, in order to record the information of the time required for cooking by the user each time, it is possible to eliminate the need for a special operation or the work of writing and recording on paper.

(27) Part 27:
In the operation management system of the home electric appliance of the first embodiment, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects that there is a person in the space where the cooking cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed. In addition, when the activation information from the cooking device 1 is received, it is determined that the cooking time zone is set, and a command for collecting inventory data to the refrigerator 401 is transmitted (step SD6 in FIG. 103). reference).
Therefore, when the user (resident) is in the vicinity of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking device 1 and there is a high possibility of cooking, the inventory data can be automatically collected, and moreover, during cooking. In addition, the user does not need to perform a special input operation for collecting the data, and useful information can be acquired without any effort, so that a highly convenient operation management system can be realized as a whole.

Embodiment 2.
FIGS. 116 to 126 show a cooking device according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 116 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the (built-in type composite type) cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the cooking device 1. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking device 1 with the top plate removed. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1 with the top plate, the IH coil, and the cover removed. FIG. 121 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the cooking device 1. FIG. 122 is a bottom view (bottom surface) of the upper unit of the cooking device 1. FIG. 123 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device 1. FIG. 124 is an enlarged plan view showing an input operation unit and an integrated display unit of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent control menu. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit in the case of the cooperative cooking mode. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that the suction port for the outside air of the cooking device 1 is added (changed) and the control-related configuration is also changed.

Further, the configuration of the input operation unit 40 is also significantly different from that of the first embodiment. Further, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is carried out, the contents of limiting the operation of the heating source to be used are different.

Further, the operation patterns of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are also significantly different from those in the first embodiment.

The points particularly different from those of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the respective drawings.
FIG. 116 will be described.
The 118 is a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, and may also be referred to as a “reinforcing member” because it also has a purpose of reinforcement.

The connecting member 118 has a shape that covers the lower unit 200 from the right side surface to the lower surface and further to the left side surface in a series.
Although not shown, the connecting member 118 is formed in a series of a left vertical portion 118L that overlaps and is fixed to the left side surface of the front portion of the lower unit 200, and the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. It further has a central flat portion 118M which is formed. The central flat portion 118M is fixed so as to overlap with the lower surface of the bottom plate 101U at the front portion of the lower case 101 in a close contact state.

Next, FIG. 117 will be described.
The mounting portion of the hinge portion 176, which will be described later, has a robust structure that does not cause deformation such as bending even when a load or the like is applied when the door 114 is opened or closed. As a result, the door 114 can be reliably supported when it is opened and closed.
Therefore, even if the cooking chamber 114 is used for a long period of time, the door 114 is in close contact with the front peripheral portion of the opening 114A of the heating chamber 114, the opening 114A can be reliably closed, and a highly safe cooking device without radio wave leakage can be obtained. It has been realized.

In the connecting member 118, one thin metal plate (for example, a plate thickness of 1 mm) is press-processed to form the right vertical portion 118R (not shown), the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L. Is formed integrally.

In FIGS. 116 and 117, the 101RP is a convex portion integrally formed with the lateral vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. This convex portion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the lateral vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also has a certain area protruding outward to form a convex portion 101LP (not shown).

The 116 is a metal arm that supports the door 114 in a horizontal state and pulls the door 114 in the door closing direction when the door 114 is closed. The arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101, and moves in the front-rear direction through the through hole 117. The door structure of the high-frequency heating device using the arm 116 is introduced in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-39541, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-181106, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-218544, and the like. Is omitted.

In FIG. 117, 176 is a pair of hinges provided on the left and right sides, and is fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As a result, the door 114 is rotatably supported by the lower case 101. The hinge 176 is sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U, and is fixed at a plurality of places by a fixing tool (a combination of bolts and nuts, a screw, or the like).

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes with the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 described above are supported from below by a roller (not shown) or a sliding member (not shown) rotatably provided below the back side of the through hole 117, and the door 114 is opened and closed. Occasionally, the arm 116 moves back and forth while in contact with the upper surface of the roller or sliding member.

Further, although not shown, the arm 116 is always pulled toward the inside of the heating cooker 1 by a tension spring, so that the door 114 can be easily opened by the vibration even when it receives a vibration such as an earthquake. There is no such thing (radio wave leakage from the door 114 is blocked during the microwave heating operation).

Reference numeral 112 denotes front covers provided on both the left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200, which are made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a symmetrical shape, and each of the front covers 112 projects to the left and right more than the lateral width of the lower case 101 and is fixed to the lower case 101. When the cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 covers the entire front of the gap (right side gap 301R and left side gap 301L) with the kitchen furniture 2 as much as possible from the front. When visually observed, these gaps 301R and 301L serve to make them inconspicuous.

Reference numeral 198 is a metal support fitting having a length extending over the entire width of the lower case 101. The support metal fitting 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186.

Reference numeral 146 is a box-shaped front operation portion fixed to the front surface (front surface) side of the right front cover 112. The front operation unit 146 is used for microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
The input operation unit 40 includes the front operation unit 146, a central operation unit 40M, a right operation unit 40R, and a left operation unit 40L.

Reference numeral 147 is a display unit provided with a liquid crystal screen, which is arranged on the ceiling surface of the front operation unit 146 so that the user can visually confirm the displayed contents from above when cooking is performed. The front operation unit 146 is not rotated and stored inside the cooking cooker 1 like the operation unit of the conventionally known "kangaroo pocket mechanism", and is always in front of the front cover 112. It is exposed.

On the upper surface of the front operation unit 146, a plurality of touch-type or push-button type input keys (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of the display unit 147. By operating these input keys, it is possible to input control conditions during microwave heating and oven heating, and to command the start and stop of heating operation.

In FIG. 117, reference numeral 145 is a dedicated saucer used inside the heating chamber 113, and is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like. The saucer 145 has external dimensions such that it can be freely taken in and out from the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

Tableware, which is usually made of porcelain or a highly heat-resistant material, is placed on the saucer 145, and the ingredients placed in the tableware are cooked by microwave. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a cooking utensil (heated object) N made of magnetic metal such as a frying pan (not shown) is placed on the top plate 15, and food (for example, hamburger) is induced and heated to some extent on the cooking utensil. After that, the cooking utensil may be moved into the heating chamber 113 and further heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete the cooking (this cooking method is one of the cooperative cooking modes). be).

In FIGS. 116 and 117, 152S1 and 152S2 are auxiliary intake ports composed of a large number of small holes, and are provided at the lower end of the lateral vertical wall 101R constituting the right side surface of the lower case 101. ..

The auxiliary intake port 152S1 is an auxiliary intake port of the intake port (second intake port) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with the outside air.
Similarly, the auxiliary intake port 152S2 is an auxiliary intake port of the intake port (second intake port) 152B for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the outside air. The maximum diameter of these auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 is about 3 mm in consideration of the effect of preventing microwave leakage.

The suction port of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with the outside air is located in the vicinity of the auxiliary intake port 152S1 although not shown. Similarly, the suction port of the fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the outside air is also arranged in the vicinity of the auxiliary intake port 152S2.

Next, FIG. 118 will be described. FIG. 118 shows a state in which the top plate 15 is removed.
30W is a display window, and is formed in the holder 50 in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the integrated display unit 30.

31LW and 31RW are display windows, respectively. This display window is formed in the holder 50 at a position corresponding to the left side display unit 31L and the right side display unit 31R, respectively.

Reference numeral 56 is a choke coil, which is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54. Reference numeral 17C is a coil base (coil support frame), and two IH coils 17L and 17R are placed on the upper surface.

The left IH coil 17L has a maximum external dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This makes it possible to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. Therefore, when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented, when the large metal container or cooking utensil used in the heating chamber 113 (both without a lid) is moved to the left heating unit 17HL as it is and heated, the left It can be efficiently heated by the heating unit 17HL.

Alternatively, when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented, after heating a large area or a large number of objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, the objects to be cooked are transferred to a large metal container or cooking utensil, and the left heating unit 17HL Even when heating on the top, it can be efficiently heated by the left heating unit 17HL. For this reason, in the second embodiment, there is a reason for wanting to occupy the left heating unit 17HL for the cooperative cooking mode. The IH coil 17R on the right side has the same diameter as that of the first embodiment and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally formed of a highly heat-resistant plastic material. Further, the coil base 17C is circular as a whole according to the shapes of the IH coils 17L and 17R, but is provided with a plurality of arms 17CH extending radially from the center. In the second embodiment, the number of arms 17CH is eight. A gap that becomes a large ventilation space is formed between each arm 17CH.

17F is a ferrite plate installed one by one between two adjacent arms 17CH. In the IH coil 17L on the left side, the TS3 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
One temperature sensor TS3 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS3 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17L, slightly away from the center of the IH coil 17L.

The TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. In the IH coil 17R on the right side, the TS4 is a contact type temperature sensor like a thermistor. One temperature sensor TS4 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS4 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17R, slightly away from the center of the IH coil 17R.

The TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. The measurement data from each of these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 is input to the temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing unit) 93. These temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 may be referred to as "first temperature sensors".

In FIG. 118, reference numeral 66 denotes a magnetic shield ring made of metal such as aluminum, which is fixed to the coil base 17C so as to surround the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.
41R is a right-hand touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 of the first embodiment. 41L is a left touch key board that also corresponds to the operation board 41. These two touch key substrates 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50.

Next, FIG. 119 will be described.
Reference numeral 57 is a transformer, which is one of the important electrical components in the power supply circuit board 55. In FIG. 119, the left end portion of the cover 70 is notched within the range of the width dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by the coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is arranged in this notched portion. That is, the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 are notched so as not to come into contact with each other.

Next, FIG. 120 will be described. Reference numeral 58 is a capacitor, which is one of the important electrical components in the inverter circuit board 80.
As is clear from FIG. 120, there are two aluminum heat sinks 82 on the left and right (two rows) and two on the front and back, so there are a total of four heat sinks 82. Two of the four heat sinks 82 are installed so as to face each other in close proximity to each other in the front and rear. Reference numeral 59 is a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82. In the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59, the heat generated during operation is dissipated by the heat sink 82, and the heat sink does not become overheated.

As is clear from FIG. 120, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are separated by a distance LD of about 50 to 100 mm.
Next, FIG. 121 shows the flow of cooling air in the configuration shown in FIG. 120. The cooling air is indicated by a thick arrow.

Next, FIG. 122 is a bottom view (bottom surface) of the upper unit 100. D5 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper unit 100, which is 432 mm. W4 is the maximum width dimension in the left-right direction of the upper unit 100, which is 544 mm.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions (maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions inside) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are such that the upper case 16 is inward in consideration of the maximum width dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper case 16 described above. It is set to a size that fits.

Structurally, since it is configured as described above, when induction heating is performed in the upper unit 100, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling are performed as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 121. The inverter circuit board 80, the input operation unit 40, the power supply circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54 are each cooled by the cooling air RF1, RF2, RF3, and RF4 blown from the fan 61.

Next, FIG. 123 will be described.
FIG. 123 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device 1. In FIG. 123, the arrow shown by the broken line indicates a command signal for control.
In the cooking device 1 showing the second embodiment, there are a total of six control devices mainly composed of a microcomputer. This point is significantly different from the first embodiment.

Among the above-mentioned six control devices, the integrated control device MC controls the entire control of the cooking device 1. It is the IH control unit 90 that controls the induction cooking in response to the command from the integrated control device MC. Further, it is the control device 105 that controls both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This control device 105 is an assembly of the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 described in the first embodiment.

The two control devices 90 and 105 described above perform predetermined control according to a command from the integrated control device MC, and return the processing result to the integrated control device MC, so that they may be called a slave (SLAVE) microcomputer. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the above-mentioned six control devices will be described below.
The first is a right-hand input control device 23 that processes the input of the right-hand touch key group arranged in the right-hand operation unit 40R and the display of the display unit 31R in the input operation unit 40. The right side input control device 23 further processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M.

The second is the left input control device 24 arranged in the left operation unit 40L, which processes the input of the left touch key group and the display of the display unit 31L.
The third is the power switch control device 28.
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation unit) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation unit 40, and determines ON / OFF of the power supply.

In FIG. 123, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (alternating current) power supply 99. Power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is guided to the filter circuit board 54 via the power cord 106. The filter circuit board 54 is built in the upper unit 100.

The right-hand input control device 23 is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
The right side input control device 23 transmits the input signal of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M to the integrated control device MC.

As described in the first embodiment, whether or not a specific input key (one or more) other than the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is "long-pressed" is determined by the integrated control device MC. That is, when the signal from the touch time to the non-touch time of the touch key group is transmitted to the integrated control device MC in the right input control device 23, the duration of the touch by the integrated control device MC is measured and "long press". It is determined whether or not it is.

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 for turning on and off the main power of the cooking cooker 1 and a sub-relay (not shown). FIG. 1233 schematically shows only the main relay.

The main relay 107 receives a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1 and executes an opening / closing operation. As will be described later, the sub-relay receives a relay control signal from the power switch control device 28 and executes an opening / closing operation. The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining ON / OFF of the power supply. The main power switch 97 is composed of the main relay 107 and the sub relay.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operation information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right side input control device 23, the left side input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates and processes them. To determine and control.

The integrated control device MC controls the display operation of the central operation unit 40M, the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesizer 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. The integrated control device MC, the right side input control device 23, and the power switch control device 28 are attached to the central operation board 32 constituting the input operation unit 40.

The right operation board 32R (not shown) and the left operation board 32L (not shown) are mounted on the lower surface side of the holder 50. Therefore, it does not appear in FIGS. 118 to 121.
The central operation board 32 is composed of a right side operation board 32R and a left side operation board 32L, and an integrated control device MC, a right side input control device 23, and a right side display unit 31R are mounted on the right side operation board 32R. The two operation boards 32L and 32L are made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation. The left side input control device 24 and the left side display unit 31L are mounted on the left side operation board 32L (see FIG. 123).

Above the central operation board 32 and in front of the holder 50, a pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L and 41R on which various touch-type input keys are mounted are installed.

Reference numeral 55 denotes a power supply circuit board to which power of a commercial power source is supplied from the filter circuit 54, and as shown in FIG. 123, the power supply circuit A34 and the rectifying circuit 35 to which the power is applied via the rectifying circuit 33 It is provided with a power supply circuit B36, to which electric power is applied via the power supply circuit B36. The two power supply circuits A34 and the power supply circuit B36 convert the power of 200V into a plurality of low voltage direct currents such as 24V, 18V, 6V, 5V and the like. That is, a plurality of DC power supplies having different voltages are generated.

The 5V electric power is supplied as a power source for the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right side input control device 23, the left side input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28.
Further, the 6V electric power is used as a power source (including a backlight power source) for the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the electric power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 is used as a power source for control in the upper unit 100 and various display units. It is used.

Reference numeral 80 is an inverter circuit board of the induction heating source 9 installed inside the upper unit 100.
The inverter circuit board 80 includes a right-hand inverter circuit 81R having a DC power supply unit 75R and a left-side inverter circuit 81L having another DC power supply unit 75L.

From the filter circuit 54, AC power having a voltage of 200 V is applied to the inverter circuit board 80. Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls overall induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control unit 90 transmits a drive signal to the drive circuits 37L and 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a and 79b in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. The two drive circuits 37L and 37R operate with the power of 18V supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a and 79. As a result, the drive frequencies of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are controlled.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R and reduce the thermal power. Or, conversely, control is performed to increase the driving frequency and increase the thermal power. These drive frequency commands are issued from the IH control unit 90.

77a is an input current detection unit installed on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and 77b is an output current detection unit that detects the power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.
The detection values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH control unit 90.

In the initial stage during induction heating, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the drive frequency is changed from one drive frequency to another, the change in the input current value is observed to determine whether the material of the object to be heated such as a pot is magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, or the like. Then, the drive frequencies of the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are automatically adjusted to appropriate values. When it is determined that the material of the object to be heated is non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a drive frequency (for example, 31 kHz) higher than the drive frequency (for example, 23 kHz) when it is determined to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R. Further, TS8 and TS9 are contact type temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80. The temperature detection data of each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC.

In the first embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 is provided, but in the second embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 in such a hardware form is not provided. Processing such as temperature detection, temperature comparison, and presence / absence of abnormality is executed by the software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door open / close detection mechanism. The door open / close detection mechanism 131 includes one switch that is opened / closed according to the opening / closing operation of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects that the switch is correctly opened / closed. This point is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

The 120P is a power supply circuit unit of the microwave heating device 120, and generates AC power as a low voltage (for example, 24V and 5V) power source from the power of the commercial voltage (200V) supplied from the filter circuit 54.

The electric power having a voltage of 5 V is supplied as a power source for the control device 105, and the electric power of 24 V is supplied to the drive circuit 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 123, 200 V of electric power is supplied to the drive power source of the antenna drive motor 126.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B that heat the heating chamber 113 are controlled to be energized by opening and closing the relays 178A and 178B by the control device 105. The relays 178A and 178B may use a semiconductor switching element capable of finely controlling the energization rate, but in the second embodiment, the relay is adopted because it only controls ON-OFF. The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are operated by applying the same voltage of 200V as the commercial power supply.

The 132M is a door opening detection switch that constitutes a part of the door opening / closing detection mechanism 131. The switch itself is installed inside the door open / close detection mechanism 131, but in FIG. 123, it is drawn at a different position to show that the open / close signal is input to the control device 105.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact type (temperature) that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120. It is a sensor.

The TS10 is a contact type sensor such as a thermistor, and is installed on the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 113, the internal space of the exhaust duct 102, or the wall surface thereof. For example, it is installed on the outer ceiling portion of the entrance portion of the exhaust duct 102 near the back surface of the heating chamber 113.
The temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only during cooking in which the oven heating source 188 is driven, but also during the operation of cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (for example, thawing of frozen food).

The temperature detection data of the temperature sensors 160, TS1 and TS10 are all input to the control device 105.

The 121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. The relay 182 is opened and closed by the control device 105.

60P and 61P are drive circuits for driving the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. The drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to a command from the IH control unit 90.

In FIG. 123, a temperature sensor for monitoring the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40 is not shown in the upper space 300A, but such a temperature sensor is actually installed and during cooking. , The integrated control device MC constantly acquires the temperature measurement data (at regular time intervals) and monitors it so that the temperature does not become abnormal.

As described above, the temperature detection data of the various temperature sensors 160, TS1 and TS10 that measure the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the object to be cooked are all input to the control device 105, and thus the temperature described in the first embodiment. The measurement unit 158 is not provided in the second embodiment. The function of the temperature measuring unit 158 is realized by a computer program of the control device 105.

Since the cooking device 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed in order to first turn on the main power switch 97. For example, if it is held down for a few seconds, the power switch control device 28 detects this operation and closes the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54.

Therefore, the power of the commercial power supply is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. Then, a power supply having a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and is applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the start of the heating operation, and confirms that no abnormality has occurred. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 in order to use the microwave heating device 120, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 to the control device 105. Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC presumes that the user performs microwave heating cooking, displays necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts an input for starting heating.

When the user puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 again transmits a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. do. Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects the presence / absence of touch input of the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

Also in the second embodiment, in the combined cooking mode KM2, the microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the food is heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and vice versa. There are three types of patterns: microwave heating and heater heating at the same time.

In addition, the control menus of the independent cooking mode KM1 for microwave heating and oven heating for heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B can also be executed.
Further, as will be described later, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can also be executed.

Generally, it is common practice to put the food to be cooked in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware and heat it with microwaves. There is a risk that the container, tableware, etc. will be burnt out due to high heat.

In the combined cooking mode KM2, a caution message indicating that a plastic container is placed inside the heating chamber 113 and not heated is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. That is, when executing the control menu called "range grill", this caution display statement is a kind of "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the "warm" (automatic range) control menu, the control device 105 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically microwaves when the target temperature is reached. Stop the oscillation. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits the automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the user is notified to select the control menu (single cooking) of "microwave oven manual". Since the "microwave oven manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, even if the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, cooking can be performed without any problem. The display text displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is also one of the “standby common information” 30N described in the first embodiment.

When the heating start command is issued from the user through the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A. Start microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the drive circuits 177A and 177B of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, and the operation of the two cooling fans 128 and 129 is started. Further, although not shown in FIG. 123, the antenna driving motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125. As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to cook the food.

As is clear from the above explanation, during the period of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not in "non-normal" (during abnormal overheating). , Not driven at all. Therefore, the power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 can be suppressed to a low level.

As is clear from the above description, in the heating cooker 1 of the second embodiment, the upper unit 100 includes an IH control unit 90 for controlling the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and an oven. A control device 105 that controls both of the heating sources 188 and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105 are provided.
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from the commercial power supply 99, and power supply circuits (34, 36) that convert the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage.
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as a power source.
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are the filter circuit 54 and the power supply circuit 34. It is a configuration in which the electric power (200V power supply) distributed from the 36 is applied.

With this configuration, the overall power supply configuration of the cooking cooker 1 is simplified, and reliable operation can be expected by suppressing the propagation of unnecessary noise.

Further, according to this configuration, one cooking device can perform three types of heating, induction heating, microwave heating and oven heating, and is a highly convenient cooking device capable of supporting a wide range of cooking.

Next, FIG. 123 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation unit 40 and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1. In the second embodiment, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS and 43MT in the cooperative cooking mode, respectively. Each of these input keys is an input key of a method that can be input by utilizing the change in capacitance when the user lightly touches it with a finger or the like. The input key corresponding to the input key 43M3 described in the first embodiment is not provided.

In the second embodiment, the input operation unit 40 includes four units, a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit 40M, a left operation unit 40L, and the front operation unit 146. Although not shown, the operation key (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the upper surface of the main body 110 and the top plate 15 as in the central operation unit 40M, as in the first embodiment. It is located on the front side of the top plate 15 and near the right end of the top plate 15.

The right operation unit 40R is an individual operation unit because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source. Similarly, the left operation unit 40 is also an individual operation unit.
On the other hand, a part of the central operation unit 40M is commonly used when the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is performed. The operation unit 40MC.

In the first embodiment, the input operation of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 was performed in the central operation unit 40M, but in the second embodiment, the function is possessed by the front operation unit 146. is doing.

In FIG. 124, the 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of the heating operation by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at the time of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 using the heating chamber 113. This input-type key 43MS is slightly different from the function of the input-type key 43MS of the first embodiment, and has two functions of starting and stopping cooking.

When the user presses the input key 43MS once, a command signal for starting the heating operation is transmitted to the integrated control device MC, and when the user presses the key 43MS once more, a command signal for stopping the heating operation is transmitted. Different signals are transmitted according to the number of operations in this order. This point is different from the input key 43MS of the first embodiment.

The screen configuration of the integrated display unit 30 is also slightly different from that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two areas, a first area (left side area) 30L and a second area (center area) 30M.

The reason for limiting to the two areas 30L and 30M in this way is that the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the first area 30L, and the additional information 331 is displayed in the second area 30M. This is because the cooking process information (cooking process information unit) 332 is displayed.

The 43MC is not an input key that selects to use the combined cooking mode KM2 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. The input key 43MC is an input key for selecting only the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Since the input key 43MC itself illuminates, the individual light emitting unit 27M2 provided in the first embodiment is omitted in the second embodiment.

FIG. 124 will continue to be described.
FIG. 124 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 53 of the first embodiment.
An input key 43M1 is arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 provided in the central operation unit 40M.
The input key 43M1 is touched when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. A push button type switch may be used instead of the touch type key.

The input key 43MC appears to be illuminated and illuminated during the period of transition to the cooperative cooking mode by a light source (not shown) such as a light emitting diode installed below.

The pair of input keys 43M1 is the target identification information 330, in other words, the object to be cooked, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is carried out from among the plurality of identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. It is an input key to select. The touch key part is a pair on the left and right.
Each time the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed, the display contents can be switched in a fixed order. Further, each time the input key 43M1 on the right side is pressed, the display screen can be switched in the reverse order.

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source. It is a figure which shows that the operation of the heating source used is limited in the case of cooperative cooking.
The linked cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 125 is the “second linked cooking mode” described in FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.

In the "second cooperative cooking mode" of this case, the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means HM2) is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 is used as the first heating means HM1. Make it work. At the same time as the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, which is one of the second heating means HM2, may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 125, the second cooperative cooking mode is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is a period from the operation of the input key 43MC to the start of cooking by the input key 43MS in order to execute the cooperative cooking mode.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189).
Since P3 switches from cooking by the second heating means HM2 to cooking by the first heating means HM1 (in this case, the induction heating source 9), the operation of the microwave heating means 189 is temporarily stopped, and the induction heating means 9 is used. It is a rest period until the cooking of.
P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9.

As is clear from FIG. 125, the input is not at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. From the time when the start of cooking is determined by the key 43MS, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable. Further, the input operation of the front operation unit 146 is also restricted.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) Among the input signals from the front operation unit 147, the signal for selecting the control menu such as "warm" is invalidated. As a result, even in the cooking period (cooking step 1), the front operation unit 146 can be used, but only two inputs, "stop" and "heating start", can be made. Then, using the heating chamber 113, cooking that is substantially unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode cannot be performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The heating power (power consumption) at the time of heating the oven may be increased or decreased so that it can be performed by the input key (not shown) on the front operation unit 146.
(2) Perform processing that does not recognize the input signal from the left operation unit 40L as a valid signal. As a result, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the left operation unit 40L cannot be used. Then, induction heating cooking cannot be performed in the left heating unit 17HL. It should be noted that it can be used in the right heating unit 17HR.

In this way, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the integrated control device MC disables the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 freely.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of being "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Further, when viewed from the whole of the induction heating source 9, the use of only a part (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted".

Further, the function of the front operation unit 147 is "restricted" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, when the "cooking step 1" of the cooperative cooking mode is started, neither the single cooking mode KM1 nor the combined cooking mode KM3 using the individual heating sources can be executed by using the front operation unit 146. Become a state.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is completed, the restricted state is released, so that the front operation unit 147 can be operated to execute the independent cooking mode. However, after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, it is restricted to operate the front operation unit 146 as it is to start the independent cooking mode. The reason is that the object to be cooked heated by the cooperative cooking mode exists in the heating chamber 113.

Therefore, only when the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 is opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the integrated control device MC can perform microwave heating from the front operation unit 147. In response to the command to start cooking in the oven, cooking is started.

Even when the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 is opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is completed, the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value. There is a concern that the integrated control device MC and the control device 105 mistakenly recognize an abnormally high temperature as cooking completion even before the single cooking mode is executed.
Therefore, even after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the control menu of "range automatic" in the control menu cannot be immediately executed. Range manual control menus can be implemented. Therefore, another cooking (for example, thawing and warming "frozen rice") can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in parallel with the execution of the cooking step 2.

Next, FIG. 126 will be described.
FIG. 126 shows the display contents of the cooperative operation unit 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking provided in the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.
The integrated display unit 30 shows three types of display screens 11A to 11C.

The cooperative cooking mode KM3 implemented in FIG. 126 corresponds to both the “first cooperative cooking mode” and the “second cooperative cooking mode” described in FIG. 55 of the first embodiment.
Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the case of the "first cooperative cooking mode" will be described. That is, it is a case where the first cooking step is performed by the induction heating source 9.

When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the right side input control device 23 that processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M transmits the input result to the integrated control device MC.
The integrated control device MC grasps the usage state of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR from the information of the IH control unit 90, and sets “permission condition 1” and “permission condition” 2 as described in the first embodiment. First determine if it meets.

When both the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR are not used, it is confirmed by the integrated control device MC that the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied.
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30SP.

The display screen 11C of FIG. 126 is the screen that is first displayed through the above process.
That is, the name "hamburger" is displayed in the first area 30L as the identification information 330.
At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP integrated display unit 30, that is, at the first stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit are displayed. Both selection marks 334L are displayed. This is because both the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR can be used as described above.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the default setting, the left heating unit 17HL is prioritized. This is because the left heating unit 17HL uses the IH coil 17 having a larger diameter than the right heating unit 17HL. That is, it is possible to deal with the object N to be heated at the bottom of the pot, which is larger than the right heating unit 17HR.

For this reason, the left heating unit selection mark 334L displayed with "left" and white characters is selected.
If it is okay to shift to the cooperative cooking mode in the state of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43MS surrounded by a dotted circle may be pressed to prompt the input operation. The dotted circle indicates that the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

As shown in FIG. 126, the first specific screen 30SP provides the user with additional information 331 regarding the start of cooperative cooking of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak). In the example of FIG. 126, it is recommended to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user wants to determine the cooperative cooking mode by using the right heating unit 17HR instead of the left heating unit 17HL, he / she may touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the input key 43M2 on the right side of the two left and right key operation units is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11C to 11B.

On the display screen 11B, the left heating unit selection mark 334L disappears, and only the right heating unit selection mark 334R is displayed, for example, as a white character "right". Even at this point, since the input key 43MS is in a state of waiting for input from the user, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

As the additional information 331, for example, "determine with the start button" is displayed. This means that the linked cooking mode is determined by the input key 43MS. That is, the heating source to be used first can be determined in the right heating unit 17HR.

When the user wants to determine the cooperative cooking mode by using the left heating unit 17HL instead of the right heating unit 17HR, he / she may touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 is touched among the two left and right input keys 43M2, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11B to 11A.

On the display screen 11A, the right heating unit selection mark 334R disappears, and only the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed, for example, as a white character "left". Even at this point, since the input key 43MS is in a state of waiting for input from the user, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking. As the additional information 331, for example, "determine with the start button" is displayed.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking utensil 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is
On the top plate 15, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked, and
A second heating means HM2 provided with a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and the like.
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
The input operation unit (central operation unit 40M, front operation unit 146) 40 is provided.
The integrated control device MC includes a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means H1 independently.
The combined cooking mode KM2, which automatically advances the cooking process by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources of the second heating means HM2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 having the cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. And
In the single cooking mode KM1, the control pattern of the first heating means HM1 is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating operation is started by determining the heating source to be used and the control pattern in the second heating means HM2.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the object to be cooked is determined by the input means, and the heating operation is started.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means HM1 and HM2. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking utensil 1 disclosed in the second embodiment is
The heating chamber 113 and
Integrated display unit 30 and
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber 113.
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113,
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the command of the input operation unit 40 is provided.
The integrated control device MC has an independent cooking mode KM1 for operating the first heating means HM1 independently, a cooking process using the first heating means HM1, and cooking using the second heating means HM2. It has a function to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines the processes.
When the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC automatically displays the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46) on the integrated display unit 30, and during the period during which the standby initial screen is displayed. ,
(1) When the first command is received, at least one identification information 330 of the object to be cooked that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
(2) When the second command is received before the first command is received, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking of the single cooking mode KM1 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In the second embodiment, with respect to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the effects as described in the first embodiment can be expected.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 127 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking for disclosing the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a time chart 1 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 130 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 131 is a time chart 4 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. FIG. 132 is a time chart 5 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 127. The same or corresponding parts as those described in the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 127, the start of operation of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is basically the same timing as the start of cooking.

As shown in FIG. 127, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are operated in the following pattern.
Induction heating:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.
Microwave cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated.
Oven cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 is operated.
The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated.

As described above, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in any of the three cooking modes of induction heating cooking, microwave heating cooking, and oven heating cooking.

In the case of microwave cooking, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated, which is different from the first embodiment.
Even in the case of microwave cooking, the purpose of operating the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is to prevent overheating of the upper unit 100.

The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 and a power supply circuit board 55, and electronic components (for example, a transformer 57) mounted on these circuit boards have either microwave heating or oven heating. Even in the case, power is supplied and the temperature rises.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

In the case of oven cooking, the third cooling fan 128 is operated. This is the same as the first embodiment.
However, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate. This point is different from the first embodiment. In the case of oven cooking, the magnetron 122, which is the cooling target of the fourth cooling fan 129, is not driven, so that the heat radiating portion 122H does not become hot.

The operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is started when each heating source starts the heating operation. If the induction heating source 9 starts the preheating operation, the operation is started in synchronization with the start of the preheating operation.

The timing of the end of operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is partially different as described below because the cooling target and the cooling air passage of each cooling fan are different.

Next, FIGS. 128 to 132 will be described.
The solid arrows in FIGS. 128 to 132 indicate the period from the start to the end of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129.
The dashed arrow following the solid line indicates the "additional operating time for heat dissipation" described below. The cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are not actually stopped once at the end of the solid line arrow, and the operation is continued as it is for the additional operation time.

In the third embodiment, the time from the start to the end of the operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: The operation is started at the timing when the heating operation by each heating source is started.
At the end of the operation, in the case of induction heating cooking, the heat dissipation operation is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is completed. In this case, the "heat dissipation time Th1" is determined in consideration of the time during which the high heat portion such as the top plate 15 during induction heating cooking can be cooled.
During induction heating, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" depends on the length of the heating operation time and the size of the numerical value determined by the "product" of the maximum thermal power (power consumption of the inverter circuit) used. One of the three stages of 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes is selected. This is done by the IH control unit 90.
On the other hand, during microwave cooking and oven cooking, the first cooling fan 60 starts the heat dissipation operation from the time when the heating operations are completed.

Second cooling fan 61: “Time of heat dissipation operation Th2” is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is performed by the operation start command and the operation end command from the IH control unit 90. The operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "heat dissipation operation" is performed for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" is fixed in 3 minutes. This operation control is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven heating: Since the microwave oscillating unit 122 is not driven, the heat radiating unit 122H does not become hot either. Therefore, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave cooking: “Time of heat dissipation operation Tm1” is the same as that of the fourth cooling fan 129. Further, the start and end of the operation are controlled by the microwave heating control unit 130 as in the case of the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven heating: The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured repeatedly by at least one of the temperature sensor TS2 and the temperature sensor 160 at regular time intervals, and the outside temperature of the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is measured. You may add a thermistor type temperature sensor or the like that measures by contact (see the temperature sensor TS10 described with reference to FIG. 123 of the third embodiment).
All temperature measurement data is transmitted to the control device 105. Eventually, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to operate until an operation end command is issued to the fourth cooling fan 129. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" changes from time to time.

Next, each cooking mode will be described.
FIG. 128 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are started to operate at the same time, finish the microwave heating operation, and are operated until after the time when the notification 6 is performed by the notification unit AN. The "time of heat dissipation operation Th1" and "Th2" are counted at least from the time when the microwave heating is completed.

As can be seen from FIG. 128, in the case of microwave cooking, the “heat dissipation operation time Tm2” of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be longer than the “radiation operation time Tm1” of the third cooling fan 128. This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). That is, when microwave cooking is performed once, hot air remains in the heating chamber 113, and it takes time to cool it to a normal temperature.

In FIG. 128, notification 1 notifies that induction heating cooking has started. Alternatively, it informs that the preheating operation has started.
The notification FA1 is notification of the first reference information (reference information 1) described in the first embodiment (FIG. 61). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN1" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rising temperature TN1" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA1 also includes urging the user to turn over the food to be cooked. Since the IH control unit 90 does not determine that the food to be cooked is abnormal when the food to be cooked is turned inside out in the food to be heated N (for example, a metal pan), the induction heating operation continues.

The notification 3 notifies that the induction heating has been completed (or that the cooking step 1 has been completed).
The “transition period” (heating rest period) TR shown in FIG. 128 is the same as that described in the first embodiment.
After performing the induction cooking on the top plate 15, it is necessary to move the object to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 in order to shift to microwave heating.

The transition period TR provides time for such movements. The maximum time of this transition period TR is predetermined by the integrated controller MC.

The notification 4 notifies that the microwave heating cooking has started because the user has commanded by the central operation unit 40M.
At substantially the same time as this notification 4, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started.

The notification FA2 is notification of the second reference information (reference information 2) described in the first embodiment (FIG. 61). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN2" that 3 minutes have passed since the start of microwave heating and the "rising temperature TN2" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

The notification 6 notifies that the microwave heating has been completed (or that the cooking step 2 has been completed).

Next, FIG. 129 will be described.
FIG. 129 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the operation of the microwave heating source 189 is started.

The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time as the operation of the microwave heating source 189 is started.
The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 ends after the lapse of "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" from the end of the operation of the microwave heating source 189 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the microwave heating operation (cooking step 1) is completed. While the operation is continued, the operation is performed until after the time when the heating operation (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking step 2) is completed.

In FIG. 129, the notification FA3 is the same as the notification of the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN3" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rising temperature TN3" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, the notification FA5 is the same as the notification of the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN4" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rising temperature TN4" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA4 also includes urging the user to turn over the object to be cooked (during the induction heating in the cooking step 2).

Next, FIG. 130 will be described.
FIG. 130 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the operation of the oven heating source 188 is started.

The operation of the third cooling fan 128 is started at the same time as the operation of the oven heating source 188 is started.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 ends after the lapse of "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" from the end of the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the oven heating operation (cooking step 1) is completed. While the operation is continued, the cooking process 2 is operated until after the time when the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all during the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1). It is not operated even in cooking process 2.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking step 2) is completed. In FIG. 130, for the fourth cooling fan 129, the period from the notification 1 to the notification 3 is indicated by a broken line arrow. This indicates that he has not been driving during this period.

In FIG. 130, the notification FA6 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 61 and 64). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN6" that 5 minutes have passed since the heating chamber 113 started heating and the "rising temperature TN6" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 129, the notification FA7 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 60 and 63). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN7" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rising temperature TN7" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA7 includes urging the user to turn over the food to be cooked, and further, the cooking step 2 will be completed soon (notice).

Next, FIG. 131 will be described.
FIG. 131 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Although the heating operation time of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 will be described in the case where they are exactly the same, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Further, the operation of the two heating sources does not have to end at the same timing.

The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the start of the cooking step 1.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time as the start of the cooking step 1.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 ends after the lapse of "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" and "radiation operation time Tm2" from the end of the cooking process 1, respectively.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the cooking step 1 is completed. While the operation is continued, the cooking process 2 is operated until after the time when the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and the "heat dissipation operation time Th2" have elapsed from the time when the cooking step 2 is completed.

In FIGS. 131 and 132, the notification FA8 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 62 and 64). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN8" that 5 minutes have passed since the heating chamber 113 started heating and the "rising temperature TN8" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 131 and FIG. 132 described later, the notification FA9 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 62 and 64). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN9" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rising temperature TN9" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA9 includes not only notification of the temperature and elapsed time, but also that the cooking step 2 will be completed soon (notice).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated slower than the third cooling fan 128.
This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). That is, when the oven is cooked once, the heating chamber 113 is continuously heated for up to 60 minutes.
Therefore, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (for example, 200 ° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, it is assumed that the heating chamber 113 is high from the beginning when microwave heating is performed immediately next time.
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the microwave heating source 189 cannot be used to cook "warm (automatic range)" as described in the first embodiment. This is because the "warm" control menu employs a control in which microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80 ° C (default value). Therefore, in order not to cause confusion for the user, for example, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is 80 ° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform error processing so as not to accept cooking. Alternatively, the notification unit AN may notify that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is being lowered by operating the cooling fan 129.

In the above explanation, the explanation is based on the premise that the amount of air blown (air blowing capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but during cooking, the amount of air blown is increased to dissipate heat. In some cases, changes may be made such as reducing the amount of air blown. Further, when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when the temperature is high, the capacity variable operation may be performed so as to reduce the amount of air blown.

The "control program" that realizes the operating time (operation start, operation stop) and the operating conditions for determining the operation time (operation start, operation stop) of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 is the IH control unit 90 and the microwave heating control. It is not limited to the form stored in the unit 130 or the like (see FIG. 30 of the first embodiment). For example, it may be collectively stored in the integrated control device MC as a blast control program. Further, as in the second embodiment, the control device 105 may control the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

As is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 3, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the third embodiment, four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 were operated as follows.
(1) Four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 were operated during all cooking operations (cooking steps) by the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188.
(2) In the case of only the heating operation by the microwave generation source 122, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated. rice field.
(3) In the case of the independent heating operation of only the oven heating source 188, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth. The cooling fan 129 was in operation.
(4) One control menu (RG continuous cooking) is executed by designating an operation in which only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the heating operation by the oven heating source 188 are automatically executed in sequence. During the period, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 were operated.
(3) The input operation unit 40 operates the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 during a period in which only the heating operation by the IH coil 17 is specified and one control menu is executed. Moreover, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not operate.

According to such a configuration, when the user selects one cooking menu or control menu and starts cooking, various cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are completed when the induction heating or the microwave heating is completed. The operation is smoothly shifted from the end of the heating cooking (cooking process) to the heat dissipation operation mode without causing a situation in which the operation is temporarily stopped and the operation is restarted.

(Modified Example of Embodiment 3)
FIG. 132 shows a modified example of the time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the cooling fan of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 126 to 130.

FIG. 132 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative heating cooking. Although the heating operation time of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 will be described in the case where they are exactly the same, one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Further, the heating operations of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have to end at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 132, this example is characterized in that the transition period TR is notified of the "tenth reference information" FA10 by the notification unit AN.

The tenth reference information FA10 can acquire the recommended information 338 described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 113 to 114). In particular, it is the notification information corresponding to step SG7 in FIG. 112. Therefore, the individual food ingredient information 339 that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 can be known in the integrated display unit 30.

The timing for acquiring the tenth reference information FA10 is during the transition period FR, as shown in FIG. 132. That is, since neither the cooking step 1 nor the cooking step 2 is executed, during this transition period, when the input key 47 arranged in the input operation unit 40 is pressed, the reference information FA10 is heated by the cooker 1. May be set to be acquired.

Alternatively, the voice synthesizer 95 may guide the user to press a specific input key in the central operation unit 40M, and when the input key is pressed, the tenth reference information FA10 may be acquired. .. Further, even if the user does not give any command, the reference information FA10 may be automatically notified after the integrated control device MC enters the transition period TR to further reduce the burden on the user.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 3, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the third embodiment, after the cooking step 1 is completed, during the transition period TR, another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (in parallel with the cooking step 2). Information on ingredients used for "another cooking" can be notified according to a user's command or automatically (see FA10 in FIG. 132).

Therefore, for example, in a state where one cooking A in the cooperative control mode has entered the stage of the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, in the heating chamber 113, cooking different from the cooking is performed. B can be executed at the same time. That is, when cooking A is a side dish in one meal and cooking B is a staple food (for example, rice), cooking A is not a method of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A, but cooking A in parallel. And cooking B can be completed. As a result, the entire cooking time can be shortened, and the convenience of the user is improved.

In the third embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 having the following configuration is disclosed.
That is,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started to be driven with a time lag, and the micro. It has a function of performing a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and when the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 is terminated, a time point prior to the termination or termination thereof. At a later time, the notification unit notifies that cooking different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed using the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 (acquisition of reference information FA10). do,
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode. It is possible to provide a high-quality cooking device.

Further, when the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 is completed, it is notified that the cooking chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used to perform cooking different from the cooperative cooking mode. For this reason, it can be expected that cooking can be performed efficiently by notifying the user of the time-saving cooking that the user does not notice, and the convenience of the user is improved.

Further, in the third embodiment (FIGS. 128 to 132), the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 capable of performing a preheating step for the object N to be heated for accommodating the object to be cooked.
It has a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and has.
It has a cooperative control mode KM3 that switches between the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 by a user's operation.
When the cooperative control mode KM3 is set, the cooking step 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the object to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113, and the top after the cooking step 1 is completed. It is possible to reserve the cooking step 2 in which the cooked object is induced to be heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on the plate.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative control mode KM3 is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source to finish the cooking step 1,
The cooking step 2 is started (in response to a start command from the user) on the object to be heated N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by a cooperative cooking mode that can also perform preheating operation. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, the user is automatically notified of the information indicating the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Therefore, by temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation in the middle of the cooking process, it is possible to avoid a failure such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking.

According to the third embodiment, it is expected that the user's sense of security and usability will be further improved even though the cooking cooker 1 has an increased number of types of heating sources.

Further, in the third embodiment (FIGS. 127 to 132), the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
When a reservation for cooking in the linked control mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber 113 by the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M).
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M) are preheated without being operated by the user. The cooking step 2 can be started by placing the cooking object on the heated object N.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking by the cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used and the preheating operation can be performed. ..

Further, in order to automatically notify the user of information indicating the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, the user's anxiety is dispelled, or the heating operation is temporarily stopped for confirmation on the way. , It is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Further, the preheating step of the induced heating source is started before the cooking step 1, and during this preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended by the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M), and the cooking step 1 The preheating process is completed by induced heating without operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M). The cooking step 2 can be started by using the heated product N. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the input operation of the user and provide an easy-to-use cooking cooker.

Further, in the third embodiment, the notification unit AN displays a dedicated input screen (first specific screen) 30SP for setting the cooking by the cooperative cooking mode.
The preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are displayed on the input screen 30SP in the order in which they are executed.
The cooker characterized by this was disclosed.

With this configuration, the input screen 30SP allows the user to easily understand the process of linked cooking, and it is possible to prevent the user from getting lost or making a mistake in the operation. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Embodiment 4.
FIGS. 133 to 136 show a (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus according to the fourth embodiment of the present disclosure.
FIG. 133 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking device. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing information exchange between the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIG. 133 and an external information management device or the like in chronological order. FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 30L in the cooking device of FIG. 133. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 30L in the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIG. 133. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the cooking cooker 1 shown in the fourth embodiment, there are three display units arranged on the upper surface of the main body 10, but there is no difference in the display function, the effective area of the display screen, and the planar shape.
In other words, the function of the integrated display unit (center display unit) 30 shown in the first embodiment is also possessed by the left side display unit 31L and the right side display unit 31R in the fourth embodiment. However, the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46) at startup immediately after the main power is applied to the cooking cooker 1 is displayed only on the central integrated display unit 30.

The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST are displayed at appropriate timings on the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R arranged in the center. However, as described below, the integrated display unit 30 in the central portion has priority at the display timing.

The integrated display unit 30 displays the range / grill-related “combined cooking mode KM2 / single cooking mode KM1”.
The left display unit 31L displays the left heating unit 17HL and the left operation unit 40L.
The right display unit 31R displays the right heating unit 17HR and the right operation unit 40R. Note that FIG. 133 does not show the input key 47 for instructing wireless communication with the outside.

The integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and related information when operating in the cooperation control mode KM3 is displayed.

In the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, the cooking course is roughly divided into a course for selecting "combined cooking mode KM2 / single cooking mode KM1" related to microwave oven and grill, and "cooperative cooking mode KM3". There are two courses to select.

As shown in FIG. 133, a cooperative operation unit 40MC is arranged in the central operation unit 40M. Similar to the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC has four cookings: single cooking of microwave heating source 189, single cooking of oven heating source 188, combined (heating) cooking, and cooperative (heating) cooking. It is a collection of various input keys shared in the form. In FIG. 133, the range of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is shown by the broken line frame.

FIG. 134 will be described.
In the fourth embodiment, the information management device 411 does not exist inside the house HA. A router 419 is installed inside the house HA, and the cooker 1 is connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 via the router 419. An information management device 411 having the function of the home gateway of the first embodiment is wirelessly connected to the Internet 416. The information management device 411 may be composed of one or a plurality of server devices. Servers may be distributed according to major parts such as memory, search, and information processing.

In FIG. 134, steps SK1 to SK11 show the main operation of the integrated control device MC of the cooking cooker 1.
FIG. 134 shows an operation step for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and shows a period from the determination of execution of the cooperative cooking mode to the end of the cooking step 2.

When the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is decided, the execution content (for example, the information that the cooked object is a hamburger steak) is notified by the notification unit AN, and is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK1). .. In the following description, since the cooking device 1 and the information processing device 411 can communicate with each other, the destination of the information transmitted from the cooking device 1 is not specified.

Next, it is notified that the cooking operation by the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has started, and is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK2).
If the cooking requires preheating, it notifies that the preheating operation has started and transmits it to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK3).

Next, it is notified that the cooking step 1 in the cooperative control mode is actually started, and is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK4).

Next, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the induction heating is started. Further, this notification content is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK5). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and the reference information 1 is notified (step SK5).

Next, the notification information from the outside for the step SK5 is received (step SK6). The source of this broadcast information may be the information processing terminal 418 described in the first embodiment.

The received information in step SK6 may include, for example, a remote control signal for reducing the thermal power. Depending on the content of the received notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user. Especially in the case of remote signals, notification is necessary so that the user does not cause unnecessary confusion.

Next, when the cooking step 1 is automatically completed, the content is notified by the notification unit AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking step 1 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is given. Then, the notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK7).

At the stage of step SK7, the heating operation is stopped and the transition period TR is entered.
Then, when the user prepares for the cooking process 2 and orders the start of the cooking process 2, the notification unit AN notifies that the transition period TR is completed and the cooking process 2 is started. Further, the wireless communication unit 49 transmits to the outside (step SK8). In this case, the notification content includes information on the heating source of the cooking step 2. When the timer is set and cooking is started, the timer setting time information is also included.

Next, in the cooking step 2, for example, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified when a predetermined time (second time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the microwave heating is started. Further, this notification content is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK9). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and the reference information 2 is notified (step SK9).

Next, the notification information from the outside for the step SK9 is received (step SK10). This received information may include, for example, a "remote control signal" such as lowering the thermal power.
Depending on the content of the notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user. The "remote control signal" may be emitted from the information processing terminal 418 described in the first embodiment.

Next, when the cooking step 2 is automatically completed, the content is notified by the notification unit AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking step 2 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is given. Then, the notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK11).

As is clear from the above explanation, since the contents of the cooperation survey of the cooking device 1 are transmitted to the outside in real time, the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal 418 that received the transmitted contents are separated from the kitchen KT. You can grasp the progress of cooking at the place where you went. Therefore, especially in the cooperative cooking mode, there is a case where cooking is relatively long for one hour or more, but since the operation information is input to the information processing terminal 418, information processing is performed in another room in the house. It is also possible to monitor with the terminal 418.

If the remote control signal from the outside to the cooking cooker 1 is limited to lowering the heating power and stopping the cooking operation, the cooking cooker 1 may be erroneously operated from the outside. There is no concern that it will behave incorrectly.

Next, FIG. 135 will be described.
The cooperative operation unit 40MC and the integrated display unit 30 operate in the order of steps SX1 to SX6. As described in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is arranged at the left and right center portions of the input operation unit 40 provided horizontally long on the upper surface of the main body 10.
The arrangement of the various input keys of the input operation unit 40 is the same as that of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

To select the range / grill-related "combined cooking mode KM2 / single cooking mode KM1", select the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR. ) Is used to use one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

The case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected for cooking will be described below.
In FIG. 135, first, the input key 43MC of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to transmit a command signal for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC1). Next, the signal receiving and integrated control device MC displays at least the integrated display unit 30 (SC2).

In step SC2, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. On the first specific screen 30SP, information on at least the following three is displayed at the same time. It may be displayed in the form of a list.
(1) Identification information 330 for each object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3
(2) Cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2) and preheating process (3) The heating source used and the heating unit (in the case of induction heating source 9)

The user operates the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M to select the "identification information" 330 that specifies only one menu (type) of the object to be cooked in one cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC2). .. On the first specific screen 30SP, as described in the first embodiment, it is desirable that a plurality of identification information 300 and identification information 330A, 330B, etc. of the next candidate to be cooked are displayed at the same time.

Next, in a state where the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired food to be cooked is displayed at a predetermined position on the first specific screen 30SP (such as the central portion of the first area 30L), the second area 30M, the third Control conditions such as heating temperature and thermal power displayed in the area 30R are selected by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 (SC3).

After that, if the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is confirmed (SC4).
Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started (SC5), and further, the integrated display unit 30 sets the control conditions such as the heating temperature and the heating power selected up to this stage. , Display information indicating the presence or absence of a cooking process and a preheating process (SC5).

In the fourth embodiment, the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 defines the following two types of sequences according to the object to be cooked, as in the first embodiment.
(1) A pattern in which the induction heating source 9 is used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188.
(2) A pattern in which at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9.
The pattern of using at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 in (2) above includes the pattern of starting the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 first. (Cooking of "fried chicken" described in the first embodiment. See FIGS. 62 and 65).

The example of FIG. 135 is a pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188 is used first in the cooking step 1. Next, the induction heating source 9 in charge of the cooking step 2 is a pattern for performing cooking that requires a preheating operation.

The display operation is started by the integrated display unit 30 before the other two display units (31L, 31R).
The integrated display unit 30 displays the contents of the cooking process 1. However, since the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 in charge of the cooking step 2 is also started, for example, when the cooking step 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL, the left display unit 31L indicates that the preheating process has started. ..

As described above, when the preheating process is started, the dedicated left display unit 31L of the left heating unit 17HL is activated, and it is displayed that the preheating process has been started (SY1). After that, the preheating temperature is displayed as, for example, "200 ° C.", and it is also displayed that preheating is in progress (SY2).
After that, the process proceeds to cooking step 1, transition period TR, and cooking step 2, but is not shown in FIG. 135.

The operation input procedure and the display order shown in FIG. 136 are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, when the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 1, the operation input procedure is as follows, which is different from the first embodiment.

FIG. 136 is a case where a cooking menu different from that shown in FIG. 135 is performed.
Specifically, it is a case of cooking "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
In the case of “karaage”, the cooking step 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is operated, and the cooperative operation unit 40MC is in charge of up to the stage (step SC2) of selecting the "identification information" 330 of one cooperative cooking menu. .. That is, the identification information 330 indicating one of the linked cooking menus (for example, “karaage”) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the first specific screen 30SP is displayed), and then one corresponding to the desired cooked food is displayed. The cooperative operation unit 40MC performs up to the stage of selecting the identification information 330 with the input key 43M1.

If the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is in the cooperative cooking mode specified in the cooking step 1 at the stage of step SC2, subsequent input commands cannot be performed by the cooperative operation unit 40MC.

That is, when the left heating unit 17HL is used in the cooking step 1 due to the (cooperative cooking) menu (for example, “karaage”) of the cooperative cooking mode selected in step SC2, the subsequent input operations are left operations. It is performed by the unit 40L.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the left display unit 31L. Then, on the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed in characters that the cooperative cooking menu is being cooked (step SX1).

Next, control conditions such as heating intensity (heat power) and heating time displayed on the first specific screen 30SP are selected by various input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L (step SX2).

Further, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is operated. As a result, the start of the cooking process of one cooperative cooking menu is ordered (SX3).
After that, it is displayed that the cooking operation is started and the cooking step 1 is started (SX4), and further, information such as that the cooperative cooking is in progress and the cooking step is displayed (SX5).
On the other hand, on the integrated display unit 30, information indicating that the cooperative cooking has started, information indicating the heating source of the cooking process, and the like are displayed (SC12).

Due to the above configuration, when the object to be heated N is placed on the left heating unit 17HL before starting the cooking step 1, the user's body is slightly to the left of the center of the left and right sides of the cooking device 1. That is, it should be in front of the left operation unit 40L.
Therefore, the cooking of the cooperative cooking menu can be started as it is by operating the left operation unit 40L, and the user can operate the cooking process 1 at a position facing the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L from the start time. There is.

If the left heating unit 17HL has already been used for another cooking, the reason why the user cannot perform cooperative cooking through the integrated display unit 30 in the selection step (SC2) of the identification information 330. Notify (similar notification is also made by the voice synthesizer 95).

The user knows that the first cooking step 1 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL at the stage of step SX1. The user is guided by the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the left side display unit 31L so as to put the food to be cooked on or inside the food to be heated N such as a dedicated frying pan or a pan (speech synthesizer 95). But the same notification is given).
Therefore, the user is instructed to start the cooking process of one cooperative cooking menu by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 30L after placing the object to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL (SX3). ..

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking step 1 (first cooking step) of the cooperative cooking menu has started. Since the user concentrates his / her attention on the left side display unit 31L and the left side operation unit 40L during the cooking process 1, all the basic information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L.

At the stage of the cooking step 2 using the heating chamber 113, the display is changed to a display centered on the integrated display unit 30. Further, the operation is changed to the operation (control of the heating operation) in the central operation unit 40M in front of the integrated display unit 30.

The unique function of the fourth embodiment will be described.
When the input key 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC shown in FIG. 133 is pressed, the function setting menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Up to this point, it is the same as the cooking device 1 described in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, the following function settings can be further made for the integrated control device MC.

(1) Only specific information transmission (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 134 to the outside. For example, in the case of cooking in which cooking oil is added to the object to be heated and heated, such as "tempura" and "karaage", in order to maintain the watching function, a specific cooking menu (for example, for example) is used in the cooperative cooking mode. , "Tempura" and "Karaage"), the transmission steps SK3 and SK5 shown in FIG. 134 are performed each time at a constant temperature step. For example, when the preheating temperature is set to 180 ° C. and the preheating is started, the temperature rise process is notified in detail, such as 160 ° C. and 170 ° C.

(2) Inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 is narrowed down to a specific range (for example, frozen food). In this case, further, "freezing temperature information" and "meat" may be specified in the condition setting, and as a result, only "meat whose freezing temperature is lower than the specified value" may be collected.
For example, as a method of aging meat in a refrigerator, an independent cooling space (room) is provided in the refrigerator, meat consisting of beef, pork, chicken, etc. is put into the freezer, and the temperature of the air in the freezer is set to 2. A method is known in which the temperature is maintained at ° C. or higher and 5 ° C. or lower (hereinafter, “aging temperature”), the humidity is maintained at 87% or higher and 98% or lower, and the temperature is exposed to cold air within a certain range (the amount of circulating cold air). Therefore, if information on foodstuffs stored in a specific aging temperature range is collected in this way, the convenience of the user is further improved.

(3) Setting of expert mode and beginner mode.
When the beginner mode is set, all the external notifications (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 134 are performed.
When the proficient mode is set, the information transmission to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 134 is limited to SK7. However, the display content on the first specific screen 30SP is set so that there is no difference between the expert mode and the beginner mode.
(4) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 includes information on the storage period and freshness.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-124053, foods stored in a refrigerator are photographed, and a plurality of food images are stored in association with the photographed image and the photographing date and time, and these images are taken from the same image having different photographing dates and times. A refrigerator has been proposed in which a refrigerator that extracts a difference and estimates the storage period by determining that the food has been stored for a certain period of time or longer when there is a place where there is no difference for a certain period of time.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-89913, a food image of a food stored in the storage chamber is extracted from an image of the storage chamber of the refrigerator, and the food image is converted into the food image based on the temporal change of the food image. A refrigerator has been proposed that generates information on the deterioration of the corresponding food and transmits the food image and the information on the deterioration to an external portable information terminal device via a communication device.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, if the information on the refrigerator side as described above is acquired, the convenience of the user is further improved.

Although the reference information 1 (FA1) and the reference information 2 (FA2) of the fourth embodiment have not been described in detail, the elapsed time from the time when the cooking step 1 is started as described in the first to third embodiments ( In addition to the first time TN1) and the elapsed temperature, as shown in FIG. 107 (A) of the first embodiment, the time saving information 333 which means that the user can shorten the cooking time and the recommended cooking information 338. May be added to the reference information FA1 and FA2. Alternatively, notification (display or voice guidance) may be used instead. The refrigerator according to the present invention is described from the storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for acquiring an image of the storage chamber by photographing the storage chamber, and an image of the storage chamber acquired by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit are provided, and the control device is said to be said from a temporal change of the food image. It is characterized in that information on the deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information on the deterioration are transmitted to the mobile terminal via the communication device. The refrigerator according to the present invention is described from the storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for acquiring an image of the storage chamber by photographing the storage chamber, and an image of the storage chamber acquired by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit are provided, and the control device is said to be said from a temporal change of the food image. It is characterized in that information on the deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information on the deterioration are transmitted to the mobile terminal via the communication device.

As is clear from the above description, even in the cooking cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the portion having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
Integrated display unit 30 and
The left side display unit 31L and the right side display unit 31R of the induction heating source 9 and
An integrated control device MC that controls an induction heating source 9, a microwave heating source 189, an integrated display unit 30, and a left side display unit 31L.
It includes a central operation unit 40M that gives commands from the user to the integrated control device MC, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R.
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9.
The central operation unit 40M has a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The linked operation unit 40MC causes the integrated control device MC to select one of the function (step SC2) for displaying the linked cooking mode KM3 on the integrated display unit 30 and the displayed linked cooking mode KM3. It has a function (step SC3) and a function (step SC4) to start the linked cooking mode KM3.
Further, in the integrated control device MC, regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to be executed, when the heating unit used in the cooking step 1 is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9.
(1) Information about the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the dedicated display unit 31L of the (left heating unit 17HL).
(2) The cooking process is displayed on the left side display unit 31L (step SX1).
(3) The display unit 31L displays control conditions such as thermal power and temperature, and the left operation unit 40L selects those control conditions (step SX2).
(4) An input command for starting the linked cooking mode is transmitted from the left operation unit 40L (step SX3).
It was a configuration with the function.

As a result, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 1, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC becomes clear up to the display stage of the cooperative cooking mode, and once from the left operation unit 40L. When the cooking step 1 was started by the command, the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 30L were made to execute all the subsequent changes in the control conditions, the end of the cooking process 1, and the related displays.
Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the cooker 1 that is easy to use can be provided.

The contents and display form (including the display form of the identification information 330) of the linked cooking mode to be displayed between the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL, and the configuration of the first specific screen 30SP. If they are the same, there is no concern that they may be misleading to the user, but they do not necessarily have to be the same.
This is because it is assumed that there is a difference in the display area between the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L, a physical display principle, and the like.

Embodiment 5.
FIGS. 137 to 139 show a (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus according to the fifth embodiment of the present disclosure.
FIG. 137 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking device. FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a main control functional portion of the cooker 1 shown in FIG. 137. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device of FIG. 137 from the time when the main power is turned on to the selection of the cooking mode or the control menu. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The cooking cooker 1 shown in the fifth embodiment is characterized in that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be preferentially displayed on the display means (integrated display unit 30) according to the user's setting.

That is, the cooking device 1 of the fifth embodiment is
The heating chamber 113 and
Outside the heating chamber 113, an induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed,
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 188, oven heating source 189) for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, and the like.
An input operation unit 40 as a selection means for selecting a linked cooking menu for a linked cooking mode prepared for each type of cooked object and a control menu shared by a plurality of types of cooked objects.
An integrated control device MC that controls the integrated display unit 30, the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, which are one of the display means, in response to a command from the input operation unit 40.
A function setting unit 550 that limits the functions of the integrated control device MC is provided.
The integrated control device MC includes a combined cooking mode KM2 that uses one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 in combination, a cooking process that uses the first heating means HM1, and the above-mentioned cooking process. A function to execute a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that combines a cooking process using a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, and a function to control the integrated display unit 30 according to information set in the function setting unit. And have
The integrated control device MC has the function when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected after the main power is supplied and the integrated display unit 30 is activated, or when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened. When the permission condition preset in the setting unit is satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP on which the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the details of the fifth embodiment will be described.
In FIG. 137, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit, which has a dot matrix type rectangular liquid crystal display screen 30D. The basic configuration of the integrated display unit 30 is as described in the first embodiment.

In FIG. 137, the input key 43KP on the far left is a key (button) portion of a function setting input switch (not shown) that can set various operations and displays of the entire cooking cooker 1 as desired by the user. be.
When the switch 97 of the main power switch 98 is pressed to supply the main power to the integrated control device MC and then the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC described later switches to the "functional mode" and the display of the integrated display unit 30 is displayed. The screen 30D changes to the configuration of the display screen displaying the "function setting menu".

The "function setting menu" has at least the following four.
(1) Peak cut setting (Select one of the maximum power consumption of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(2) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the linked cooking mode KM3 (3) Each control of the combined cooking mode KM2 Setting the display priority (specific control menu that should be the default display) of the menu (for example, "range grill", "boiled leaf vegetables") (4) After turning on the main power switch 97, the heating chamber 113 When the door 114 is opened, the integrated display unit 30 is automatically set to display the cooking menu or control menu of the cooking mode used last time.

FIG. 137 sets whether to preferentially display either the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, or the cooking menu or the control menu of the previously used cooking mode. An example is shown.

In FIG. 137, 340 is a title display unit for function setting. It can be seen from the title display unit 340 that it is a setting scene of the cooking menu to be displayed preferentially.
Reference numeral 341 is an explanatory display text urging the user to operate the input key.

On the front side of the explanatory display text 341, the cooperative cooking mode selection unit 342L is displayed on the left side in the shape of a square frame. Further, on the right side of the cooperative cooking mode selection unit 342L, a combined cooking (RG) mode selection unit 342M is displayed. Further, on the right side, the selection unit 342R of the cooking menu or the control menu of the cooking mode previously cooked is displayed.

In the state of FIG. 137, the combined cooking (RG) mode selection unit 342M displayed in the left and right center portions of the title display unit 340 is displayed in white characters. The mode is set to be displayed preferentially.

The input functions of the input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 arranged on the front side of the above-mentioned three selection units 342L, 342M, and 342R are effective.
The individual light emitting units 27M3, 27M4, and 27M5 corresponding to the input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 so as to be adjacent to each other are all in a light emitting state as shown by a star-shaped figure.

In FIG. 137, if the input key 43M1 is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode selection unit 342L is selected, so that the cooperative cooking mode selection unit 342L changes to a form displayed in white characters. At the same time, the combined cooking (RG) mode selection unit 342M stops the white display.

To change the title display unit 340 of the function setting for another function setting, press the input key 43MC. Finally, when the input key 43KP is pressed, the setting work of the "function setting menu" is completed. Normally, at this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 returns to the standby initial screen (see FIG. 46).

The individual light emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP is surrounded by a broken line circle, which indicates that the individual light emitting unit 27M1 is in a blinking state. From the start time to the end time of the functional mode, the individual light emitting unit 27M1 keeps blinking.

Next, FIG. 138 will be described.
A storage device MM formed of a semiconductor storage device or the like stores a basic operation program of the integrated control device MC. The basic operation program includes a computer program from the time of the standby mode before the main power switch 97 is closed to the execution of various cooking modes and control menus.

In FIG. 138, a solid line arrow is shown for each component from the input operation unit 40, and this arrow indicates the flow of a command signal, control data, and the like.

Reference numeral 551 is a function setting data storage unit. The function setting data storage unit 551 is prepared as one storage area in the storage device MM or as an independent storage element (semiconductor memory or the like) on the hardware.

The setting information input to the function setting unit 550 by the input key 43KP described with reference to FIG. 137, the input keys 43M1 to 43M3, and the like is stored in the function setting data storage unit 551, and the main power switch 97 is closed. Then, each time the integrated control device MC is started, the stored information is read out to the integrated control device MC.

Next, FIG. 139 will be described.
FIG. 139 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment.
In the built-in type cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time when the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so that the user can use the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97. Press to turn on the power (step SU1 in FIG. 139).

Then, as described in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC is started. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program.

Then, the integrated control device MC checks the presence / absence of abnormality in the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, the IH control unit 90 transmits the temperature measurement result of each unit measured by the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to the integrated control device MC. As a result, the integrated control device MC can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (SU2).

If no abnormality is found, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started" (SU2). The display screen at this initial time point is the same as the standby initial screen described with reference to FIG. 46.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the content similar to the content displayed by the integrated display unit 30 by voice (SU2).

In the next step SU3, the integrated control device MC reads out the function setting information from the storage device MM.
When the function setting unit 550 is set in advance by the input operation unit 40 so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is preferentially displayed, such information "cooperative cooking mode priority" is read out. ..

In the next step SU4, notification for prompting the selection of the heating source and voice guidance are performed.
At this stage, the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46).

When the user opens the door 114, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 (closed detection unit 139) outputs a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC as described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 30 and 40). Send (SU5).

The next step SU6 is a determination step of the "permission condition" for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Since this determination step has been described in detail in the first embodiment (FIG. 66), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but for example, "whether or not the peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more" is determined.

If it is determined in step SU6 that the permission condition is not satisfied, step SU6 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step SU8, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 indicates that cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be performed. do. Then, the process returns to step SU4.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SU6 that the permission condition is satisfied, step SU6 becomes "No", the process proceeds to step SU7, and the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Display on. That is, the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z: see FIG. 46) is switched to the first specific screen 30SP.
After that, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, "hamburger") can be selected to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, but the following description will be omitted.

The case where the door 114 is not opened in step SU5, that is, the case where the door 114 remains closed will be described.
As shown in step SU10, when various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are operated, one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 is selected according to the operation content.

As shown in step SU11, any one of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 according to the input operation of the step SU10. To. Then, after waiting for the subsequent input operation, cooking is started.

If the input operation unit 40 is not operated at all in step SU10, the process returns to step SU5, but if a certain time elapses without the user setting the cooking mode or control mode, step SU9 shows. As such, a display or voice guidance prompting the user to select an operation may be performed.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 139, in the step SU11, at the stage before displaying the first specific screen 30SP, it is determined whether or not to allow cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as in the step SU6. There is a judgment step of "permission condition" to be performed.

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 5, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The heating chamber 113 formed inside the main body case HC,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N in which the object to be cooked is housed outside the heating chamber 113.
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources 188 and 189 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking object is heated by using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, one of a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of cooked object is selected. The first selection unit 43MC, which selects one cooking menu, and
In the combined cooking mode KM2 in which a plurality of the heating sources 188 and 189 are automatically combined to heat one cooked object simultaneously or at different times, one of a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of cooked objects is selected. A second selection unit 43M1 that selects one control menu,
The integrated control device MC for controlling the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in response to the selection of the first selection unit 43MC and the second selection unit 43M1 is provided.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the fifth embodiment,
The input operation unit 40 further has an input key 43KP as a function setting input means for changing the function of the integrated control device MC.
With the function setting input means 43KP, it is possible to set whether to preferentially display each cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 or to preferentially display the display of each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. It had a composition.

Because of this configuration, if the function mode is set, the priority between the display of the control menu in the combined cooking mode and the display of the linked cooking menu can be changed, and it is convenient to support a wide range of cooking. Can provide a high cooking cooker.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
When the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected or when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the integrated control device MC is supplied with the main power and activates the integrated display unit 30. When the permission condition preset in the function setting unit is satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP on which the cooking menu is displayed for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Is.

Therefore, when the user preferentially uses the cooperative cooking mode, if the door 114 is opened, the first specific screen 30SP on which the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed can be displayed.
This can be expected to further improve the usability of the user.

Embodiment 6.
FIGS. 140 to 144 show a (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus according to the sixth embodiment of the present disclosure.
FIG. 140 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking device. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing a main control function portion of the cooker 1 shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 142 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. FIG. 143 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. FIG. 144 is a flowchart 3 showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in the sixth embodiment is characterized in that the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the like can be selected by voice input.

In FIG. 140, an input key 43MX for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. The input key 43MX may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch such as the input keys 43M1 to 43M3.

Reference numeral 27M7 is an individual light emitting unit, which emits light when the input function of the input key 43MX is valid, and continues light emission during a period until the input function is disabled.

Next, FIG. 141 will be described.
In FIG. 141, the input operation unit 40 receives an audio signal receiving unit 40VR that receives an audio emitted by a user and converts it into a predetermined audio signal, and an audio signal from the audio signal receiving unit 40VR, and inputs the contents of the audio. It includes an audio signal analysis unit 40VS for analysis. Although not shown, the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is connected to a microphone that collects audio.

Inside the storage device MM, a storage unit MM1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a storage unit MM2 of the combined cooking mode KM2, and a permission condition storage unit MM3 that stores the conditions for permitting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are provided. I have.

The MNP is a search unit that receives a command signal from the voice signal analysis unit 40VS, searches the stored data of the storage units MM1, MM2, and MM3, and extracts a cooking menu or a control menu. As shown in the frame of the broken line in FIG. 141, the function of the search unit MNP may be possessed as a search program in the integrated control device MC.

Reference numeral 373 indicates a signal line, and various functional parts and control parts are connected inside the upper unit 100. The signal line 373 is a part of the signal transmission unit 73 described in the first embodiment.

The notification unit AN of the sixth embodiment includes a display command unit 63SP for the first specific screen 30SP, a display command unit 63CS for the second specific screen 30SC, and a display command unit 63ST for the third specific screen 30ST. , Is equipped.

The display unit drive circuit 63 that drives the integrated display unit 30, the right side display unit 31R, and the left side display unit 31L, respectively, and the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, and 63ST described above are common control microcomputers (not shown). ). The functions of the three display command units 63SP, 63CS, and 63ST may be realized by the integrated control device MC.

Next, 142 will be described.
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions, and is input by the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the input key 43MX. After that, the steps to determine the cooking menu and control conditions are shown.

Steps S20 to S35 are executed by the integrated control device MC.
In the operation program shown in FIG. 142, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, “hamburger”), the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 (for example, “range grill”), and the control conditions (for example, “microwave heating”) are used. The feature is that even "output value" and "heating time") can be input by voice. As described in the first embodiment, the control menu of the "single heating cooking mode" using any one of the microwave heating source 189 using the heating chamber 113 or the oven heating source 188 (for example, "microwave oven"). "Manual") can also be selected.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43MC of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M), a command signal SN1 is emitted to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, a command signal SN2 is emitted to the integrated control device MC.

Step S19 is a user input step. It is assumed that there are two cases, one is when the input key 43MC is pressed and the other is when the input key 43MX is pressed.

In step S20, it is determined whether or not the signal SN1 has arrived, and if the signal SN1 has arrived, the user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route for determining the cooking menu or the like.

When the input key 43MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected as described in the first embodiment, so that the input key 43M1 can be used to select the object to be cooked. Depending on the number of operations, such as "hamburger" when pressed once and "karaage" when pressed twice in succession, the linked cooking menus prepared in the storage unit MM1 described with reference to FIG. 141 are integrated and displayed one by one. It is displayed at 30.

On the other hand, as described in step STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 of the first embodiment or step STX2 of FIG. 69, it is necessary to satisfy the "permission condition" before permitting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, in step S21, it is determined whether or not the permission condition is satisfied.

If the determination in step S21 is "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process in step S35. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "the cooperative cooking mode cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the determination in step S21 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S22.
After that, when the input of the input key 43M2 is completed (step S23) and it is determined that the input key 43MS has been pressed (step S24), the process shifts to the cooking process using one cooperative cooking menu, and the integrated display unit. In 30, on the first specific screen 30SP, the identification information of the cooking menu and the control conditions are displayed in a corresponding state (for example, in a state of being arranged next to each other). Therefore, one cooperative cooking menu (for example, “hamburger”) to be executed is determined in the next step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20 is "No", in the next step S25, it is determined whether or not the signal SN2 has arrived, and if the signal SN2 has arrived, from the time of the next step S26. Enter the voice input processing process.

In step S26, the voice input support mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route for confirming a cooking menu or the like. The voice synthesizer 95 prompts the user to input by voice, for example, "From now on, input by voice is accepted. Please say the desired menu."

In step S27, it is determined whether or not an audio signal has been input. If there is an audio signal input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, when there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95 gives voice guidance to the user as shown in step S34.

In step S28, the case of searching the control menu and the control condition in the combined cooking mode KM2, the case of searching the cooking menu and the control condition in the linked cooking mode KM3, and the case of searching the control menu and the control condition in the single cooking mode KM1 are performed. There is a step to search.

That is, in step S28, as shown in FIG. 142, step S28A for searching the control condition of the combined cooking mode KM2, step 28B for searching the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, and the control condition of the single cooking mode KM1. Has step S28C and the like to select.

In step S27, for example, when the name of the object to be cooked "hamburger" is input by voice, in step S28, the cooking mode and the control menu in which the hamburger can be performed are searched.

However, when there is a voice input of "grill storage. Hamburger", only the search (S28B) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed using the voice input of "grill storage".

Step S29 also reads out from the storage device MM and collates the data obtained by learning the past search results with the linked cooking menu executed in the past and the control conditions at that time (step 1 in FIG. 79 of the first embodiment). See SJ11).

Similar to step S21, step S30 is a step of determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied. Also in this step S30, as described in step STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 of the first embodiment or step STX2 of FIG. 69, whether or not the “permission condition” is satisfied before permitting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. judge.

If the determination in step S30 is "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process in step S35 described above. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "as a result of the search, the linked cooking mode was selected, but the linked cooking cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

In the next step S31, the search result is notified by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not been selected yet, but the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 31, and if it matches the desired one, the user inputs a voice for approval, for example, "decision" or "hamburger OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S32).

The cooperative cooking menu and its control conditions are determined by the correspondence as in step S32 (step S33).
At the stage of step S27, for example, when "spinach, boil" is input by voice, "boiled leafy vegetables" (single heating of the microwave heating source 189), which is one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2, is extracted. Will be done.

When the spinach is boiled in hot water boiled by the induction heating source 9, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R may be operated instead of the central operation unit 40M.

Next, 143 will be described.
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions, and is input by the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the input key 43MX. Hereinafter, the steps up to the determination of the control menu and the control conditions are shown. As described in the first embodiment, the control menu of the "single heating cooking mode" using any one of the microwave heating source 189 using the heating chamber 113 or the oven heating source 188 (for example, "microwave oven"). "Manual") can also be selected.

Steps S20A to S35 are executed by the integrated control device MC.
In FIG. 143, step S19 is a user input step. It is assumed that there are two cases, one is when the input key 43M1 is pressed and the other is when the input key 43MX is pressed.
Steps S22 to S35 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 142.

In the operation program shown in FIG. 143, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 (for example, "range grill") and the control conditions (for example, "microwave heating output value" and "heating time") can be input by voice. It is characterized by points.

After closing the main power switch 97, when the user presses the input key 43M1 of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M), a command signal SN3 is issued to the integrated control device MC.
On the other hand, when the user presses the input key 43MX of the input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M) after closing the main power switch 97, a command signal SN2 is emitted to the integrated control device MC.

In step S20A, it is determined whether or not the signal SN3 has arrived, and if the signal SN3 has arrived, the user touches the input operation unit 40 to determine the control menu in the combined cooking mode KM2. go to.

When the input key 43M1 is pressed, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected as described in the first embodiment, so that the control menu can be selected by the input key 43M1. The control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 prepared in the storage unit MM1 described with reference to FIG. 141 according to the number of operations such as "warming" when pressed once and "boiled leafy vegetables" when pressed twice in succession. Are displayed one by one on the integrated display unit 30.

After that, when the input of the input key 43M2 is completed (step S23) and it is determined that the input key 43MS is pressed (step S24), heating by one control menu (for example, "range grill") of the combined cooking mode is performed. Moving to the cooking process, the integrated display unit 30 displays the specific sentence 30J of one control menu and the control condition (for example, microwave output value 500W) on the second specific screen 30SC. That is, the control menu of one combined cooking mode KM2 to be executed is determined at the stage of this step S33.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S20A is "No", in the next step S25, it is determined whether or not the signal SN2 has arrived, and if the signal SN2 has arrived, from the time of the next step S26. Enter the voice input processing process.

In step S26, the voice input support mode is started. The user touches the input operation unit 40 to go to a route for confirming a cooking menu or the like. The voice synthesizer 95 prompts the user to input by voice, for example, "From now on, the input by voice is accepted".

In step S27, it is determined whether or not an audio signal has been input. If there is an audio signal input, the process proceeds to step S28.
On the other hand, when there is no voice input, the voice synthesizer 95, which inputs voice, guides the user by voice as shown in step S34.

In step S28, there are a case of searching for a control menu and control conditions in the combined cooking mode KM2 (S28A), a case of searching for a cooking menu and its control conditions in the linked cooking mode KM3 (S28B), and a control menu in the single cooking mode. And the control condition are searched for (S28C).

In step S27, for example, when the name of the control menu (specific sentence 30J) of "range grill" is input by voice, in step S28, a control menu that can perform the heating pattern of the range grill is searched.

However, when there is a voice input of "grill storage, hamburger", the term "grill storage" is also used for the search, and only the search for the cooperative cooking mode (S27B) is performed.

In step S29, the data obtained by learning the past search results, the linked cooking menu executed in the past, and the control conditions at that time are read from the storage device MM and collated (step 1 in FIG. 72 of the first embodiment). See SJ11).

Similar to step S21 shown in FIG. 142, step S30 is a step of determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied. Also in this step S30, as described in step STR1 and STR2 of FIG. 67 of the first embodiment or step STX2 of FIG. 69, whether or not the “permission condition” is satisfied before permitting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. judge.

If the determination in step S30 is "No", the process proceeds to the error notification process in step S35 as described with reference to FIG. 142. In this step S35, the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30 notify the user that "as a result of the search, the linked cooking mode was selected, but the linked cooking cannot be selected at present". Then, the process returns to the stage before step S19.

If the result of the search in step S28 has nothing to do with the cooperative cooking mode (for example, the control menu "defrosting" of the combined cooking mode KM2), the determination in step S30 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the search result is notified by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, the combined cooking mode KM2 has not yet been selected by the user, but the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 30, and if it matches the desired one, the user inputs an approval voice such as "range grill determination" or "OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S32). Immediately after this step S32, the "voice input support mode" started in step S26 is canceled.

The combined cooking mode KM2 and its control conditions are determined by the correspondence of each of the above steps. Therefore, the voice synthesizer 95 gives a voice guidance such as "start heating the range grill" (step S33).

At the stage of step S27, for example, when "boil spinach" is input by voice, "boiled leafy vegetables" (single heating of the microwave heating source 189), which is one of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2, is extracted. Will be done.

When the spinach is boiled in hot water boiled by the induction heating source 9, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R may be operated instead of the central operation unit 40M.

Next, 144 will be described.
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 of FIG. 140 up to the setting of the cooking menu and the control conditions.
FIG. 144 explains the functional limitation of various input keys of the central operation unit 40M after the “start of the input support mode by voice” described in step S25 of FIG. 143.

When the voice input support mode is started in step S25 through the process of step S24 of FIG. 143, the integrated control device MC invalidates the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. (Step S25A).

That is, when the input key 43MX switches to the voice input support mode, the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 are effective even if they are touch-operated. Does not generate an input signal. Further, the input key 43M2 that can set control conditions such as microwave output and heating time cannot be input.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, only voice input can be performed on the integrated control device MC from the stage of step S25A. However, since the input functions of the input keys 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT are still valid, for example, if the input key 43MT is pressed at the stage of step S30, the input result of the audio signal up to that point is canceled, and step S25. Go back to step.

When the input key 43MX is pressed after step S25, the entire voice input support mode is canceled. Therefore, even if the search results such as the cooking menu are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 after step S25, all of them are automatically deleted. Further, since the process returns to the stage of step S19, the integrated display unit 30 returns to the state of the standby initial screen.

In step S29, the search result is notified by voice. It is also displayed on the integrated display unit 30. At this stage, although the combined cooking mode has not been selected yet, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.

The user confirms the result extracted in step 29, and if it matches the desired one, the user inputs a voice for approval, for example, "range grill OK". Alternatively, the input key 43MS for instructing the start of cooking may be pressed (step S30). Immediately after this step S30, the "voice input support mode" started in step S25 is canceled. At the same time, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS whose input functions are invalidated at the stage of step S25A are restored at this point (step S30A).

The next step S30B is a step of finally confirming the start of cooking. In this step S30B, it cannot be processed by voice input. It requires physical manipulation by the user as it is an important decision to start heating. That is, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
If a certain period of time elapses without pressing the input key 43MS in this step S30B, the processes from steps S25 to S30A are canceled and the process returns to the stage of step S19. Therefore, the integrated display unit 30 returns to the state of the initial standby screen.

In the above description, the audio signal analysis unit 40VS provided inside the heating cooker 1 and the search unit MNP extract the cooking menu or the like specified by the user. However, the audio signal analysis and control are performed. Functions such as menu search may be shared by external devices (for example, home gateway 411, external server 417, information processing terminal 418) connected via the wireless communication unit 49.
That is, it is not always necessary to have all of the voice input processing functions inside the cooking cooker 1.

Summary of Embodiment 6.
As is clear from the above description, in the sixth embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 serving as a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15.
A second heating means HM2 provided with a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and the like.
Notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking,
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
An input operation unit 40, which is an input means, is provided.
The integrated control device MC includes a single cooking mode KM1 that operates the first heating means HM1 independently.
A combined cooking mode KM2 that automatically advances the cooking process by automatically combining a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 having the cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
In the single cooking mode KM1, the control pattern (for example, "boiler", "boil") of the first heating means HM1 is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating source and the control pattern (for example, “range grill”) to be used are determined in the second heating means HM2, and the heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the object to be cooked (for example, "hamburger", "fried chicken") to be heated is determined by the input means, and the heating operation is started.
The cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute each cooking of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by using two or more heating means. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the input means (input operation unit) 40 includes an audio signal receiving unit 40VR into which an audio signal from a user is input and an audio signal analysis unit 40VS.
Further, it is provided with a search unit MNP that selects either one of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 based on the audio signal data from the audio signal analysis unit 40VS.
When the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 is extracted by the search unit MNP, the notification unit AN displays the control pattern (second specific screen 30SC) or notifies by voice.
It was a composition.

With this configuration, the cooking menu and control menu of the two cooking modes can be selected by voice, so that the user's operability is improved even in the cooking cooker 1 in which the number of heating sources is increased. be able to.
Further, even in a situation where the user cannot touch and operate the input operation unit 40 many times, it is possible to support the input by voice, so that a highly convenient cooking cooker can be provided.

Further, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, when one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is extracted by the search unit MNP, control conditions applicable to the cooking menu can also be presented, so that the user can control the cooking menu. The trouble of setting conditions can be omitted, and the operability of the user can be improved.

As is clear from the above description, in the sixth embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
On the top plate, the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated containing the object to be cooked, and
A second heating means HM2 provided with a plurality of heating sources for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113, and
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
Control unit MC that controls the heating operation,
It is equipped with an input operation unit 40 that determines a cooking menu and a control menu.
The control unit MC automatically combines a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 to automatically advance the cooking process, and the combined cooking mode KM2.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 having the cooking process using the first heating means HM1 and the cooking process using the second heating means HM2 is switched and executed by a command from the input operation unit 40. can be,
Further, from the voice signal receiving unit 40VR to which the voice signal from the user is input and the plurality of control menus belonging to the combined cooking mode KM2, or from the plurality of cooking menus belonging to the linked cooking mode KM3, the user. The search unit MNP for extracting either one of the cooking menu or the control menu specified by the voice signal of
Disclosed is a cooking device 1 characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, if the desired cooking name and the state of cooking are input by voice, the desired cooking and control menu can be easily extracted from the databases of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3. , Can perform cooking. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Embodiment 7.
145 to 163 relate to the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 145 is a block diagram 1 showing a main control-related portion of the cooking cooker 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 146 is a block diagram 2 showing a main control-related part of the cooking device 1. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an operation example of the cooking device 1. FIG. 148 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. FIG. 149 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation after the start of cooking in the cooking device 1. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the main internal functions of the portable information terminal. FIG. 151 is a display operation explanatory diagram 1 of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 152 is FIG. 2 for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 153 is a display operation explanatory diagram 3 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 154 is a display operation explanatory diagram 4 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 155 is a display operation explanatory diagram 5 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 156 is a display operation explanatory diagram 6 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 157 is a display operation explanatory diagram 7 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 158 is a display operation explanatory diagram 8 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 159 is a display operation explanatory view 9 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 160 is a display operation explanatory view 10 of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 161 shows a modified example of the seventh embodiment, and shows an operation management system of the cooking cooker 1 and the home electric appliance 400. FIG. 162 shows a modified example of the seventh embodiment, and is a display operation explanatory diagram 1 of a portable information terminal. FIG. 163 shows a modified example of the seventh embodiment, and is FIG. 2 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in the seventh embodiment is characterized in that the cooking mode, control conditions, and the like can be set by using a remote control signal from the portable information terminal 418.

One of the features of the cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment is that it has an "external notification mode".
The "external notification mode" automatically notifies the portable information terminal 418 in which the device identification code is registered up to the middle stage of the cooking process in detail.

One of the cases is that the cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment further improves the voice input mode described in the sixth embodiment and enables at least voice input during the period from the start to the end of the cooking process. It is a feature.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the seventh embodiment adds a function of detecting that the user is in the vicinity of the cooking device 1, and enables the voice input mode when the user is in the vicinity of the cooking device 1. One of the features is that the safety is further improved.

In FIG. 145, the JC is a human sensing sensor. It also has a receiving unit (not shown) that radiates ultrasonic waves or infrared rays in front of the cooking device 1 and receives the reflected input thereof. The human sensing sensor JC is installed inside the upper unit 100 so as to radiate ultrasonic waves or infrared rays from the upper surface or the front surface of the upper unit 100. The circuit dedicated to processing the signal received by the receiving unit is not provided, and the received signal is analyzed by the integrated control device MC to determine whether or not there is a person.

In FIG. 145 below, the QC is a seismic device (vibration detection unit) that detects shaking when an earthquake occurs, and when it detects a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or higher, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC. send. The integrated control device MC receives the signal and determines that an earthquake has occurred, and instantly shuts off the inverter circuit 82 and the like in order to stop all the heating sources in use, or at least the cooking performed on the top plate 15. Do the action. However, the operation of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is not stopped in an emergency.

In the cooking performed on the top plate 15, there is a risk that the boiling pot (including a frying pan) may tip over or move sideways due to the earthquake. However, the cooking performed inside the heating chamber 113 is less dangerous than the cooking on the top plate 15 because the door 114 is closed with a constant force. Therefore, the seismic device QC is performed. It is not necessary to make an emergency stop at the signal of.

In FIG. 146, 40VS is the audio signal analysis unit described in the sixth embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the audio signal analysis function is incorporated in the computer program of the integrated control device MC.
As shown in the frame of the solid line in FIG. 146, the function of the search unit MNP described in the sixth embodiment is possessed as a search program in the integrated control device MC.

Next, FIG. 147 will be described.
FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an operation example of the cooking cooker 1 after the main power switch is turned on. In particular, the operations of the human detection sensor JC and the audio signal receiving unit 40VR are mainly described. TL1 to TL13 indicate the timing of the operation of the cooking cooker 1 or the operation of the user, and are from TL1 to TL13 in the order of occurrence.

First, the main power switch 97 is closed (TL1).
Then, the human detection sensor JC detects the presence of a person. The sense signal when a person is sensed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (TL2).

The input functions of various input keys of the input operation unit 40 are enabled (TL3). For example, input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43R1 and the like can be input. Since the input function of the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97 is enabled before these input keys, the main power can be turned on as described above.

In the seventh embodiment, the input key 43MX for selecting the voice input as described in the sixth embodiment is arranged. When the input key 43MX is pressed, the voice input mode is set as described in the sixth embodiment, but unlike the sixth embodiment, the user is allowed to directly touch the input key of the input operation unit 40. Yes (TL4). In other words, it is possible for the user to operate with a finger and to input by voice.

If the cooking has not been performed first, the heating chamber 113 can be used (TL5).
After the time point of TL4, when the user selects, for example, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by voice input or touch operation, it is determined at the stage of TL6 whether or not the permission condition is satisfied. Since the "permission condition" referred to here has been described in detail in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147, if cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected (TL7), the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started in the right heating unit 17HL (TL8). At this point, the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is still in a state of accepting input. That is, the voice input mode is maintained.

Therefore, the user can set another cooking at the stage of executing the cooking step 1. For example, a new heating operation can be started in the left heating unit 17HL that is not used, and a heating operation of various control menus (preheating, water heater, etc.) using the induction heating source 9 can be started.

By the way, one of the features of the seventh embodiment is that the start of such a heating operation can be started by an audio signal.
That is, when the user is performing one cooking or preparing for another cooking and the touch operation is difficult, the cooking can be commanded by voice without the touch operation. ..

With this configuration, another cooking can be started earlier, so the total cooking time can be shortened and the load on the user can be reduced.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the cooking step 1 is completed, there is a heating pause period (transition period) TR, but even at that timing, for example, the start of cooking in the heating chamber 113 and its control conditions can be determined by voice input. It can be changed and the heating operation can be stopped (TL9).

After the transition period TR is completed, the cooking step 2 can be started by either touch operation or voice input (TL10). In this cooking step 2, since the heating chamber 113 is occupied by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, other cooking cannot be performed.

After that, when the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, at this point, the receiving function of the audio signal receiving unit 40VR is invalidated by the integrated control device MC (TL13). Therefore, after that, it is not possible to input by voice, and it is necessary to press the input key 43MX to set the voice input mode again.

As is clear from the above explanation, the voice input mode is set so that the heating operation can be performed from the start to the end by voice only during the period when the presence of a person is detected by the human detection sensor JC. .. For example, when the user goes to a place away from the vicinity of the cooking device 1, the safety is ensured by disabling the input by voice.

When the person detection sensor JC detects that the user has moved away from the vicinity of the cooking device 1, the notification unit AN may issue an alarm at that time. In addition, when the presence of a person cannot be detected by the human detection sensor JC, the voice input mode is not disabled, but only two commands are given: to stop heating and to reduce the thermal power of the induction heating source 9. Only limited input may be enabled.

Next, FIG. 148 will be described.
FIG. 148 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. The basic operation program from turning on the power to starting cooking preparation is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

Since steps SW1 to SW3 are the same as those shown in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, steps SW3 will be briefly described.
When the main power switch 97 is closed (step SW1), the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program (SW2).

In step SW2, the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the information processing device 411 such as the home gateway in the living space such as the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1. This warning signal corresponds to the signal L2 described with reference to FIG. 42 of the first embodiment.
Further, the heating cooker 1 transmits the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 of the refrigerator 401 to the information processing apparatus 411.

When the information processing device 411 is not inside the house HA, the cooker 1 sends the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 to the external server 417 via the router 419 (not shown) and the wide area communication network 416. Send the corresponding information. A personal digital assistant 418 owned by a user, a resident, or the like is connected to the wide area communication network 416.

If no abnormality is found in the integrated control device MC, the integrated display unit 30 is activated, and the voice synthesizer 95 performs voice guidance to the effect that the operation is started (SW3).
Further, in order to prompt the selection of the heating source to be used, the integrated display unit 30 displays the display, and the voice synthesizer 95 also provides a voice guide for prompting the selection of the heating source (SW4). At this stage, instead of selecting the heating source, a cooking mode such as the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 may be selected.

Although not shown in FIG. 148, when the "external notification mode" is not set, the input operation unit 40 sets the external notification mode at this stage.
Specifically, the input key 43KP is pressed to switch to the "function mode" described later, and the setting operation is performed according to the display of the integrated display unit 30.
In the functional mode, the specific mobile information terminal 418 owned by the user is registered as one notification destination.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the seismic sensor QC senses an acceleration of a certain level or more, the integrated control device MC has a function of instantly stopping the induction heating source 9 during the heating operation. In the functional mode, it is possible to set to automatically transmit a signal to the outside via the wireless communication unit 49. As a result, a warning signal can also be transmitted to the home gateway 411, and an alarm can be issued from the alarm device 445.
If the function mode is set, the function mode is canceled after the necessary setting input is completed.

Even when the heating cooker 1 of the seventh embodiment is set to the "external notification mode" as described above, or is in a state where it can communicate wirelessly with the mobile information terminal 418 in other states. The "function setting menu" that is possible when the input key 43KP is pressed cannot be selected. That is, the functional mode limits the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1 to the case where the user directly operates the cooking device 1, which enhances safety.

In the next step SW5, the input operation unit 40 determines whether or not the input is completed. When the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are operated as described in the first embodiment and the desired cooking menu (for example, “karaage”) and control menu (for example, “range manual”) have been selected, the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 have been selected. This step SW5 becomes "Yes".

In the next step SW6, when the input key 43MS is pressed in the input operation unit 40, it becomes “Yes” and the driving of the heating source is actually started (SW7). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43L1 and 44L. Further, in the case of the right heating unit 17HR, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43R1 and 44R (may be changed so that these key input procedures are omitted).

On the other hand, if the input from the input operation unit 40 is not completed in step SW5, the input is waited for 30 minutes. During this 30 minutes, measurement is started at the stage of step SW4.

In step SW8, it is determined whether or not the time exceeds 30 minutes, and if the time exceeds 30 minutes, the integrated control device MC automatically turns off the main power switch 97 (SW14).

Unless the wireless communication unit 49 receives a "remote control signal" (external input) described later from the outside during the 30 minutes, which is the grace period for input, the input of the input operation unit 40 is completed and the presence / absence of external input (existence / absence of external input). Step SW9) is repeatedly checked.

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives the remote control signal (external input) from the outside, in step SW10, it is determined whether it is a command to specify the cooperative cooking mode or other than that.

If it is a command to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the process proceeds to step SW11. In this step SW11, it is determined whether or not the permission conditions such as "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" described in the first embodiment (particularly FIGS. 67 to 69) are satisfied.

If it is determined in step SW11 that the permission condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step SW12, and the process of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is performed.

On the other hand, when the mode is not the cooperative cooking mode, step SW10 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SW12.

In step SW12, the determination and processing of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) are performed.
First, when the cooking mode designated from the outside is the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
Next, when the cooking mode designated from the outside is the combined cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. On the other hand, in the case of the independent cooking mode KM1 of the induction heating source 9, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SW13, the information indicating that the remote control information has been received is returned to the information processing device 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information.

If it is determined in the step SW4 that the permission information is not satisfied, the information processing device 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information cannot be controlled by the remote control information. Reply the information of.

At the stage of step SW11 or SW12, the user manually changes the control conditions (heat power, microwave output, heating time, control temperature, etc.) set in the remote control information by the input operation unit 40. May be. At the stage of step SW12, the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are displayed, respectively. Therefore, control conditions are set so that the user can directly input using the normal input operation unit 40. Is also good.

FIG. 148 describes the operation of the cooking cooker 1 when the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is set.

Next, FIG. 149 will be described.
As described with reference to FIG. 148, the cooker 1 of the seventh embodiment operates the input operation unit 40 to switch to the "function setting" mode during standby before starting the cooker operation, and "external notification". Set to "Mode". Therefore, as will be described below, it is convenient when the user cannot always be in front of the cooking device 1 to perform cooking.

For example, the user may move in the kitchen KT immediately after starting cooking, or may use other cookers and home appliances in the kitchen KT. However, in the case of cooking a cooking menu that uses cooking oil such as fried food, the alarm device 445 (Fig.) 4) gives an alarm.

In addition, since the heating cooker 1 itself is also equipped with a human detection sensor JC that sets the sensing area from the vicinity of the door 114 toward the front, a person is detected in a specific cooking menu such as "fried food". If the non-stop time exceeds a certain time (for example, 15 seconds), a warning message is output from the voice synthesizer 95. Then, the heating power of the induction heating source 9 is lowered, and then the heating operation is stopped.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the integrated control device MC after the start of the cooking operation.
FIG. 149 shows an operation program when the "external notification mode" is set among the basic operation programs from the start of the cooking process 1 to the start of the cooking process 2. This program is also stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

In the selected cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 will be performed in the heating chamber 113, and the cooking step 2 will be described in the left heating unit 17HL.

FIG. 149 shows an operation step following step SW7 of FIG. 148.
When the cooking step 1 is started and the microwave heating is started, the integrated control device MC confirms that the "external notification mode" is set (step SW20).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of the cooking step 1, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the start of cooking (step SW21).

In addition, the wireless communication unit 49 transmits information indicating that the cooperative cooking has started to the outside.
Since the portable information terminal 418 is registered in advance as an external notification destination of the cooking device 1, information on the start of operation of the cooking device 1 arrives via the external server 417.

The measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started from the time point of the step SW21.
In the seventh embodiment, the inventory inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted to the outside in the next step SW22. If the information processing device (home gateway) 411 is inside the house HA as in the first embodiment, it is transmitted to the information processing device 411.

On the other hand, if the device corresponding to the information processing device 411 is an external server 417, inventory inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted from the cooking cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416.

After that, the presence or absence of abnormal operation is checked in the process of cooking step 1 (SW23), the presence or absence of a stop command for cooking step 1 by the user is checked (SW24), and the presence or absence of excess of the elapsed time TN1 is checked (SW25).

These steps SW23 to SW25 are repeated at short intervals, but if an abnormality is detected, the integrated notification unit 30 or the voice synthesizer 95 performs abnormality detection notification (SW34). Further, as one of the processes of this "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified, and the mobile information terminal 418 is also notified of the occurrence of an abnormality.

When it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded (“Yes” in SW25), the reference information 1 is notified on the first specific screen 30S of the integrated display unit 30. At the same time, reference information is transmitted to the outside. This reference information also finally reaches the portable information terminal 418 via the information processing device 411 and the external server 417.

In the next step SW27, it is determined whether or not inventory data is received from the outside in response to the inventory information inquiry RQ1 of the refrigerator 401 (see step SW2 in FIG. 148).

If the inventory data has been received, it is stored in the storage device MM at that time, but the stored information is also confirmed in the next step SW28.

Next, when the inventory data has arrived in the integrated display unit 30, the integrated control device MC evaluates and analyzes the cooking menu actually related from the acquired inventory data. When a recommended cooking menu is extracted, at this point, the integrated display unit 30 does not notify that there is a recommended cooking menu (SW29). And it does not send to the external server 417.

Exceptionally, when the user performs the above-mentioned "function setting" and sets the transmission before the transition period TR, the display is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 even at this point. It also transmits notification data to the personal digital assistant 418.

After that, it is repeatedly checked whether or not there is a command to end the cooking process 1 from the user (SW30). If the cooking step 1 is performed by setting the timer in advance, the cooking step 1 is automatically terminated when the time set by the user elapses.

When the cooking process 1 is completed, in the next step SW31, the integrated display unit 30 notifies that the cooking process 1 is completed, waits for a user's command, and then shifts to the cooking process 2.

Further, in step SW31, as one of the processes of the "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified that the cooking step 1 has been completed.
Further, if there is a cooking menu that is similar to the notification performed in step SW29 but can be recommended by the cooking cooker 1, the notification is performed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and the notification is also sent to the external server 417. Will be done. Therefore, even in the portable information terminal 418, the existence of the recommended cooking menu can be known from the display screen 480 as shown in FIG. 159, which will be described later.

As can be seen from FIG. 149, the step SW31 is a transition period TR in which the heating operation is suspended, and the user takes out the cooked food from the heating chamber 113 and prepares the cooked food on the left heating unit 17HL. It is necessary to carry out the work of transferring to N (pot, etc.).

The length of the transition period TR is freely determined by the user until the user gives a command to start cooking (cooking process 2) (however, a long pause such as 30 minutes or more causes an error and cooperates. Cooking mode is automatically canceled).

Therefore, the user can examine the value of the recommended cooking menu by using this rest period TR. If necessary, you can check the ingredients in the refrigerator 411 at this point and listen to the opinions of the residents. During the rest period TR, the monitoring level of the human detection sensor JC is automatically changed to a low level. Therefore, when the user moves away from the front of the cooking cooker 1 (becomes absent), the cooking cooker is immediately used. 1 does not issue an alarm.

When the user presses the input key 43MS, the rest period TR is immediately terminated, and induction heating (cooking step 2) in the left heating unit 17HL is started (SW32).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of the cooking step 2, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the start of cooking. In addition, information indicating that the cooking step 2 of the cooperative cooking has been started is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (SW33).

Next, the portable information terminal 418 shown in FIG. 150 will be described.
The personal digital assistant 418 has a transmission unit and a reception unit 460, a communication control unit 461, a central processing unit (CPU) 462, a ROM and RAM 463, a speaker 464, a touch-type operation unit 465, and a display screen. It has a display unit 466, a heating cooker database (storage unit) 468, an attitude detection unit 469, a remote control information generation unit 470, and a storage unit 467. The transmitting unit and the receiving unit 460 have an NFC input / output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication.

Reference numeral 475 is a voice input unit that converts voice into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 466, the display unit 467, and the voice input unit 475 are integrated on the hardware to form the display operation unit 471. A search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 475 and performs a term search, information search, and the like is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the mobile information terminal 418, or may be provided in the external server 417 and have a search function outside the mobile information terminal 418.

The posture detection unit 469 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the portable information terminal 418. As a result, the signal detected in the vertical direction of the portable information terminal 418 is output to the central processing unit 462.

The central processing unit 462 receives a detection signal from the posture detection unit 469 and controls the display direction of the display unit 467.
The central processing unit 462 inputs a signal received from the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking device 1 to the remote control information generation unit 470.

The cooking device database 468 uses the "notifying data" 472 of the cooking device 1 to generate notification information (including image information) for the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1 and the voice synthesizer 95. I have it.
The cooker database 468 also holds "remote control data" 473 for the integrated control device MC of the cooker 1.

The notification data 472 and the remote control data 473 may be stored in the portable information terminal 418 from the beginning, but are connected to the external server 417 which is an information providing means via the wide area communication circuit network 416. However, it may be obtained by downloading from the external server. That is, the cooking cooker database 468 does not need to be fixedly stored and constructed, and may be in the form of acquiring information as needed and temporarily storing it in a volatile memory.

The remote control information generation unit 470 processes the signal acquired from the cooking device 1 via the central processing unit 462 and the input signal from the display operation unit 471, respectively, and remotely controls the cooking device 1. Generate information.

The "remote control information" here means information on the input operation of the cooking device 1 corresponding to all cooking modes including the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and integration in the linked cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the like. The display information of the display unit 30, and further, the display information regarding the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L are included. However, in all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the information that is a command to start the heating operation is not included. Therefore, the remote control information does not cause the cooking cooker 1 to receive a command to start the heating operation.

The central processing unit 462 executes the processing of the entire portable information terminal 418 according to the control program stored in the ROM / RAM, and reads data necessary in the process of executing the processing from the ROM / RAM. , The data generated in the process of executing the process is stored in the ROM / RAM. The storage unit 471 is a non-volatile memory made of a semiconductor, and can store information of the cooking device 1 read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 460.

When the user touches a specific portion of the display unit 467 of the mobile information terminal 418, the remote control information generation unit 470 generates remote control information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitting unit and the receiving unit 460 to the cooking device 1.

The integrated control device MC of the cooking device 1 that has received the remote control information handles the remote control information as input operation information of the cooking mode. For example, when a remote control signal relating to the cooperative cooking mode is received, the first display screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 selects one cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, as shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later. Transition to the screen. However, the heating cooker 1 does not unconditionally operate with the remote control information of the portable information terminal 418. This is as described in FIG. 148.

On the other hand, on the mobile information terminal 418 side that has transmitted the remote control information, the display of the display unit 467 changes based on the remote control information. That is, the content of the display screen by the touch operation in the display operation unit 471 of the portable information terminal 418 and the display content of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1 change according to an approximate operation procedure, but the state of the change changes. It is not transmitted to the cooking device 1 one by one in real time.

In the portable information terminal 418, even if the remote control information is generated, it is recognized as a regular remote control signal in the cooking cooker 1 after the confirmation signal of the cooking mode is transmitted. That is, the remote control information from the mobile information terminal 418 is collectively transmitted when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the mobile information terminal 418 in order to confirm the cooking mode.

The remote control information transmitted from the personal digital assistant 418, for example, regarding the cooperative cooking mode, is information necessary for cooking a specific cooking menu (for example, "karaage") in the cooperative cooking mode, and is heated. Source, cooking process content, control conditions (parameters) such as heating power and heating time. That is, detailed control conditions that can be set by the user on the first specific screen 30SP are also included.

There are already many proposals for a method of controlling a microwave oven or an induction heating cooker by a wireless signal from a portable information terminal 418.
For example, a device that transfers cooking procedure information to the cooking device by short-range wireless communication from a portable information terminal (home network terminal) placed near the cooking device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-113787), or mobile information. A technique for transferring heating control information from a terminal to a cooking cooker by wireless communication (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-37068, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-14063) has been proposed.

We also propose a technique for generating a remote control signal including graphic information corresponding to the operation content of a cooking cooker (gas stove) and transmitting it by wireless communication from a personal digital assistant (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-1653539). Has been done.

In the seventh embodiment, the display contents of the display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 480 of the mobile information terminal 418 will be described below.

FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B) are display screens of the personal digital assistant 418.
The display screen 480 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Various icons (input keys) 491L, 491M, 491R, 492 to 496, etc., which will be described later, are visually recognized by the display of the display screen 480, although they do not appear as physical structures on the upper surface (surface) of the glass plate. Can be recognized above. Although a specific part of the glass plate itself does not emit light or generate an image, in the following explanation, it is the user's point of view that characters, figures, and other information are displayed in this way. Stand up and use the expression "display on display screen".

The "icon" can be input as desired. That is, a capacitance detection type key is arranged in each icon portion. By touching the icon, the touch operation unit 466 (see FIG. 150) generates a command signal to the central processing unit 462.

To display the presence and function of the icon, certain functions are displayed in text or graphics (at least in a state where input is acceptable). For example, as in the example of FIG. 151 (A), the character 491L is displayed as "left IH operation unit".

Reference numeral 481 is a menu display unit on the initial screen shown in FIG. 151 (A). In FIG. 151 (B), the menu display unit 481 is changed to the menu selection display unit 482 of the left heating unit. Further, in FIG. 152 (A), the display changes to the heating source selection display unit 483 called “heating source selection”.

Further, the menu display unit 481 is changed to the control menu selection display unit 484 of the range grill called "RG control menu selection" in FIG. 152 (B).
Further, the menu display unit 481 is changed to the cooperative cooking menu display unit 485 called "cooperative cooking menu selection" in FIG. 158 (A).

In FIG. 158 (B), the menu display unit 481 is replaced with a preparation information display unit 486 called “next preparation guide”. In FIGS. 159 (A) and 159, the menu display unit 481 is changed to the name display unit 487 of the cooperative cooking menu showing “karaage” which is one of the cooperative cooking menus.

In FIG. 151 (A), 490 is a caution information display unit as a standby initial screen. At the time before the start of operation, the heating chamber 113 may have already become hot due to the heat of the previous cooking, and FIG. 151 (A) is an example of calling attention to this.
It also shows that the power is already on.

491M is a selection unit (icon) of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the central operation unit 40M, cooking can be performed with a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

491L is a selection unit (icon) of the left operation unit 40L. 491R is a selection unit (icon) of the right operation unit 40R.
Reference numeral 492 is an advice display selection unit (icon). When this is touched, the voice synthesizer 95 or the integrated display unit 30 is notified of reference information for the operation according to the touched scene.

The FG indicates the fingertip of the user.
In FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 and other figures, the triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 are screen switching marks.

The screen switching mark 503 is also provided in FIG. 152 (B) below. When these marks are touched, the display screen 480 can be switched in a fixed order each time the marks are touched. Incidentally, when the screen switching mark 502 is touched in FIG. 151 (B), the display screen 480 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 is switched by an image appearing from the left side.

The screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by moving the fingertip FG while touching the display screen 480 and having a scroll function for switching the screen by moving the display screen accordingly. ..

In FIG. 151 (A), when the left operation unit selection unit (icon) 491L is touched, the screen is switched to the display screen 480 shown in FIG. 151 (B) without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504.

In FIG. 151 (B), 493 is a control menu display unit (icon) in the IH single cooking mode.
There are a total of eight control menus for the IH single cooking mode. Five of them are displayed on the right half of the display screen 480 of FIG. 151 (B). The control menu display unit (icon) 493 is "boiled", "boiled", "cooked rice", "boiled + heat-retaining" and "cooperative cooking".

Further, the remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 480. There are three types: a control menu display unit (icon) 488 for "heat insulation", a control menu display unit (icon) 494 for "fried food", and a control menu display unit (icon) 489 for "preheating".

In FIG. 151 (B), 495 is a menu screen display unit (icon) that selects to return to the first menu display screen.
Reference numeral 496 is an input confirmation display unit (icon) for confirming that one control menu (for example, “boiler”) in FIG. 151 (B) has been selected. When this is pressed, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "water heater", the screen automatically switches to the control condition setting screen for water heater.

Next, FIG. 152 (A) will be described.
497A and 497B are induction heating source selection units (icons) for selecting the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR. Reference numeral 497C is a heating source selection unit (icon) for selecting the microwave heating source 189.

In FIG. 152 (A), 498 is a range grill heating source selection unit (icon), and 499 is a cooperative cooking selection unit (icon).
In FIG. 152 (A), when the range grill heating source selection unit (icon) 498 is touched, the display screen changes to FIG. 152 (B) 480.

Next, FIG. 152 (B) will be described.
Reference numeral 500 is an RG control menu selection unit (icon) indicating a range grill (RG) control menu. There are a total of 10 range grill (RG) control menus such as "warm", "range manual", and "meat thawing".

In FIG. 152 (B), 497A is an induction heating source selection unit (icon) that selects the left heating unit 17HL. Reference numeral 497B is a selection unit (icon) of the right heating unit 17HR.

Reference numeral 497C is a selection unit (icon) for selecting a microwave induction heating source 189.
When the screen switching mark (icon) 503 is touched in FIG. 152 (B), the display screen 480 in FIG. 152 (B) changes to FIG. 153 (B).

Next, FIGS. 153 (A) and 153 (B) will be described.
FIGS. 153 (A) and 153 (B) show a state in which all (10 pieces) of the range grill (RG) control menu are displayed. FIG. 153 (A) shows the five control menus 500, and FIG. 153 (B) shows the remaining five control menus 500.

The large arrows shown in FIGS. 153 (A) and 153 (B) indicate the rear and the front when the display screen 480 is horizontal. The display screen 480 does not hinder the operation regardless of whether it is horizontal, vertical, or slanted.

Next, FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B) will be described.
FIG. 154 (A) shows a state in which the “warm” control menu 500 is selected in the range grill (RG) control menu in the state of FIG. 152 (A).
When the fingertip touches the RG control menu selection unit (icon) 500, the selection unit 500 senses the touch and changes the display color, for example, inverts to a white character. When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 154 (A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 154 (B).

FIG. 154 (B) is the default screen of the range grill (RG) control menu.
Reference numeral 504 is a name display unit (icon) of the RG control menu.
The control menu display form and design of FIG. 154 (B) are similar to those shown in FIG. 49 and the like of the first embodiment. This display is possible because of the cooker database 468 and the remote control information generator 470 (see FIG. 150).

In FIG. 154 (B), 505 is a temperature display unit (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 154 (B), the default value is 80 ° C., but since there are 75 ° C. and 85 ° C. as the next candidates that can be selected, they are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 154 (B), on the name display unit (icon) 504 of the RG control menu, the next display candidates "oven" and "boiled leaf vegetables" are displayed slightly smaller adjacent to the name display unit (icon) 504. Will be done.

When the user wants to change the set temperature of the range to 75 ° C. in the state shown in FIG. 154 (B), the user may place the fingertip FG on the display portion of 75 ° C. This will be described in FIG. 155 below.
Also, when changing "warm" in the control menu to "oven" or "leafy vegetable boiled", the candidate switching mark (icon) 519 near "oven" or "leafy vegetable boiled" is also used. Just touch 520.

In FIG. 154 (B), reference numeral 506 is a reference image display unit. The reference image may be other than a photograph, or may be an illustration showing an image of "warm" in the control menu.

Next, FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B) will be described.
When the orientation of the personal digital assistant 418 is changed to the vertical direction, the display screen 480 changes vertically as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B). The display screen 480 may be set to be fixed to the vertically long display as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B).

Switching between FIG. 155 (A) and FIG. 155 (B) can be performed only by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503.
Next, FIGS. 156 (A) and 156 (B) will be described. In order to select the "warm" control menu 500 shown in FIG. 155 (A), when the fingertip touches the control menu selection unit 500, the display color changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A). Invert to white text. When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 156 (A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 156 (B).

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 156 (B), if it is desired to change the (heating upper limit) set temperature of the "warm" range (microwave heating) to 75 ° C, the display portion of 75 ° C (RG control). The fingertip FG may be placed on the temperature display unit 505) of the menu. Then, the display screen 480 changes to the state shown in FIG. 157 (A).

In FIG. 156 (B), 507A is an auxiliary information display unit and is displayed in the vicinity of the reference image display unit 506. In FIG. 156 (B), the user is advised to select the set temperature.

Next, FIG. 157 (A) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 157 (A), the set temperature is changed to 75 ° C.. Since it is still in the stage before the control conditions are fixed, another set temperature of "85 ° C." is still displayed.

In the state of FIG. 157 (A), the transmission key display unit (icon) 521 of the remote control signal is displayed for the first time.
In FIG. 157 (A), when the transmission key display unit 521 is selected, the setting information displayed in FIG. 157 (A) is collectively transmitted to the cooking cooker 1 as remote control information.

Since the state of FIG. 157 (B) is the stage where all the conditions for executing "warm" in the RG control menu have been selected, the condition of the heating temperature "75 ° C" displayed on the temperature display unit 505 is heating. It is transmitted to the cooker 1.

In FIG. 157 (A), 507B is an auxiliary information display unit and is displayed in the vicinity of the reference image display unit 506. FIG. 157 (A) shows that the input operation is completed by pressing the transmission key display unit 521.

At the stage of FIG. 157 (B) when the remote control signal is finished, the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. By pressing this, the heating operation at the stage of FIG. 157 (B) can be stopped. Once the stop key display unit 522 is pressed, all the remote control conditions are input again in order to return to the first stage.

The personal digital assistant 418 is provided with a stop key display unit (icon) 522 capable of immediately transmitting a command to lower the heating stop, and has a function for ensuring the safety of the cooking device 1.

Next, FIG. 158 (A) will be described.
FIG. 158 (A) is a screen displayed when the linked cooking selection unit 499 shown in FIG. 152 (A) is touched. The display screen 480 of FIG. 158 (A) may be displayed by touching the central operation unit selection unit 491M of FIG. 151 (A). However, when the central operation unit selection unit 491M is touched, the touch operation until the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected is slightly increased because it is shared with the selection screen of the range grill cooking mode (composite cooking mode KM2).

FIG. 158 (A) is an example of selecting “karaage” in one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Since we want to cook "karaage", when we touch the linked cooking menu display unit (selection unit) 500C, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 158 (A), and it is inverted to, for example, white characters.

When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 158 (A), the screen changes to the display screen (not shown) for cooking “karaage”. The display screen 480 of FIG. 159 (A) is a display screen showing the stage of the cooking step 1 of “karaage”.

Note that, in FIG. 158 (A), only the linked cooking menu is shown, and the subsequent diagram in which the heating unit and control conditions are selected is omitted. However, in the display screen 480 of FIG. 158 (A), the linked cooking menu is selected. If the unit (icon) 500C is selected (touched), the screen advances to the display screen 480 for setting the selected cooking menu (for example, “karaage”).

On the “karaage” setting display screen 480, icons (334L, 334R) for selecting the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 of the first embodiment are displayed and transmitted. Key display unit (icon) 521 is displayed.

FIG. 159 (B) is an example of notification corresponding to "Reference information 1" FA1 notified by the heating cooker 1 in the middle of the cooking process 1 when "Karaage" is cooked in the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode. be.

In the seventh embodiment, in the "first reference information" FA1 notified by the cooking device 1, the door of the heating chamber 113 is opened, and then the heating is performed, as shown in FIG. 158 (B). Two things are notified: taking out the heated food from the room 113.

Also on the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal 418, as the content corresponding to the reference information FA1 as described above, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), the preparatory work reference image 509 showing that the door is opened and the reference work reference image 509. A preparatory work reference image 510 showing that the object to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer is displayed.
Note that 511 is alert information. Further, 512 is auxiliary information explaining the work of the user.

Next, FIG. 159 (A) will be described.
The display screen 480 of FIG. 159 (A) displays the stage of the cooking step 1 of “karaage”.
Reference numeral 513 is a process information display unit. In FIG. 159 (A), it is shown that the microwave oven heating is still continuing. Reference numeral 514 is a display unit for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is performed in the right heating unit 17HR next.

Reference numeral 515 is a display unit of the recommended menu. The display unit 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched from the inventory information previously acquired from the refrigerator 401. The example of FIG. 159 (A) suggests that after the heating chamber 113 currently in use in "karaage" is no longer used, there is another recommended cooking menu that can be cooked in that heating chamber.

Specifically, at the stage of FIG. 159 (A), the recommended menu is not automatically displayed. When the user touches the detail display instruction unit (icon) 523 displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 159 (B).

The selection unit corresponding to the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 521 as shown in FIG. 159 (B) is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1. Then, after a certain period of time, the screen of FIG. 159 (A) automatically returns to the screen of FIG. 158 (A).

Even at the stage of FIG. 159 (B) after the transmission of the remote control signal is completed, the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

In FIG. 159 (B), 487 is a name display unit of the cooperative cooking menu, and in this case, 516, in which “karaage” of the name of the object to be cooked is displayed, is a display unit of the recommended menu. The specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed on the display unit 515 of the recommended menu. We recommend thawing and warming the food.

In FIG. 159 (B), 517 is auxiliary information of the recommended menu, and it is displayed that cooking can be performed by the "warm" control menu using microwave heating.
518 is a cooking reference image of the recommended menu. Illustrations (images) may be used instead of photographs.
Even at the stage of FIG. 159 (B), the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

Next, FIG. 160 (A) will be described.
The display screen 480 of FIG. 160 (A) is in a state where the cooking step 1 of “karaage” has been completed and the transition period TR has been entered.
Reference numeral 513 is a process information display unit. In FIG. 160 (A), it is indicated that the microwave oven heating is completed. Reference numeral 514 is a display unit for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is performed in the right heating unit 17HR next.

Reference numeral 515 is a display unit of the recommended menu. In this display unit 515, if there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched from the inventory information acquired in advance from the refrigerator 401, the recommended cooking menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 160 (A). It shows that there is.

When the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 480 of FIG. 160 (A) is touched, it is executed in parallel with the cooking step 2 in the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 160 (B). Display the details of possible cooking menu candidates.

The selection unit corresponding to the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 160A may also be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1. However, when the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 is not a touch type input method, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key is pressed.

When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 of FIG. 160 (B) is pressed, information on the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) using the heating chamber 113 is transmitted to the heating cooker 1. .. That is, the intention of "agreeing with the recommended menu" is transmitted to the user who is cooking in front of the cooking device 1.

When the information of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is transmitted to the heating cooker 1, the owner of the portable information terminal 418 is not in the kitchen KT and the above recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is not present. ) May be notified. That is, at that moment, another user may be in front of the cooking device 1. In any case, the user can know that the heating chamber 113 can be effectively used and cooking can be performed in parallel.

In the above description, the signal from the portable information terminal 418 reaches the heating cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416, but it has an NFC input / output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, the input may be directly close to or in contact with the NFC input / output unit (not shown) on the heating cooker 1 side.

Summary of Embodiment 7.
As is clear from the above description, in the seventh embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose opening can be opened and closed by a door 114,
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 and
Notification unit AN30 that notifies information about the cooking process,
An input operation unit 40 that enables touch-type input and voice input, and
The wireless communication unit 49, which wirelessly transmits control information for cooking to the outside and receives information from the outside,
It has an integrated control device MC for controlling the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that drives one or both of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source in cooperation with each other.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, and after the completion of the first cooking process, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a user's start command, and automatically performs the second cooking process. It ’s something that goes on,
The integrated control device MC is used in the middle of the cooking step 1.
(1) Reference information FA1 regarding the cooking process 1 and
(2) Using the heating chamber 113 occupied in the cooking step 1, reference information FA1 regarding another cooking that can be executed in parallel with the cooking step 2 is provided.
The notification unit was configured to automatically notify the stage of the cooking step 1 or in the transition period TR.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, it can be expected that the convenience of the user is further enhanced as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, since the user can input by voice without manually inputting and can start and stop the heating operation, it can be expected that the convenience of the user is further improved as compared with the first embodiment.

Moreover, since the voice input mode is limited to the case where there is a person in the vicinity of the cooking cooker 1 by the human detection sensor JC, the safety can be improved.

Further, in the cooking device 1, the input operation for starting the cooking after the main power is turned on is started, and only at the stage where the input is not completed, the external portable information terminal 418 is used. The remote control signal is enabled (Fig. 148, see step SW5).

Therefore, there is a situation that the remote control signal from the outside is interrupted while the user is inputting on the input operation unit 40 on the heating cooker 1 side, and the input halfway is wasted. do not have. In addition, it does not cause confusion for users who are actually cooking in front of the cooking device 1.

Further, also on the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal 418, as a content corresponding to the reference information FA1 as described above, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), a preparatory work reference image showing that the door 114 is opened. 509 and a preparatory work reference image 510 showing that the object to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer are displayed.

Therefore, even if there is no user or resident who possesses the portable information terminal 418 in the vicinity of the cooking device 1, the user can obtain useful information in a timely manner so that the cooking device 1 can be effectively used. be able to. That is, it is possible to prepare in advance the work required when the current cooking process is completed, to re-recognize the procedure for shifting to the next cooking process, and to further improve the convenience of the user.

In the seventh embodiment, the portable information terminal 418 has a function of transmitting a "remote control signal" to the cooking device 1.
Correspondingly, the cooking cooker 1 has a function of receiving the "remote control signal".

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside of the cooking cooker 1, it is determined whether or not the predetermined "permission condition" is satisfied, and it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied. Only in the case, I tried to proceed to the step of the cooperative cooking mode according to the remote control signal (external input).
Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which cooking is interrupted due to insufficient power or cooking fails due to insufficient heating power (heating) in the middle of the cooking process of cooperative cooking without satisfying the permission condition.

Furthermore, whether or not to start the heating operation even if the remote control signal is received is left to the judgment and input of the user who is finally facing the cooking cooker 1, and the wrong remote control signal from the outside is used. There is no danger that heating will be inadvertently (unconditionally) started against the will of the user or resident.

It is difficult to imagine a situation where a user holding a mobile information terminal 418 transmits remote control information from a remote location far away from the cooking device 1, but in the same kitchen KT, the mobile information terminal 418 Can be placed on a table or the like and operated by the user.

By the way, as described in the seventh embodiment, the display screen (display design) of the integrated display unit 30 and the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418 in the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 are There are many similarities in terms of cooking menu display, default value display of control conditions, and changes. Therefore, in the work performed by the user while checking the display screen 480 of the mobile information terminal 418, there is no great sense of discomfort and the burden of remote control input by the user is small.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 156 (B) and 157 (A) (B), cooking is performed at the stage where the cooking menu and control conditions (temperature, thermal power, etc.) are determined on the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418. The display design corresponds to the display screen of the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display unit 30 of the device 1.

The display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418 and the display screens of the second specific screen 30SC and the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1 correspond (approximate) at the stage of important input items. It is a design.
Even a user who is accustomed to using the input operation unit 40 of the heating cooker 1 does not feel uncomfortable with the operation of the portable information terminal 418, and there is no concern that the user's operability will be impaired. Conversely, a user who is accustomed to the operation of the portable information terminal 418 does not impair the operability even in the input operation unit 40 of the actual cooking device 1.

In the seventh embodiment, the portable information terminal 418 has a function of manually inputting a "remote control signal" to the cooking device 1 in the portable information terminal 418 and transmitting the input result. The recipe information held in the external server 417 may be acquired and used as a remote control signal.

As shown in FIG. 46 of the first embodiment, the standby display screen 2A at startup displays two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) that guides the user to a dedicated recipe site (one of the external servers).
By reading the two-dimensional information with the portable information terminal 418, you can connect to the recipe site, so you can browse various cooking recipes (procedure instructions for cooking methods, data, etc.) and easily download the data. You can do it.

Therefore, by step SW5 in FIG. 148, the recipe data is acquired by the portable information terminal 418, and the control data such as the heating power (heating intensity) and the heating time included in the data are transmitted to the cooking device 1. Just do it. In that case, the recipe data is in a format in which the contents can be analyzed in steps SW10 and SW11 of FIG. 148.

(Variation example of Embodiment 7)
FIG. 161 shows a modified example of the seventh embodiment, and shows an operation management system of the cooking cooker 1 and the home electric appliance 400. FIG. 162 is a display operation explanatory diagram 1 in the portable information terminal 418 of FIG. 161. FIG. 163 is a display operation explanatory diagram 2 in the portable information terminal 418 of FIG. 161.

The external server 417 is a plurality of aggregates that perform different information processing. The operation manager of the external server 417 may be the same or different. For example, one external server may provide useful information to the alarm device 441 or the temperature monitoring device 440.

In this modification, the portable information terminal 418 can be directly wirelessly communicated with the cooking device 1. Further, the cooking device 1 and the portable information terminal 418 are significantly different from the embodiment 7 in that they can be automatically connected to each other when they are within a communicable range.

In FIG. 161, the communication method between the personal digital assistant 418 and the heating cooker 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards, and is also portable. A communication method using a wireless LAN such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the information terminal 418 and the router 530.

First, the portable information terminal 418 performs mutual authentication with the cooking device 1. The cooking cooker 1 has a function setting input key 43KP, which is operated at the first startup to display a mutual authentication setting screen from the function setting menu and perform mutual authentication.

Further, the application software for the cooking device 1 is stored in advance in the cooking device database 468 or the storage unit 467 of the portable information terminal 418.

When a signal for automatic connection is transmitted from the mobile information terminal 418 when the cooking device 1 is started, mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking device 1 and the mobile information terminal 418. ..

Even if a connection command means (not shown) for commanding wireless communication at an arbitrary timing is provided as in the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) described in the first embodiment and operated when the cooking cooker 1 is started. good. For example, the connection command means (not shown) may be operated at the stage of steps SW2 to SW4 shown in FIG. 148.

When the connection between the cooking cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 is established as described above, the state in which the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 can directly and wirelessly communicate with each other continues. If the mobile information terminal 418 moves and the distance from the cooking device 1 is increased, communication may be temporarily disabled, but when the communication range (distance) is restored, the connection status is automatically changed. Recover.

Further, after the cooking step 1 or the preheating step is started in the state where the connection between the cooking device 1 and the portable information terminal 418 is established, the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 If the mutual wireless communication state between them is interrupted for a certain period of time or longer, an alarm is issued on both the cooking device 1 side and the portable information terminal 418 side.
After this alarm, the cooking cooker 1 is automatically held in a state where the heating power value at that time is lowered by one step or two steps.
To release this holding state, a specific partial input key of the input operation unit 40 of the cooking cooker 1 may be touched (the input key 47 described with reference to FIG. 19 may be touched). As a result, the integrated control device MC of the cooking device 1 has confirmed the existence of the user.

Further, the cooking device 1 is in a connected state established with the portable information terminal 418 even when the user stops the heating operation in the middle of the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. Does not shut off automatically.

Further, even during the transition period TR, the cooking cooker 1 does not automatically cut off the connection state established with the portable information terminal 418.

When the heating cooker 1 shuts off the main power switch 97, it automatically shuts off the connection state established with the portable information terminal 418. After that, when the main power switch 97 is closed again and the cooking cooker 1 is started, if it is desired to connect to the portable information terminal 418 again, it is necessary to perform the specified operation again. For example, as described above, the input key 47 may be pressed during standby (before the start of the heating start operation).

According to this modification, the operating state of the cooker 1 is transmitted to the personal digital assistant 418 at any time (in real time), so that the user temporarily moves away from the cooker 1 and moves in the kitchen KT. Even if you move to another living space temporarily, if you have a personal digital assistant 418, you can know the latest cooking status.

If the personal digital assistant 418 has a function that can transmit the minimum remote control signal for ensuring safety, such as a command to stop heating or lower the heating power, it will heat even if the user is at a remote position. It is possible to stop the operation of the cooker 1 or reduce the heating power to the minimum without going through the external wide area communication network (Internet) 416.

In the wide area communication network 416, it is assumed that a communication failure temporarily occurs for some reason. On the other hand, in this modification, since the wide area communication network 416 is not interposed between the cooking device 1 and the portable information terminal 418, reliable information transfer can be expected.

Next, FIG. 152 (A) will be described. This is an improvement of the display screen 480 of the cooperative cooking menu described with reference to FIG. 158 (A).
For example, when the linked cooking menu display unit (selection unit) 500C for selecting "karaage" is touched, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 162 (A), and the characters are highlighted, for example, white characters.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 162 (A), a key display unit (icon) 524 for a search request for acquiring inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is displayed. When the key display unit 524 is touched, the display screen of FIG. 152 (B) is displayed.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 162 (B), whether or not there are ingredients for the cooking menu to be eaten together with "karaage" is easily displayed by the display unit 525. Reference numeral 526 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 162 (A).

Next, FIG. 163 (A) will be described. This is an improvement of the display screen 480 of the RG control menu described with reference to FIG. 156 (A).
For example, when the RG control menu selection unit (icon) 500 for selecting "warm" is touched, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 163 (A), and the characters are highlighted, for example, white characters.

The key display unit (icon) 527 for the search request is displayed on the display screen 480 of FIG. 163 (A). When the key display unit 527 is touched, the display screen of FIG. 163 (B) is displayed.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 163 (B) below, the display unit 528 simply displays whether or not there are ingredients in the cooking menu suitable for "warming". Reference numeral 529 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 163 (A).

In addition, after the use (occupation) of the heating chamber 113 is finished in the cooking step 1, the food material information in the cooperative cooking mode in which the inventory information is obtained in order to effectively utilize the heating chamber 113 and the food material information as shown in FIG. 163. The purpose of use is different in the food ingredient information when the RG control menu is selected. In the search when the RG control menu is selected, the condition "Are there ingredients for the cooking menu that can be eaten with the hamburger steak?", Which was one of the search conditions for linked cooking, is not necessary, so it is extracted from the search results. Ingredient information will increase.

Therefore, the features of the RG control menu, for example, foodstuffs that are effective by simultaneously utilizing the microwave heating and the radiant heat of the oven heating source 188, for example, frozen meat (compared to microwave heating alone), are further added. Ingredients that can be thawed deliciously in a short time may be set in advance, and the inventory of the refrigerator 401 may be checked under such conditions.

As shown in FIG. 161, the electric energy control unit (HEMS) 448, the temperature monitoring device 440, and the alarm device 441 are connected to the router 530 by a wireless LAN such as WiFi (registered trademark) as described above. It is connected by the communication method by.

The refrigerator 401 and the portable information terminal 418 may also be changed to a form capable of mutual communication, such as between the cooking device 1 and the cooking device 1. In this way, the personal digital assistant 418 can acquire inventory information directly from the refrigerator 401, and the personal digital assistant 418 can extract and provide a cooking menu useful to the cooking cooker 1. Even in this case, the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 may be transmitted to the external server 417, and the inventory information may be analyzed by using the specialized information processing capability of the external server 417. Then, the portable information terminal 418 may be a system that acquires and provides useful cooking menu information to the cooking cooker 1 from the external server 417.

In this modification, when the user holding the portable information terminal 418 is far away from the cooking cooker 1, mutual communication with the cooking cooker 1 becomes impossible. If you want to exchange information with the cooker 1 at a remote location, connect to the access point of the wide area communication network 416.

Embodiment 8.
FIG. 164 is an operation explanatory diagram regarding the cooking cooker disclosed in the eighth embodiment, and shows the relationship between the input key and the cooking process in the input operation unit from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in chronological order. be. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 115 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment has the function of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4. The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is characterized in that the preheating step is performed in the heating chamber 113, the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, and the cooking step 2 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL.

In the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are effective. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed to select one cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, the linked preheated cooking mode KM4 can be selected.

From the time when the input key 43MC is pressed, the oven heating source 189 of the heating chamber 113 starts heating with a predetermined electric power, and the atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 is raised. It takes several minutes or more to rise to the desired preheating temperature (at this stage, the cooking period P2 is entered).

On the other hand, from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed, the input of the left operation unit 40L is used to occupy the left heating unit 17HL which is determined by the control program (of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in the cooking process 2. The input function of the keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 is disabled. In FIG. 164, the part of the input key is shown by a broken line frame to show this invalidation.

The atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 is detected by the temperature sensor TS10 and the infrared temperature sensor 160. Then, when the integrated control device MC determines that the predetermined preheating completion temperature has been reached, the user is notified that the preheating is completed in the heating chamber 113 (according to the voice synthesizer 95).

At this stage, the user opens the door 114 and puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113.
At the stage when the door 114 is opened, the command of "start cooking" by the input key 43MS is canceled. Therefore, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS is pressed again (at this stage, the cooking period P3 is started. That is, the cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113.

In the cooking step 1, the microwave irradiation by the microwave heating source 189 may be performed, or the cooking step 1 may be completed only by the oven heating source 188.
Further, when it is necessary to raise the temperature inside and outside the object to be cooked in the shortest possible time, it is also useful to use both microwave heating and heating by radiant heat of the oven heating source 189.

The cooking step 1 may be performed by the user by setting the cooking time as in timer cooking, but the default value (time) may be determined in advance by the cooking menu. Furthermore, the user can optionally terminate at any time.

The example of FIG. 164 shows a case where the user arbitrarily terminates at any time. If the input key 43MT is pressed, the cooking step 1 is immediately completed. Then, from this point, the heating rest period P4 (transition period TR) is entered.

On the other hand, when the heating pause period P4 is entered, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are restored (in the integrated control device MC, the input signal from the left operation unit 40L is treated as an effective signal. Will be).

Therefore, even if the heating pause period P4 is entered, the left heating unit 17HL can be selected by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, and the left heating unit 17HL can be selected by operating the input keys 43L1 or 44L (induction heating). Cooking of the single cooking mode KM1 (according to the source 9) can be started.

In the heating pause period P4, as shown in FIG. 164, the input function of the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is disabled.

On the other hand, in the heating pause period P4, the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1 and the input key 43M2 for selecting the control condition are input so that cooking other than the linked cooking mode KM3 can be newly started. All key input functions are enabled (each input key is shown by a solid line frame). Further, the input function of the input key 43MT is effectively maintained in consideration of the case where the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is canceled at this stage.

FIG. 164 is an example in which nothing is cooked in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking step 1.
On the other hand, in the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), the user moves the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 above the left heating unit 17HL.

When the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 and the like are operated in the heating pause period P4 (transition period TR), the induction heating in the left heating unit 17HL is started, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2.
Then, when the input key 43L1 is pressed again, the cooking step 2 is immediately completed, and at this point, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) is canceled.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the end of the cooking step 2. Immediately after finishing the cooking step 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43L1) of the left operation unit 17HL is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 1 minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. Is a process that guides users to handle it as a part of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 and waits for additional input by the user (operation input such as input keys 43L2 and 43L3 that can set the heating power and time). good.

In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user confirms the degree of baking of the object to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL, and if the heating is insufficient, immediately touches the above input key. A method of performing additional heating can be adopted. This method can also improve the usability of the user.

In FIG. 164, since the left heating unit 17HL, which is determined by the control program (in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) to be used in the cooking step 2 from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed, is occupied, the left operation is performed. Although the process of disabling the input function of the input key (43L1 or the like) of the unit 40L is performed, the disabling time may be delayed until immediately before the start of the cooking period P3 or the heating pause period P4. This is because, depending on the target temperature for preheating, the time of the preheating step P2 may be long, and it is assumed that the left operation unit 17HL may be inconvenient if it cannot be used during that period.

The cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment is
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ,
The heating operation of the cooking step 2 is started by the start input key (starting unit) 43MS.
The end of the heating operation in the cooking step 2 is executed by the end input key (end portion) 43MT.

Therefore, since the heating operation start and end of the cooking process 2 can be centrally performed in the central operation unit 40M, the user can operate the central operation unit 40M to start and end the cooking process 2. Thereby, it is possible to provide a cooking device having good operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment is
The second heating means HM2 has a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188).
The integrated control device MC has an execution function of the combined cooking mode KM2 that is driven by combining the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means HM2.
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key 43MS for shifting to the operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 and an end input key 43MT for canceling the operation of the combined cooking mode.
The heating operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 is started by the start input key (starting unit) 43MS.
The end of the heating operation of the combined cooking mode KM2 is executed by the end input key (end portion) 43MT.
The start input key (start unit) 43MS and the end input key (end unit) 43MT are shared to command the start and end of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.

That is, in the cooking step 2 of the linked cooking mode KM3, when the end input key (cancellation unit) 43MT is operated once, the cooking step 2 is terminated, and when the cooking step 2 is pressed twice, the linked cooking is performed. The configuration is such that the operation of the mode KM2 is canceled.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation start and end of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be centrally performed.
Further, the cooking step 2 can be terminated or the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 can be canceled according to the number of times the end input key (end unit) 43MT is operated.
Thereby, one input key (end portion) 43MT can be used to provide a cooking device with good operability.

Further, the cooking device 1 of the eighth embodiment is
The central operation unit 40M has an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The display content of the integrated display unit 30 is the standby initial screen (FIG.) from the first specific screen 30SP when the end input key (end unit) 43MT is operated in the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. (See 52), which is automatically changed to
The cooker 1 having the configuration was disclosed.

Therefore, when the heating of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled in the central operation unit 40M, the standby initial screen is automatically displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding or erroneous operation, and the heating has good operability. A cooker can be provided.

Summary of Embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, in the eighth embodiment, the cooking cooker 1 according to the tenth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N to be heated on the top plate 15 and the like.
A second heating means (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked contained in the heating chamber 113,
Notification means AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) for notifying cooking information, and
The integrated control device MC that controls the heating operation and
An input means (input operation unit) 40 for giving a command to the integrated control device MC is provided.
The integrated control device MC has a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, and after the preheating step, the cooking object is cooked using the second heating means HM2. After the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 1, the cooked object N heated in the cooking step 1 is further heated by heating the cooked object N using the first heating means HM1. It has a function to execute the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 having the cooking step 2 to be heated.
It is a cooking apparatus 1 characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode can be executed by using two or more places, and the preheating step can also be executed by using the heating chamber 113. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As is clear from the above description, in the eighth embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on the upper surface,
A heating chamber 113 inside the main body, the front opening of which is closed by a door so as to be openable and closable.
The first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated placed above the heating portions arranged at least at least two places on the left and right of the top plate 15
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber, and
Notification unit AN that notifies information about the cooking process,
A control unit MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit.
It has an input operation unit 40 that gives a command signal to the control unit MC, and has.
The input operation unit includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means.
The control unit MC has an execution function of a cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are linked.
The cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a program for sequentially executing the first cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 and the cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1.
The control unit MC
(1) When the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected in the central operation unit 40M, the operation pattern is shifted to the cooperative cooking mode.
(2) The heating operation start and end of the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed in response to a command from the central operation unit 40M.
(3) During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input functions in the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R of the first heating means HM1 are disabled.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is restored, and the heating operation start and end of the cooking process 2 is the left operation unit 40L or the right operation. Execute according to the command from the part 40R,
The compound type cooking cooker characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode can be executed by using two or more places, and the preheating step can also be executed by using the heating chamber 113.
In addition, the input function is appropriately restricted so that there is no unnecessary input function, and the user's operation error is prevented.
As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, as is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 8, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, with respect to the induction heating source 9 first used in the (first) cooperative control mode (see FIG. 55), the operation other than the cooperative control mode is prohibited or restricted from the input operation unit 40. The left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR were used, but another induction heating unit may be added to the target.

Further, in the second cooperative control mode (see FIG. 55), the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, or both of them are driven at the same time to start the cooking process. In this case, the microwave heating source is used. The operation of the 189, the oven heating source 188, or both of them in a cooking mode other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be prohibited or restricted. In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, by preferentially securing the heating source required in the cooking process, it is possible to perform a wide range of cooking using a plurality of heating means in the cooperative cooking mode. ..

In the description of the first embodiment, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display corresponding to the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. As an operation, the first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, or the like. rice field.
Instead of such an aspect of switching the entire screen, the basic configuration of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC is unified, and the design is such that the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 are clearly distinguished. May be.

For example, on the first display screen 30SP, it is clearly displayed in characters that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, while on the second display screen 30SC, it is clearly displayed in characters that the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. It should be displayed in. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light emitting display unit such as the light emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, and when either one is emitting light. , It suffices to know that it is the cooking mode on the light emitting side.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, and when the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode is performed, this A cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit) may be provided.

The cooperative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. For example, the purpose is to make up for the lack of heating by finally returning the food to be cooked in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9 and the cooking step 2 is performed in the microwave heating source 189 onto the top plate 15. , A cooking step 3 is provided for the purpose of adjusting, adding seasonings, other cooking liquids, and the like.

As one example, the final cooking is finished while directly visually checking on the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, it is a case where the food to be cooked substantially completed in the cooking step 2 is transferred onto the right heating unit 17HR and weakly heated for a long time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above description, in the cooperative cooking mode, when one cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) is specified, the heating source to be used and its order are automatically determined, but the user's intention is prioritized. You may change it to.

For example, "Cooking object X" and "Cooking object Y", which are one of the cooperative cooking modes, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR. Since this is done in, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating unit 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "Cooking item Z", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, if the left heating unit 17HL is specified, the user is not accustomed to using it, so it is assumed that the operation may be confusing. To.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the determination result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when the linked cooking mode is first selected, the user can see on the first specific screen 30SP. The right heating unit 17HR that you are accustomed to may be displayed preferentially. That is, for example, when selecting the heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and then the user may input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot be heated properly due to restrictions such as the heating power value for cooking the object to be cooked and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side is performed. If only the heating part specified in the program (default setting) can be cooked, it will not be misused or misunderstood by the user. For example, in the case where a heating unit having a relatively weak heating power such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, if the user selects it, the cooking cooker 1 side notifies the user. , It is good to give guidance to correct (move the object to be heated such as a pot to another heating part).

In the first embodiment, two are an internal path that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and an external path that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but this route may be replaced and changed as follows.
(1) Internal route: A route that cools the inverter circuit board 121 by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152F by the third cooling fan 128, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: The heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152B by the fourth cooling fan 129, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally. The route leading to the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat sinks (heat sink fins) are laminated and cooling air passes through a narrow space between the heat sinks to exchange heat (heat dissipation). Therefore, the pressure loss of the cooling air is large. In other words, the air passage resistance is large.
Therefore, by exhausting the cooling air passing through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 without entering the heating chamber 113 (shortening the length of the air passage), the improvement of balancing the internal route and the external route is achieved. Is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. That is, as described in the first embodiment, in order to arrange the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, and to realize the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing at a low cost. This is a promising plan.

Further, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is abolished, and the entire amount of the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is used as it is. It may be discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the duct 307 to simplify the cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air passage resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as cost advantage.

In the case of a user who does not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to eighth embodiments, the sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are separately performed. Become. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if the packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and the packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are set separately, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. Never.

In the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure, as shown in the first to eighth embodiments, it is not essential that the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are configured in separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured by one housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed of a thin metal plate. However, either one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be formed of a plastic material. For example, it may be formed of a thermoplastic plastic material. One example of the material is PET or PA, PP or ABS. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. Further, "PA" means polyamide and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be decided in consideration of the heat resistant temperature and the durability as a structure. Further, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed of plastic, and the remaining portion may be formed of a metal plate material.

As the induction heating circuit, various drive methods such as a half-bridge circuit and a full-bridge circuit may be adopted depending on the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, the full bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

Further, the IH coil is arranged not only in a donut-shaped form but also in an annular main heating coil and close to both sides of the main heating coil, as shown in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 55338546. An induction heating unit including a flat first sub-heating coil and a second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the induction heating is started, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (thermal power value and thermal power level) without setting the thermal power, and then the heating start in which the user decides the desired thermal power. The operation method was adopted. However, other methods may be used. For example, after turning on the main power, be sure to determine the target induction heating source, the thermal power value (watt) and the thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "large" to "small"), and then input the specified values. An operation method in which a start command is given by a key or the like may be adopted, and such a method does not affect the effect and the essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower air passage at the time of microwave heating cools the air passage (internal path) of the cooling air that cooled the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external path) for the cooling air, and these two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then heated via the common exhaust port 20. It was released to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not always necessary to go through one (common) exhaust duct as such, and it is not necessary to collect the exhaust flow to one exhaust port 20. For example, an exhaust port 20 and another second exhaust port are provided at different positions (positions directly below the exhaust cover 19), and cooling air of either the internal path or the external path is blown from the second exhaust port. It may be exhausted. In particular, in the form in which the rear portion of the upper unit 100 is partitioned back and forth by the partition plate 52 (Embodiment 1), it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In the first embodiment, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. It was a form of The operation key 98 may be called an operation button, but it has basically the same structure.

However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to the form of such an input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. As a storage form, a method of moving in the horizontal direction such as a drawer and a method of rotating around one fulcrum have been conventionally known.

The method of rotating and storing is called an operation unit of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, JP-A-2004-28569, JP-A-2004-3845, JP-A-3-2h26, and the like. Has been done. Further, as the main power switch 97, a seesaw type switch as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-3845 may be used.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC at the time of use. That is, since the user can perform the main power supply of the cooking cooker 1 while standing in the vicinity of the front of the cooking cooker 1, there is no problem in realizing the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way may be provided, for example, on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that includes a heating unit (gas burner, etc.) exposed (faced) on the top plate and a heating unit in the heating chamber (grill storage), and rotates and stores each operation unit. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941 also proposes a cooking device that employs the operation unit of the above.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the example in which the magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a heating cooker using a semiconductor oscillator has been proposed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator is composed of a small signal generator (s) configured to generate a high frequency signal at the first power level and the small signal generator. It includes a solid-state high-frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high-frequency signal of the above. Then, the solid-state amplifier amplifies the first high-frequency signal having the first low power level into the second high-frequency signal having the second high power level, and supplies the signal to the heating chamber containing the food to be cooked (food). Was there.
In realizing the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generation source composed of such a semiconductor element may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, all the cooling fans are set for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 of FIG. 38) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control device MC checks whether an abnormal current, voltage, etc. is generated on the circuit by performing a trial run only. In that case, for a certain short time period, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, and 129 may be started all at once, or they may be started one by one for a short time. This does not impair the intrinsic effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, the user had to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 68, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL was selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require such a step of selecting a heating unit.

For example, Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852
A plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below the top plate on which the object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heated coil directly above the heating coils. It is provided with a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether or not an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device.
The control device determines that the heated object is placed on the heating coil by the heated object placement determination unit, and based on the result, the heated object is placed in the display area of the display screen. Display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device operates so that the cooking conditions for the first heated object can be input by detecting that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first heated object. The induction heating cooker is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent No. 5202064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils dispersedly arranged below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. It is equipped with continuously arranged strip-shaped operation display means and control means.
The control means identifies an occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the specified occupied area and the surrounding area. The area to be heated is specified, the center position and size of the specified occupied area are estimated, and the operation means is displayed in the specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result to enable the operation means. An induction heating cooker that can be accessed by an external operation is disclosed.

In other words, instead of placing a heated object such as a pot in a specific position on the top plate for cooking, the heated object can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion can be controlled. A technique has been proposed in which the device can detect and start cooking.

The above technique can also be applied to the cooking utensil 1 of the present disclosure. That is, as described in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L indicating that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side on the first specific screen 30SP. ..

Further, it is not necessary to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL by the input key 43M2, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the cooking utensils 1 of the first to sixth embodiments, a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4 and the like are provided in the input operation unit 40 for multi-functionalization. Therefore, there is a concern that users who are not accustomed to the operation cannot easily perform the desired operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, when a specific switch is operated, the display of the input key itself is turned off and the input function of the input key is disabled, so that the number of input operation units 40 is reduced. It may be in a form that expects such a visual effect. It should be noted that a heating cooker that limits the functions that can be used according to the wishes of such a user has already been proposed by Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

Further, either the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode may be set so as not to be used by the user's operation. In that case, the setting by the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used, or it is preferable to provide an input key or a push button switch whose functions can be limited and expanded only by the user touching them.

Of each of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. It is also possible to automatically perform all or part of the processing described as being performed manually by a known method.

In the first to eighth embodiments, there are two induction heating units 17H, a left heating unit 17HL and a right heating unit 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating units. However, this may be changed to the following form.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of two adjacent heating parts when heating a large object to be heated that straddles two adjacent heating parts (as a representative example, Japanese patent). No. 5188215).

(2) Four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction under the top plate 15 and arranged close to substantially the same plane under the top plate, and the above four. It is equipped with two inverter circuits that supply electric power to the IH coils, and the four IH coils are divided into two coil groups (groups), and the two inverter circuits are divided into each of the two IH coil groups. A method for supplying electric power to each of them (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (plural) auxiliary IH coils arranged so as to surround the circumference of the circular IH coil. A method including a first inverter circuit that supplies electric power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies electric power to the auxiliary coil group (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5257542). ..

(4) A main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate, and a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other on the outside of the main IH coil. A main inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the main IH coil, a sub-inverter circuit group that independently supplies a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils to the sub-IH coil group, and the main IH coil and the plurality. Controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, as well as the heated object placement determination unit that determines whether or not the same heated object is mounted on at least one of the sub IH coils. The sub IH coil is provided with an energization control circuit, and a plurality of the sub IH coils are provided with a predetermined insulating space placed around the main IH coil at a predetermined distance from each other. The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit has the main inverter so as to have a thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform the cooperative heating operation, and then the number of the sub-IH coils that perform the cooperative heating operation increases, decreases, or is switched to another sub-IH coil. If this is the case, a method for maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Further, each component of each circuit, component, and device shown in the figure is a functional concept and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Further, in particular, the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, the display unit drive circuit 63, and the control device 105 described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 123 distribute and integrate the functions of each of these devices / circuits. The specific form is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and all or part of it may be functionally or physically distributed / integrated in any unit according to the function and operating conditions. Can be done.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that realizes each function may be dedicated hardware or a processor that executes a program stored in the memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are described as a program and stored in a storage device MM which is a memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the program stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The storage device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, or EEPROM.

Further, a part of the data or the program of the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may be held in an external recording medium (storage server or the like) without being held by the cooking cooker 1. In this case, the cooking cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Further, in particular, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63 described with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved one as appropriate. In this case, for example, the patch may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49.

One heating unit 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) to be cooked on the top plate 15 may be changed to a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is controlled by the control unit.
Further, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, or the oven heating source 188 may be changed to a gas combustion burner.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R are all "contact type input" operation units in which the user touches an input key to give an input command. As explained in the above, a non-contact method may be used in which the movement of the user's finger or hand is detected and input in a non-contact manner. Further, the voice input method may be changed to recognize and input the user's voice (see the sixth embodiment). In the case of the voice input method, a microphone or a voice receiving unit for receiving a user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to an input operation unit.

In the first to third, fifth to seventh embodiments, the input operation unit 40 is a means for selecting various control menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP, and the third specific screen 30ST. However, it may be provided in the display screens of the integrated display unit 30 which is a display means and the left and right display units 30L and 30R.

For example, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent No. 583369, which proposes a compound cooking, a display screen of the compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu of the compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the user selects the menu selection unit. A technique has been proposed in which a menu is selected by directly touching it with a finger.

Therefore, the menu of cooking and the name of the object to be cooked (a kind of identification information) that can be used in the combined cooking or the cooperative cooking mode are displayed on the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, and the display portion (the display portion). The user may directly touch the "icon" part) with his / her finger to select the menu of the cooperative cooking mode or the like.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the cooking cooker 1, and the cooking cooker 1 transmits each operation signal and command signals L1 to L10 to the outside. However, information indicating the progress such as the start and end of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 may be further transmitted. The user can know the progress information on the portable terminal device 418 or the like, and the convenience is improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, driving operation signals, etc. with the home gateway 411 inside the house HA, but it is also referred to as a power line transfer technology (“PLC technology”). You may use).

Further, in the first embodiment, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving the search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are connected to the Internet (wide area). It may be connected to each of the communication circuit networks) 416 and connected to the external server 417 via the Internet 416. In that case, the external server 417 may store and retain the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Further, the external server 417 has various cooking recipe information that can be used in the cooking device 1. Then, in response to a request from the cooking device 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418, the recipe information is searched and the extracted recipe information is provided to the cooking device 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418. May be.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Substantial scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The cooking cooker according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in the kitchen of a general house but also in a kitchen such as a public facility or a store.

1 Heat cooker 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation port 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Top surface of mouth edge 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Section board 13 Section board 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bend 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17CL coil wire 17H induction heating part 17HL left heating part (second heating part)
17HM Central heating unit 17HR Right heating unit (1st heating unit)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcing plate 23 Right input control device 24 Left input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushion material 27 Light emitting display 27L Light emitting display 27M Light emitting display 27R Light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light emitting unit 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light emitting unit 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light emitting unit 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display unit (center display unit)
30A display text 30AD additional screen 30B display text 30C two-dimensional information 30D display screen 30E caution display 30F description text 30G caution text 30H recommended text 30J specific text 30K heating source display unit 30L 1st area 30M 2nd area 30MY microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Grill cooking heating time information 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Character information (additional information)
30R 3rd area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display unit
31L Left side display 31LW Display window 31R Right side display 31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L drive circuit 37R drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal reception unit 40VS Audio signal analysis unit 40R Right operation unit (1st individual operation unit)
41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key (guide key)
43KP input key 43L1 to 43L4 input key 43M1 to 43R3 input key 43MC input key 43MS input key 43MT input key 43R1 to 43R4 input key 43MX input key 44L input key 44R input key 45L input key 45M input key 45R input key 46L window 46R Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Condenser 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 1st cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A outlet 60C fan case 60F rotary blade 60FL cooling air 60H suction port 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A outlet 61C fan case 61F rotary blade 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 Drive circuit 63CS display command unit (for the second specific screen)
63SP display command unit (for the first specific screen)
63ST display command unit (for the 3rd specific screen)
64 Vents
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Magnetic shield ring 67L Thermal power display unit 67H Thermal power display unit 67R Thermal power display unit 68 Heat source display unit 68L Display unit 68M Display unit 68R Display unit 69 High temperature notification unit 70 Cover 70A Front notch 70B Wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control unit (demand control unit)
73 Signal transmission unit 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant condenser 76m Resonant condenser 77a Input current detection unit 77am Input current detection unit 77b Output current detection unit 77bm Output current detection unit 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing Condenser 78cm Smoothing Condenser 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c diode 79cm diode 79d diode 79dm diode 80 inverter circuit board 80F first inverter circuit board 80M second inverter circuit board 81 inverter circuit 81L inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 heat sink 82B heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heat sink (first heat sink at the rear)
82B2 heat sink (second heat sink at the rear)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heat sink (first heat sink in front)
82F2 heat sink (second heat sink in front)
82FN Heat dissipation fin 82M Heat dissipation 82MF Heat dissipation fin 82MF Heat dissipation fin 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensing device 85 Electrical parts 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Vent hole 87B Drain hole 88 Inner case 88A Vent hole 88B Hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit 94L Inductive heating circuit 94R Inductive heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power supply Switch operation buttons or operation keys 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined part 101F Front plate 101H Body 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E End part 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal 109B Output terminal 109C Output terminal 110 Main body 111 Inclined part 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Back wall (rear wall surface)
113T Recess 114 Door 115 Handle 117 Through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A electric wire 119B electric wire 120 microwave heating device 120P power supply circuit part 121 inverter circuit board 121A inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat dissipation 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power supply circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 4th cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open / close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closing detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid body 154B Main body 158 Non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Vent (first intake port)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left partition plate 166R Right partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 18 Material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Peep window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Introductory port 226 Leg 264 Vent hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right side gap (third gap)
301L left side void (third void)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 Void 304 Support bracket 304V Vertical part 304H Horizontal part (flange part)
305 Vent hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical part 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower void (third void)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushion material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (cooking process display)
333 Time saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D symbol 335U symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual food information 340 Title display section of function setting 341 Explanation display text 342L Linked cooking mode selection section 342M Combined (RG) cooking mode selection section 342R Previous cooking selection section 360 icon 361 Menu display section 362 Linked cooking mode display information 373 Signal Wire 400 Home appliances 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilation device 406 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting fixture 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environmental detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Electric energy meter 415 Power line (main trunk line)
416 Wide area communication network 417 External server 418 Information communication terminal equipment 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Suction port 426 Electric fan 424 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 434 Smell sensor 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature determination circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitter / receiver unit)
447 Central control unit 448 Electric energy control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor 460 Transmitter and receiver 461 Communication control unit 462 Central processing unit (CPU)
463 ROM and RAM
464 Speaker 465 Operation unit
466 Display unit 467 Storage unit 468 Heat cooker database (storage unit)
469 Attitude detection unit 470 Remote operation information generation unit 471 Display operation unit 472 NFC input / output unit 473 Remote operation data 475 Voice input unit 480 Display screen 481 Display menu display unit 482 Left heating unit menu selection display unit 483 Heating source selection display Section 484 Range grill control menu selection display section 485 Linked cooking menu display section 486 Preparation information display section 487 Linked cooking menu name display section 488 Left heating section control menu display section (icon)
489 Control menu display section (icon) of the left heating section
490 Caution information display unit 491M Central operation unit selection unit (icon)
491L Left operation unit selection unit (icon)
491R Right operation section selection section (icon)
492 Advice display selection section (icon)
493 Control menu display section (icon) of the left heating section
494 Range grill control menu display (icon)
495 Menu screen display (icon)
496 Input confirmation key display (icon)
497 Induction heating source selection unit (icon)
498 Range grill heating source selection part (icon)
499 Linked cooking selection section (icon)
500 RG control menu selection section (icon)
500C linked cooking menu selection section (icon)
501 screen switching mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark (icon)
503 Screen switching mark (icon)
504 RG control menu name display (icon)
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display unit 507A to 507C Auxiliary information display unit 509 Preparation work reference image 510 Preparation work reference image 511 Attention information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display unit 514 Next process information display unit 515 Recommended menu display unit 516 Recommended Menu display 517 Recommended menu auxiliary information 518 Recommended menu cooking reference image 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Transmission key display (icon)
522 Stop key display (icon)
523 Detailed display indicator (icon)
524 key display (icon)
525 Display section 526 Key display section (icon)
527 key display unit 528 display unit 529 key display unit (icon)
530 Router 550 Function setting unit 551 Function setting data storage unit AH Upper air passage AL Top plate exposure range AN notification unit BL straight line (reference line)
BH depth dimension BT1 dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum size in the front-rear direction of the upper case D6 Maximum width in the front-back direction D7 Opposite spacing DP1 Depth (dimensions)
EM anomaly detection unit F1 1st air passage F2 2nd air passage FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI entrance FL1 outlet line FL2 outlet line FO exit GD1 step GP1 void GP2 void (first void)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Space between top plate and cover GP14 Space between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Void GP18 Void HC Main body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height Dimensions H7 Height dimensions H8 Height dimensions HA House HB Reference bottom HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 input information IP3 selection value signal IP4 selection value signal IP5 image signal JC human detection sensor LA protrusion dimension LD1 distance LD2 distance LF exhaust port size MC integrated control device MM storage device MM1 to MM3 storage unit MNP search unit N heated object QC feeling Seismic equipment RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension W4 Maximum width dimension in the left-right direction W5 Maximum width dimension in the left-right direction of the upper case W6 Length of the inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of the inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) dimension in the left-right direction inside the upper case W9 Hanging wall 70B Opposing distance (dimension of space in the front-back direction)
W10 distance W11 caliber W12 distance W13 distance W14 installation interval WB depth dimension WH inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB intersection XF intersection XG intersection.

Claims (56)

A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means provided with a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
With input means,
The control unit
A single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, and
A combined cooking mode in which the cooking process is automatically advanced using the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means.
The cooking process using the first heating means and the cooperative cooking mode having the cooking process using the second heating means are switched and executed by a command from the input means.
In the single cooking mode, the control pattern of the first heating means is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the combined cooking mode, the control pattern of the second heating means is determined and the heating operation is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking object to be heated is determined and the heating operation is started.
A cooking device that features that. The input means includes an input key for selecting the single cooking mode, an input key for selecting the combined cooking mode, and an input key for selecting the linked cooking mode.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. When the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the input means, the notification means has an order of a cooking step using the first heating means and a cooking step using the second heating means, and the object to be cooked. Displays the identification information indicating that, and the first specific screen that displays.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. When the combined cooking mode is selected by the input means, the notification means displays a second specific screen displaying the heating source to be used in the second heating means.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. When the single cooking mode is selected by the input means, the notification means displays information indicating the control pattern of the first heating means and standard control conditions applicable to the control pattern, respectively. Display the third specific screen,
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The first specific screen displays standard control conditions applicable to the food to be cooked.
The cooking device according to claim 3, wherein the cooker is characterized by the above. The second specific screen displays standard control conditions applicable to the heating source used in the second heating means.
The cooking device according to claim 4, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The input means includes an audio signal receiving unit into which an audio signal from a user is input and an audio signal analysis unit.
Further, a search unit for extracting a control menu for the combined cooking mode based on the audio signal data from the audio signal analysis unit is provided.
The notification means notifies the control menu for the combined cooking mode extracted by the search unit.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The input means includes an audio signal receiving unit into which an audio signal from a user is input, and a search unit for extracting the object to be cooked in the linked cooking mode based on the input data from the audio signal receiving unit. Have and
The notifying means notifies the information for identifying the cooked object for the linked cooking mode extracted by the search unit and the control conditions applicable to the cooked object.
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the first heating means is an induction heating source provided with an IH coil or a combustor provided with a gas burner. The heating source constituting the second heating means is characterized by including a microwave heating source and another heating source for heating the object to be cooked by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 9. With a heating room
Display means and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Input means and
A control unit that receives a command from the input means and controls the first heating means and the second heating means is provided.
The control unit cooperates with a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. Has a function to execute cooking mode,
When the main power is turned on, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen on the display means, and during the period of displaying the standby initial screen, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen.
(1) When the first command is received from the input means, at least one identification information of the object to be cooked that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
(2) When a second command is received from the input means, information indicating at least one control pattern in the single cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
A cooking device that features that. When the control unit receives the first command, the control unit displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen on the display means.
The cooking device according to claim 12, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. When the control unit receives the second command, the control unit displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen on the display means.
The cooking device according to claim 12, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. Information on applicable control conditions is displayed for each of the identification information on the specific screen.
The heating cooker according to claim 13. Information on applicable control conditions is displayed on the specific screen for each control pattern.
The cooking apparatus according to claim 14. The second heating means has a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber, and an oven heating source that raises the internal space temperature of the heating chamber.
The cooking device according to claim 12, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. The control unit further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are driven simultaneously or at different times.
The cooking device according to claim 17. In the cooperative cooking mode, a first cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means and the subsequent cooking step 2 is performed by the second heating means, and cooking by the second heating means. Step 1 is performed, and the cooking step 2 after that includes a second cooperative cooking mode performed by the first heating means.
The cooking device according to claim 12, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Input operation unit and
A control unit for controlling the first heating means and the second heating means is provided.
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are used in combination.
The control unit permits operation step A for determining whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is permitted for a specific object to be cooked selected by the input operation unit, and cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. In this case, when the operation step B for performing the first specific notification including the information about the cooking object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode and the cooking start command from the input operation unit are received after the first specific notification. , The operation step C for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and the operation step C are executed.
A cooking device that features that. The first specific notification includes the identification information of the object to be cooked and the information of the cooking process to be started at least earlier among the cooking process by the first heating means and the cooking process by the second heating means. , Is to display the first specific screen that is displayed collectively,
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the cooking device is characterized by the above. With a heating room
Display means and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
An input means for giving a command to the first heating means and the second heating means, and
A control unit for controlling the first heating means and the second heating means in response to a command from the input means is provided.
The control unit cooperates with a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, a cooking process using the first heating means, and a cooking process using the second heating means. Has a function to execute cooking mode,
When the main power is turned on, the control unit automatically displays the standby initial screen common to the first heating means and the second heating means on the display means, and displays the standby initial screen. During the displayed period,
(1) Upon receiving the first command to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the standby initial screen is switched to the first specific screen to display a cooking menu capable of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.
(2) When the first heating means receives a second command to specify a control pattern, the display means displays a specific screen different from the standby initial screen, and the control menu of the single cooking mode is displayed. To display,
A cooking device that features that. When the control unit receives the second command during the period of displaying the standby initial screen, the control unit provides identification information for identifying the food to be cooked and guidance for reference to the user's operation. Corresponds to the information and displays it on the first specific screen.
22. The cooking apparatus according to claim 22. When the control unit receives the selection signal of the single cooking mode during the period of displaying the standby initial screen, the information specifying at least one of the control patterns and the specified control pattern The information of the control conditions applicable to the above is associated with the display means to display the information.
22. The cooking apparatus according to claim 22. A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by using the first heating means, and after the preheating step, the control unit uses the first heating means and the object to be cooked to cook the food. It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode having a cooking step 1 for heating an object and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means after the cooking step 1.
A cooking device that features that. The notification means includes a display unit that displays identification information for each individual object to be cooked that can be cooked when the cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the input means.
25. The cooker according to claim 25. The input means includes a first operation unit that sets control conditions for the first heating means and commands the start and stop of the heating operation.
It has a second operation unit that sets the control conditions of the second heating means and commands the start and stop of the heating operation.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the second operation unit.
The preheating step is completed by the first operation unit.
The start and end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the second operation unit.
25. The cooker according to claim 25. The second heating means includes a plurality of heating sources that operate independently of each other.
The control unit has a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, and a single cooking mode.
Further having a function of executing a combined cooking mode in which one cooking step is automatically advanced by using the plurality of heating sources in the second heating means.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 25 to 27. When the temperature of the object to be heated reaches the target preheating temperature by the first heating means, the control unit notifies the notification by the notification means.
28. The cooker according to claim 28. The notification means further has a display screen.
When the cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the input means, the first specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
When the combined cooking mode is selected by the input means, the second specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
When the single cooking mode is selected by the input means, the third specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
28. The cooker according to claim 28. A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by using the first heating means, and a cooking step of heating the object to be cooked by the second heating means in parallel with the preheating step. It has a function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode having 1 and a cooking step 2 using the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step and the first heating means after the cooking step 1. rice field,
A cooking device that features that. The notification means includes a display unit that displays identification information for each individual object to be cooked that can be cooked when the cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the input means.
31. The cooker according to claim 31. The input means includes a first operation unit that sets control conditions for the first heating means and commands the start and stop of the heating operation.
It has a second operation unit that sets the control conditions of the second heating means and commands the start and stop of the heating operation.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the second operation unit.
The preheating step is completed by the first operation unit.
The start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the second operation unit.
31. The cooker according to claim 31. The second heating means includes a plurality of heating sources capable of heating independently of each other.
The control unit has a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is operated independently, and a single cooking mode.
Further having a function of executing a combined cooking mode in which one cooking step is automatically advanced by using the plurality of heating sources in the second heating means.
The cooking device according to any one of claims 31 to 33. The control unit includes a cooking step 1 using either the first heating means or the second heating means, and the first heating means or the second heating means not used in the cooking step 1. Further has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode provided with the cooking step 2 started by receiving a command from the input means after the end of the cooking step 1 by any one of the above.
The cooker according to claim 34. The notification means further has a display screen.
When the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the input means, the first specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
When the combined cooking mode is selected by the input means, the second specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
When the single cooking mode is selected by the input means, the third specific screen is displayed on the display screen.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is executed in a state where the first specific screen is displayed.
35. The cooker according to claim 35. A combined cooking mode with multiple control menus that allows two or more heating sources to operate in a predetermined sequence.
A cooperative cooking mode with multiple cooperative cooking menus that heats and cooks the objects to be cooked in each place inside the heating chamber and above the top plate in a predetermined order.
A display means for selectively displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu, and
The compound cooking mode and the input means capable of selecting the cooperative cooking mode are provided.
When the start key of the input means is operated while at least two of the control menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the control menu displayed at the display position A of the display means is displayed. One is selected as the "control menu to be executed" and shifts to the cooking process of the combined cooking mode.
When the start key is operated while at least two of the linked cooking menus are simultaneously displayed on the display means, one of the linked cooking menus displayed at the display position B is "executed". It is selected as "the cooking menu to be done" and shifts to the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode.
The input means includes an input key that sequentially displays the control menu at the display position A each time it is operated, and an input key that reversely displays the control menu at the display position A each time it is operated. , Placed adjacent to each other,
The input means has an input key for sequentially displaying the linked cooking menu at the display position B each time it is operated, and an input for displaying the linked cooking menu backward at the display position B each time it is operated. Place the keys and next to each other,
The input key for displaying the control menu and the linked cooking menu in the display position A and the display position B by forward and reverse feeding is shared in the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode. Yes,
A cooking device that features that. In the display means, in a state where at least two of the control menus are displayed at the same time, at the display position C adjacent to the display position A, one control menu displayed at the display position A is displayed. Applicable control condition A is displayed,
37. The cooker according to claim 37. The input means has an input key that sequentially displays the control condition A at the display position C each time it is operated, and an input key that displays the control condition backward at the display position C each time it is operated. And placed adjacent to each other,
38. The cooker according to claim 38. In the display means, in a state where at least two of the linked cooking menus are displayed at the same time, at the display position D adjacent to the display position B, one said linked cooking menu displayed at the display position B. The control condition B that can be applied to is displayed.
37. The cooker according to claim 37. The input operation unit displays an input key for sequentially displaying the control condition B at the display position D each time it is operated, and displays the control condition B at the display position D for reverse feed each time it is operated. Input keys and are placed next to each other,
The cooking device according to claim 40. The input key for displaying the control condition A and the control condition B in the display position C or the display position D by sequentially and reversely feeding the control condition A is shared by the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode. ing,
The cooking device according to claim 40. With the control menu displayed at the display position A, information indicating the heating source to be used, information indicating the category of the food to be cooked, and information indicating the characteristics of the control menu with respect to the control menu. , Displaying auxiliary information including at least one on the display means.
The cooking cooker according to any one of claims 37 to 39. The auxiliary information is summary information that is simply displayed in characters or symbols when the control menu is displayed, and detailed information that is displayed in characters by a user's display command or a prior function setting.
The cooker according to claim 43. The heating chamber formed inside the main body and
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
In the cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven in a predetermined order, one cooking menu can be selected from a plurality of cooking menus prepared for each type of the object to be cooked. The first selection to display and
A second selection to select one control menu from a plurality of control menus shared by a plurality of types of cooked objects in a combined cooking mode in which a plurality of the heating sources are automatically combined and driven simultaneously or at different times. Department and
A control unit for controlling the first heating means and the second heating means in response to the selection of the first selection unit and the second selection unit is provided.
With,
A cooking device that features that. The main body is further provided with an input means.
The input means is separately provided with a first input key constituting the first selection unit and a second input key constituting the second selection unit.
The cooking device according to claim 45. The main body is further provided with display means.
The input means further includes a function setting input means for changing the function of the control unit.
The function setting input means can set the priority to be displayed on the display means between the cooking menu and the control menu.
The cooker according to claim 46. The main body is further provided with display means.
The display means displays the selection results of the first selection unit and the second selection unit, respectively.
The cooking device according to claim 45. With a heating room
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated outside the heating chamber,
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
A display means for notifying cooking information and
A selection means for selecting a linked cooking menu for the linked cooking mode prepared for each type of cooked object and a control menu shared by multiple types of cooked objects.
A control unit that controls the display means, the first heating means, and the second heating means in response to a command from the selection means.
A function setting unit that limits the functions of the control unit is provided.
The control unit uses one or both of the plurality of heating sources of the second heating means in combination to execute a combined cooking mode having the control menu, and the first heating means. A function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking process to be used and a cooking process using the second heating means are combined, and a function of controlling the display means according to information set in the function setting unit. Have and
The control unit is preset in the function setting unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected or when the door of the heating chamber is opened after the main power is supplied and the display means is activated. When the permission condition is satisfied, the first specific screen for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display means.
A cooking device that features that. The selection means includes a first input key for selecting the linked cooking menu and a second input key for selecting the control menu.
The cooking cooker according to claim 49. It also has a function setting input key for changing the function of the control unit.
The priority can be set between the display of the linked cooking menu and the display of the control menu by the function setting input key.
The cooking cooker according to claim 49. A first heating means for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A second heating means for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber,
Notification means for notifying information on cooking and
A control unit that controls the heating operation,
It is provided with an input means for giving a command to the control unit.
The control unit has a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber using the second heating means, and a cooking step of heating the cooked object using the second heating means after the preheating step. 1 and a cooking step 2 in which the cooked object heated in the cooking step 1 is further heated by heating the cooked object using the first heating means after the cooking step 1. Equipped with a function to execute the cooperative preheating cooking mode that it had,
A cooking device that features that. The input means includes an input key for selecting an independent cooking mode in which the first heating means is independently driven, and an input key for selecting an object to be cooked to which the linked preheating cooking mode is applied based on identification information. And each
The cooking cooker according to claim 52. When the cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected by the input means, the notification means displays a first specific screen displaying the order of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 and the identification information.
The cooker according to claim 53. When the single cooking mode is selected by the input means, the notification means displays information indicating a control pattern of the first heating means and standard control conditions applicable to the control pattern, respectively. Display a specific screen,
The cooker according to claim 53. The first heating means corresponds to the first heating unit and the second heating unit, respectively.
The input means includes a central operation unit for the second heating means, a first individual operation unit for the first heating unit, and a second individual operation unit for the second heating unit. ,
The control unit includes a program for sequentially executing the preheating step, the cooking step 1, and the cooking step 2 for the linked preheating cooking mode.
The control unit
(1) When the cooking menu of the cooperative preheating cooking mode is selected in the central operation unit, the operation pattern is shifted to the cooperative preheating cooking mode.
(2) The heating operation of the cooking step 1 in the linked preheating cooking mode is started and ended in response to a command from the central operation unit.
(3) During the period of the cooking step 1, a part or all of the input functions in the first individual operation unit or the second individual operation unit is invalidated.
(4) When the cooking step 1 is completed, the input function of the first individual operation unit or the second individual operation unit is restored, and the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking step 2 is the first individual operation unit. Execute according to the command from the operation unit or the second individual operation unit.
The cooking cooker according to claim 52.

Images